Toyota 2005 Tundra Owners Manual

2015-09-07

: Toyota Toyota-2005-Tundra-Owners-Manual-763176 toyota-2005-tundra-owners-manual-763176 toyota pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 498

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0504)

Foreword
Welcome to the growing group of value−conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering and
quality construction of each vehicle we build.
This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupants
follow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble−free motoring. For
important information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.
When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your complete
satisfaction. Your Toyota dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.
If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, or you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number:

D U.S. OWNERS:
Toyota Customer Assistance Center
D CANADIAN OWNERS: Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre

Toll−free: 1−800−331−4331
Toll−free: 1−888−TOYOTA−8 (1−888−869−6828)

Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.
All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy of
continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may
find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION

All rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of Toyota
Motor Corporation.

2005 TUNDRA from Apr. ’05 Prod. (OM34440U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0504)

Important information about this manual
Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Safety symbol

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle damage warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully to
avoid possible injury or damage.
The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they are
used in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION
This is a
injury to
informed
order to
others.

warning against anything which may cause
people if the warning is ignored. You are
about what you must or must not do in
reduce the risk of injury to yourself and
When you see the safety symbol
shown above, it means: “Do not...”;
“Do not do this”; or “Do not let this
happen”.

NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause
damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning
is ignored. You are informed about what you must or
must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of
damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

2005 TUNDRA from Apr. ’05 Prod. (OM34440U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0504)

Model code
Check the model code to see what type of model your vehicle is.

Engine type
GSK: 1GR−FE
engine
UCK: 2UZ−FE engine

U C K 3 0

Cab type

Grade

T: Standard cab
A: Access cab
P: Double cab

D: Standard grade
S: SR5 grade
L: Limited grade

− T R

Driving system

Deck type

30, 31: Two−wheel drive
40, 41: Four−wheel drive

R: Standard bed
S: StepSide bed

The model code appears on the Certification Label with the heading “MODEL”.
See “Your Toyota’s identification” in Section 2 for the Certification Label location.

2005 TUNDRA from Apr. ’05 Prod. (OM34440U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SECTION

INDEX
Index

491

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SECTION

1− 1

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Overview of instruments and controls

Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Instrument cluster overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Indicator symbols on the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Instrument panel overview (standard and access cab models)
"Vehicles with manual transmission
1. Side vents
2. Instrument cluster
3. Center vents
4. Personal lights
5. Garage door opener box or auxiliary
box
6. Side defroster outlet
7. Glove box
8. Power door lock switches
9. Power window switches
10. Manual transmission gear shift lever
11. Rear console box
12. Cup holders
13. Parking brake lever
14. Tire pressure warning system reset
switch
15. Lower vent
16. Hood lock release lever
17. Window lock switch
18. Power rear view mirror control switches

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

"Vehicles with automatic transmission (type A)
1. Side vents
2. Instrument cluster
3. Automatic transmission selector lever
4. Center vents
5. Personal lights
6. Garage door opener box or auxiliary
box
7. Side defroster outlet
8. Glove box
9. Power door lock switches
10. Power window switches
11. Auxiliary box
12. Rear console box
13. Cup holders
14. Passenger airbag manual on−off switch
15. Tire pressure warning system reset
switch
16. Lower vent
17. Hood lock release lever
18. Parking brake pedal
19. Window lock switch
20. Power rear view mirror control switches

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

"Vehicles with automatic transmission (type B)
1. Side vents
2. Instrument cluster
3. Automatic transmission selector lever
4. Center vents
5. Personal lights
6. Garage door opener box or auxiliary
box
7. Side defroster outlet
8. Glove box
9. Power door lock switches
10. Power window switches
11. Rear condole box
12. Cup holders
13. Tire pressure warning system reset
switch
14. Lower vent
15. Hood lock release lever
16. Parking brake pedal
17. Window lock switch
18. Power rear view mirror control switches

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

1. Outside rear view mirror heater switch
2. Power back window switch
3. Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light switches
4. Ignition switch
5. Wiper and washer switches
6. Automatic transmission shift position
“L” switch (“SHIFT L” switch)
7. Emergency flasher switch
8. Audio system or navigation system
including audio system
(For the navigation system, see the
separate “Navigation System Owner’s
Manual”)
9. Air conditioning controls
10. Front passenger’s occupant
classification indicator light/front
passenger’s seat belt reminder
light/passenger airbag on−off indicator
light
11. Cargo lamp switch
12. Clock
13. “4LO” switch
(transfer mode selector switch)
14. Cup holder

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

15. Power outlets
16. Passenger airbag manual on−off switch
17. Ashtray
18. Cigarette lighter
19. “2WD/4HI” switch
(transfer mode selector switch)
20. “AUTO LSD” switch
21. Cruise control switch
22. Audio remote control switches
23. Tilt steering lock release lever
24. Toyota vehicle intrusion protection
system (TVIP) indicator light
25. Instrument panel light control knob

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Instrument panel overview (double cab models)
1. Side vents
2. Instrument cluster
3. Center vents
4. Multi−information display
5. Personal lights
6. Auxiliary box
7. Electric moon roof switches
8. Side defroster outlet
9. Glove box
10. Power door lock switches
11. Power window switches
12. Seat heater switches
13. Rear console box
14. Input terminal adapter
15. Headphone input jacks and headphone
volume control dials
16. Power outlets
17. Cup holders
18. Power outlet main switch
19. Tire pressure warning system reset
switch
20. Lower vent

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

21. Hood lock release lever
22. Parking brake pedal
23. Window lock switch

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

1. Power back window switch
2. Power rear view mirror control switches
3. Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags
off switch (“RSCA OFF” switch)
4. Instrument panel light control knob
5. Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light switches
6. Wiper and washer switches
7. Automatic transmission selector lever
8. Automatic transmission shift position
“L” switch (“SHIFT L” switch)
9. Audio system or navigation system
including audio system
(For the navigation system, see the
separate “Navigation System Owner’s
Manual”)
10. Air conditioning controls
11. Front passenger’s occupant
classification indicator light/front
passenger’s seat belt reminder light
12. Cargo lamp switch
13. Back window and outside rear view
mirror defogger switch
14. Clock
15. Cup holder
16. Power outlets
17. Ashtray

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

18. “4LO” switch
(transfer mode selector switch)
19. Cigarette lighter
20. “2WD/4HI” switch
(transfer mode selector switch)
21. “AUTO LSD” switch
22. Emergency flasher switch
23. Cruise control switch
24. Ignition switch
25. Audio remote control switches
26. Tilt steering lock release lever

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Instrument cluster overview
"Without tachometer

1. Engine coolant temperature gauge

3. Speedometer

5. Trip meter reset knob

2. Service reminder indicators and
indicator lights

4. Fuel gauge

6. Odometer and two trip meters

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

"With tachometer

1. Service reminder indicators and
indicator lights

4. Speedometer

7. Trip meter reset knob

2. Oil pressure gauge

5. Fuel gauge

8. Odometer and two trip meters

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

9. Voltmeter

3. Tachometer

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel

Brake system warning light∗1

D Vehicle stability control system warning

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1

D Traction control system warning light∗1
D “AUTO LSD” system warning light∗1

light∗1

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Open door warning light∗1

Discharge warning light∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Low engine oil pressure warning light∗1

Low tire pressure warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

Unengaged “Park” warning light∗1

Low fuel level warning light∗1

Automatic transmission fluid temperature
warning light∗1 (four−wheel drive models)

Anti−lock brake system warning light∗1

Low windshield washer fluid level warning
light∗1
Engine oil replacement reminder light∗1
(for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D Front passenger occupant classification

Low speed four−wheel drive indicator light∗3
(four−wheel drive models)

D Passenger airbag on−off indicator light

Slip indicator light

indicator light

Theft deterrent system indicator light

Vehicle stability control system off indicator light

Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off
indicator light∗2

“AUTO LSD” indicator light

Headlight high beam indicator light

Cruise control indicator light∗4

Turn signal indicator lights
Overdrive−off indicator light
Automatic transmission indicator lights

∗1 :

For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers” in Section 1−6.

∗2 :

For details, see “Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off
switch” in Section 1−3.

∗3 :

If this light flashes, see “Four−wheel drive system” in Section 1−7.

∗4 :

If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” in Section 1−7.

High speed four−wheel drive indicator light∗3
(four−wheel drive models)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SECTION

1− 10

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Other equipment

Multi−information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter and ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power outlets (12 VDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power outlet (115 VAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Garage door opener box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coin holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact disc and cassette tape holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cassette tape holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Note pad holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grocery bag/cargo net hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

308
318
318
319
320
322
322
325
327
329
332
333
334
336
336
337

307

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Multi−information display—
1. “E/M” button
2. Garage door opener buttons
3. “MODE” button
4. Garage door opener indicator
5. Outside temperature display
6. Compass

308

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Before using the
multi−information display
Operate the multi−information display
with the ignition switch on.
When the ignition switch is turned to
“ON”, the last previously used mode displayed just before the ignition switch is
turned off will appear.
When the instrument panel lights are
turned on, the brightness of the display
will be reduced.

“E/M” button

“MODE” button

This button is used to switch between
English/U.S. Customary System and
metric units of the outside temperature
display.

This button is used to select the item.

Each time you push this button, the display switches. This is also linked to the
multi−information display. The display variations are as follows;
Indication

Outside
temperature

English/U.S. Customary
System (E)

Metric (M)

Every time you push the “MODE” button,
the display toggles.
For more details, see “—Outside temperature display” in this Section.

CAUTION
Do not adjust the display while the
vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.

The initial mode will be English/U.S. Customary System units, however, if the unit
is switched to metric and the ignition
switch is off, it will display metric units
when the ignition switch is turned to “ON”.

309

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Garage door opener

The garage door opener (
Universal Transceiver) is manufactured
under license from HomeLink and can
be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks,
home lighting systems, and security
systems, etc.

(a) Programming the

HomeLink

The HomeLink in your vehicle has 3
buttons and you can store one program
for each button.
To ensure correct programming into the
HomeLink, install a new battery in the
hand−held transmitter prior to programming.
The battery side of the hand−held transmitter must be pointed away from the
HomeLink during the programming process.
For Canadian users, follow the procedure
in “Programming an entrance gate/programming all devices in the Canadian
market”.
1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink buttons
you want to program. Push and hold
down one of the buttons until the indicator corresponding to the selected
channel begins to flash.

2. Place your hand−held garage transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from
the surface of the HomeLink.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink
in view while programming.
3. Simultaneously press and hold the
hand−held garage transmitter button
along with the selected HomeLink button.
4. When the indicator light on the
HomeLink changes from a slow to a
rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can
release both buttons.
5. Test the operation of the HomeLink by
pressing the newly programmed button.
If programming a garage door opener,
check to see if the garage door opens
and closes.
If the garage door does not operate, identify if your garage transmitter is of the
“Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if
the indicator light (on the HomeLink)
flashes rapidly and then remains lit after
2 seconds. If your garage transmitter is
the “Rolling Code” type, proceed to the
heading “Programming a rolling code system”.

310

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Programming a rolling code system

The ceiling mounted garage door opener
motor
should
now
recognize
the
HomeLink unit and be able activate the
garage door up/down.

6. Test the operation of the HomeLink by
pressing the newly programmed button.
Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.

If your device is “Rolling Code”
equipped, it is necessary to follow
steps 1 through 4 under the heading
“Programming the HomeLink” before
proceeding with the steps listed below.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each remaining HomeLink button to program
another rolling code system.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each remaining HomeLink button to program
another device.

Programming an entrance gate/programming all devices in the Canadian market

Programming other devices

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each remaining HomeLink button to program
another device.

1. Locate the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor.
The exact location and color of the
button may vary by brand of garage
door opener. Refer to the owner’s
guide supplied by the garage door
opener manufacturer for the location of
this “training” button.
2. Press the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds
in which to initiate step 3 below.
3. Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink button twice. The
garage door may open. If the door
does open, the programming process is
complete. If the door does not open,
press and release the button a third
time. This third press and release will
complete the programming process by
opening the garage door.

1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink buttons you want to program.
2. Place
your
hand−held gate/device
transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)
away
from
the
surface
of
the
HomeLink.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink
in view while programming.
3. Press
and
hold
HomeLink button.

the

selected

4. Continuously press and release (cycle)
the hand−held gate/device transmitter
button every two seconds until step 5
is complete.
5. When the indicator light on the
HomeLink changes from a slow to a
rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can
release both buttons.

To program other devices such as home
security systems, home door locks or
lighting, contact your authorized Toyota
dealer for assistance.
Reprogramming a button
buttons cannot be
Individual HomeLink
erased, however, to reprogram a single
button, follow the procedure “Programming
the HomeLink”.
(b) Operating the HomeLink
To operate the HomeLink, press the
appropriate HomeLink button to activate
the programmed device. The HomeLink
indicator light should come on. The
HomeLink continues to send the signal
for up to 20 seconds as long as the
button is pressed.

311

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

(c) Erasing
the
entire
HomeLink
memory (all three programs)
To erase all previously programmed codes
at one time, press and hold down the 2
outside buttons for 20 seconds until the
indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase
the programs stored in the HomeLink
memory.

CAUTION

When programming the HomeLink

Universal Transceiver, you may be
operating a garage door or other
device. Make sure people and objects are out of the way of the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or damage.

Do not use this HomeLink Univer-

sal Transceiver with any garage
door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards.
(This includes any garage door
opener model manufactured before
April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener which cannot detect an object
(signaling the door to stop and reverse), does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these features
increases risk of serious injury or
death.

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS−210 of the IC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undersired operation.
WARNING: This transmitter has been
tested and complies with FCC and IC
rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
device.

312

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Outside temperature display

—Compass
The displayed value is updated every 2
second.
The displayed temperature ranges from
−30C (−22F) up to 50C (122F).
If an abnormality exists in the connection
of the outside air temperature sensor,
“−−C” (“−−F”) will appear on the display.
If “−−C” (“−−F”) appears on the display,
contact your Toyota dealer.
There may be a case that “−−C” (“−−F”)
appears momentarily when the ignition is
quickly turned to “ON”. It is normal if it
goes out soon.

The outside temperature display indicates the outside air temperature.
Every time you push the “MODE” button,
the display toggles through the following
information. To use the outside temperature display, push the “MODE” button until
the outside air temperature is displayed.
1. Compass and outside temperature
2. Display off (no compass)
3. Compass
4. Outside temperature
To set the unit, push the “E/M” button
until the desired unit display appears.

The compass indicates the direction
that the vehicle is heading. In the
above case, it shows that the vehicle is
heading south.
The direction display is updated every 2
seconds.
Displays

Directions

N
NE
E
SE
S
SW
W
NW

North
Northeast
East
Southeast
South
Southwest
West
Northwest

313

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

The compass may not show the correct
direction in the following conditions:

The vehicle is stopped immediately af-

If the direction is not indicated or the
system does not operate properly, contact
your Toyota dealer.

ter turning.

The compass does not adjust while the
vehicle is stopped.

The ignition switch is turned off immediately after turning.

The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
The vehicle is in a place where the
earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel
tower, between buildings, roof parking,
near a crossing, near a large vehicle,
etc.).

The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a
magnet or a metal object on or near
the roof.)

The battery has been disconnected.
The compass works to calibrate the direction automatically while the vehicle is in
motion, if deviation is small.

Compass sensor

The compass sensor is on the inside of
the roof.

NOTICE
Do not put magnets or a metal object
on or near the roof of the vehicle.
Doing this may cause malfunction of
the compass sensor.

For additional precision or for complete
calibrating,
see
“CALIBRATING
THE
COMPASS” below.

314

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviation
calibration)
The direction display on the compass
deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The
angle of deviation varies according to the
geographic position of the vehicle.
To adjust for this deviation;
1. Stop the vehicle in a level place and
switch the display to the outside temperature. (To switch to this mode, see
“—Outside temperature display” in this
Section.)
2. Push and hold both the “MODE” and
“E/M” buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds until the “VAR” indication appears
on the compass display.
3. Push the “E/M” button several times
until the desired zone number appears
on the compass display.
If the button is not pushed for 10 seconds, the display returns to the compass/
outside temperature mode and the number
that is last set is memorized.
To select the zone where the vehicle is
currently located, refer to the following
map.

315

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Samoa:

Guam:

Saipan:

After calibration, leaving the system for
several seconds returns to the compass
mode.

CAUTION
Do not adjust the display while the
vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.

Zone numbers

316

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2. Push and hold both the “MODE” and
“E/M” buttons simultaneously for 10
seconds until the “CAL” indication appears on the compass display. (At this
time, the compass display is locked in
“N”.)

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circling
calibration)
Sometimes the direction display on the
compass may not change after a turn. In
this case, the compass needs to be calibrated.
To calibrate the compass manually, do the
following;
1. Stop the vehicle in a level place and
switch the display to the outside temperature. (To switch to this mode, see
“—Outside temperature display” in this
Section.)

3. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h
(5 mph) or less. If there is not enough
space to drive in a circle, drive around
the block.
When the “CAL” indication goes off and
the compass returns to the normal mode,
calibration is complete.
If you want to restart the calibration before it is complete, push both of the
“MODE” and “E/M” buttons simultaneously
for 10 seconds again.

317

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Clock

Cigarette lighter and ashtrays

Perform circling calibration just after
you have purchased your Toyota. And
then always perform circling calibration
after the battery has been removed, replaced or disconnected.

Do not perform circling calibration of

the compass in a place where the
earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel
tower, between buildings, roof parking,
near a crossing, near a large vehicle,
etc.).

During calibration, do not operate elec-

tric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with
the calibration.

CAUTION

When doing the circling calibration,

be sure to secure a wide space,
and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not
violate any local traffic rules while
performing circling calibration.

To reset the hour: Push the “H” button.
To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.

Cigarette lighter and front ashtray

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
If the electrical power source has been
disconnected from the clock, the time display will automatically be set to 1:00 (one
o’clock).
When the instrument panel lights are
turned on, the brightness of the time indication will be reduced.

Do not adjust the display while the

vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.

Rear ashtray

318

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Power outlets (12 VDC)
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
To use the cigarette lighter, press it in.
After it finishes heating up, it automatically pops out ready for use.
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed
in.
Use a Toyota genuine cigarette lighter or
equivalent for replacement.
ASHTRAYS
Front: To use the ashtray, pull it out.
Rear: To use the ashtray, raise the lid.
When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching
fire. After using the ashtray, push it back
in completely.

Type A

Type C

Type B

Type D

Front—To remove the ashtray, press down
on the lock spring plate and pull out.
Rear—To remove the ashtray, pull it out.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or sudden stop
while driving, always completely close
the ashtray after use.

319

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Power outlet (115 VAC)
NOTICE
z To prevent the fuse from being
blown, do not use the electricity
over the total vehicle capacity of
12V/120W.
z To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not use the power
outlets longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.

Type E

The power outlets (12 VDC) are designed for power supply for car accessories.

z Close the power outlet lids when
the power outlets are not in use.
Inserting anything other than an appropriate plug that fits the outlet,
or allowing any liquid to get into
the outlet may cause electrical failure or short circuits.

This power outlet (115 VAC) is designed
for use as a power supply for electric
appliances in the vehicle.
The key must be in the “ON” position for
the power outlet to be used.
The maximum capacity for this power outlet is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to
use an appliance that requires more than
115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit
will activate and cut the power supply.
The power supply will restart automatically
when you use an appliance that operates
within the 115 VAC/100W limits.

320

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

NOTICE

Certain electrical appliances may cause
radio noise.

z To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not use the power
outlet longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.
z Close the power outlet lid when the
power outlet is not in use. Inserting
anything other than an appropriate
plug that fits the outlet may cause
electrical failure or short circuits.
Main switch

To use the power outlet, push the main
switch on the instrument panel.
An indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the power outlet is ready for use.
Push the main switch once again to turn
the power outlet off. When the power outlet is not in use, make sure that the main
switch is turned off.

The power outlet is not designed for
the following electric appliances even
though their power consumption is under 115 VAC/100W. These appliances
may not operate properly.

Appliances with high initial peak watt-

age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,
compressor−driven refrigerators, electric
pumps, electric tools, etc.

Measuring devices which process pre-

cise data: medical equipment, measuring instruments, etc.

Other appliances requiring an extremely

stable power supply: microcomputer−
controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.

321

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Glove box

Garage door opener box

To use the glove box, do this.
To open: Pull the lever.

The box is designed to store a garage
door opener transmitter.

To lock: Insert the master key and turn it
clockwise.

Open the cover and remove the Velcro
square.

Remove the paper strip covering the adhesive on back side of square and adhere
the square to back side of the transmitter
near the center.

On some models, the glove box light will
come on when the glove box is opened
with the headlight switch on.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the glove box door
closed while driving.

322

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Please note if transmitter has wire clip for
sun visor, this clip must be removed prior
to adhesion of the Velcro.

Place the transmitter with Velcro square
facing inside of box into the box. Make
sure the transmitter button is located
above button pins.

Remove spacers from the center panel.
Place the largest spacer on the pin that
would be below transmitter button when
the cover is closed. Close the cover.

323

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden
stop, always keep the garage door
opener box closed while driving.

Keep the remaining spacers away
from children.

When the garage door opener transmitter
is properly installed, you can operate the
transmitter by pushing the center panel of
the cover.

If the center panel does not contact your
garage door opener transmitter:

Check to see if spacer is on the correct pin.

Attach another spacer to the top of

original spacer. Check operation. If required, continue to add spacers until
contact is achieved.

If the transmitter is clattering during driving, fill in a piece of felt or pad to prevent
the transmitter from clattering.

324

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Auxiliary boxes
To use the auxiliary boxes, open the
lids as shown in the following illustrations.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden
stop, always keep the auxiliary box
closed while driving.

Type A and B only—As these hold-

Standard and access cab models only—

Installing the cover—

The auxiliary box (stored in the glove
box) and garage door opener box are
interchangeable.

Align the hinges to the pivots, and press
each hinge until you hear a click.

Removing the cover—
Half open the cover. Pinch each hinge and
pull it out of its pivot one at a time as
shown above.
Do not remove the cover forcibly.

Make sure that
closes smoothly.

the

cover

ers are designed for holding a light
object such as an eyeglass, do not
place any heavy objects in them.
Heavy objects may cause the holder
to open and contents to fly out resulting in injuries.

opens and

NOTICE
Type A and B only—During hot weather, the interior of the vehicle becomes
very hot. Do not leave anything flammable or deformable such as a lighter, glasses, etc. inside.

325

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Type A

Type D

Front

Type B

Type C

Type E (under the rear seat of access cab
models)

326

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Rear console box (type A)
UPPER TRAY
To access the upper tray, raise the console box lid.

CAUTION
Front

To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the upper tray closed
while driving.

Type F (under the rear seat of double cab
models)

327

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Rear console box (type B)
UPPER TRAY
To access the upper tray, raise the console box upper lid while pushing the
lock release button.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the upper tray closed
while driving.

CONSOLE BOX
To access the rear console box, raise
the upper tray by pulling up the lock
release lever.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the console box closed
while driving.

328

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Coin holder (type A)
The rear console box is equipped with
a coin holder.
To use the coin holder:
1. Raise the console box lid.
2. Push coins down into the holder.

CONSOLE BOX
To access the rear console box, raise
the console box lid by pulling up the
lock release lever.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the console box closed
while driving.

329

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Coin holder (type B)
The rear console box is equipped with
a coin holder.
To use the coin holder:
1. Raise the console box upper lid while
pushing the lock release button.
2. Push coins down into the holder.
The coin holder is detachable.

330

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Coin holder (type C)
The coin holder can be set in the console box.

The auxiliary box is equipped with a
coin holder.

To set the coin holder in the console box,
raise the console box lid by pulling up the
lock release lever.

To use the coin holder:
1. Raise the auxiliary box lid while pushing the lock release button.
2. Push coins down into the holder.
The coin holder is detachable.

331

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Compact disc and cassette
tape holder (type A)

Compact disc and cassette
tape holder (type B)
The rear console box is equipped with
compact disc and cassette tape holders.
To use the holders, raise the console box
lid and upper tray by pulling up the lock
release lever.
The plates for the compact disc and cassette tape holders are detachable.

332

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Cassette tape holder
The rear console box is equipped with
a compact disc and cassette tape holder.
To use the holder, raise the console box
lid by pulling up the lock release lever.
The compact disc and cassette tape holder is detachable.

The auxiliary box is equipped with a
cassette tape holder.
To use the holder, raise the auxiliary box
lid while pushing the lock release button.
The plate for the cassette tape holder is
detachable.

333

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Cup holders
The cup holder is designed for holding
cups or drink−cans securely. To use
them, observe the following illustrations.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other

than cups or drink−cans in the cup
holder, as such items may be
thrown about and possibly injure
people in the vehicle during sudden
braking or in an accident.

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden
stop while driving, keep the cup
holder closed when it is not in use.

Type A

NOTICE
Type A only—As this holder is designed for holding soft cups only, do
not place too heavy a cup, drink−can
or bottle in it.

Type B

Type C

334

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Type C cup holders are equipped with
a detachable adapter for each holder.
When you remove the adapter, a bigger
cup can be held in the holder.

Type D

Type F

Type E

Type G

335

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Note pad holder

Grocery bag/cargo net hooks
The rear console box is equipped with
a note pad holder. This is designed to
hold small paper such as note pads.

Grocery bag hooks

To use the holder, raise the console box
upper lid while pushing the lock release
button.

CAUTION

Do not write on the note pad holder
while the vehicle is moving.

Do not place anything else on the
note pad holder. Such
thrown about in the
and possibly cause
sudden braking or an

items may be
compartment
injury during
accident.

Cargo net hooks

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden
stop while driving, keep the console
box upper lid closed when it is not
in use.

336

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Floor mat
These hooks are designed to hang
things like grocery bags or cargo net.
Although the cargo net itself is not included as an original equipment, these
hooks can be used to hang the cargo net.

NOTICE
z To prevent damage to the hooks,
avoid hanging heavy loads on them
when using them as grocery bag
hooks.
z To prevent damage to the hook,
avoid hanging things other than a
cargo net on it when using them as
cargo net hooks.

Use a floor mat of the correct size.
If the floor carpet and floor
hole, then it is designed for
locking clip. Fix the floor mat
clip into the hole in the floor

mat have a
use with a
with locking
carpet.

CAUTION
Make sure the floor mat is properly
placed on the floor carpet. If the floor
mat slips and interferes with the
movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an accident.

337

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

338

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SECTION

1− 2

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Keys and Doors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wireless remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power back window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toyota vehicle intrusion protection system (TVIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft deterrent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16
16
18
20
21
31
34
35
35
37
38
39
41
42
45

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Front doors (standard and
access cab models)

Keys

These keys work in every lock.

KEY NUMBER PLATE

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Your vehicle is supplied with two kinds
of keys.

Your key number is shown on the plate.
Keep the plate in a safe place such as
your wallet, not in the vehicle.

Insert the key into the keyhole and turn
it.

1. Master keys—These keys work in every lock.
2. Sub key—This key will not work in the
glove box.
To protect items locked in the glove box
when using valet parking, leave the sub
key with the attendant.
Since the side doors can be locked without a key, you should always carry a
spare key in case you accidentally lock
your keys inside the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if you
need additional keys, duplicates can be
made by a Toyota dealer using the key
number.
We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in a safe place.

To lock: Turn the key forward.
To unlock: Turn the key backward.
Vehicles with power door lock system—
Both doors lock and unlock simultaneously
with either door. In the driver’s door lock,
turning the key once will unlock the driver’s door and twice in succession will unlock the driver’s door and passenger’s
door simultaneously.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

LOCKING
AND
UNLOCKING
POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

WITH

Push the switch.
To lock: Push the switch down on the
front side.
To unlock: Push the switch down on the
rear side.
Both doors lock or unlock simultaneously.

CAUTION

LOCKING
AND
UNLOCKING
INSIDE LOCK KNOB

WITH

Driver’s side

Move the lock knob.
To lock: Push the knob forward.
To unlock: Pull the knob backward.
Closing the door with the lock knob in the
lock position will also lock the door. Be
careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle.

Before driving, be sure that the doors
are closed and locked, especially
when small children are in the vehicle. Along with the proper use of
seat belts, locking the doors helps
prevent the driver and passengers
from being thrown out from the vehicle during an accident. It also helps
prevent the doors from being opened
unintentionally.

Vehicles with power door lock system—
The door will not lock if the key is left in
the ignition switch when closing the front
doors.
Passenger’s side

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Side doors
(double cab models)
When all the doors are unlocked simultaneously using a key, the interior light, ignition switch light, step light come on for
about 15 seconds and cargo lamp for
about 20 seconds before fading out. (For
details, see “Center interior and personal
lights”, “Ignition switch and step lights”
and “Cargo lamp” in Section 1−5.)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY
Insert the key into the keyhole and turn
it.

LOCKING
AND
UNLOCKING
INSIDE LOCK KNOB

WITH

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Turn the key forward.
To unlock: Turn the key backward.

To lock: Push the knob forward.
To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

All the doors lock and unlock simultaneously with either front door. In the driver’s door lock, turning the key once will
unlock the driver’s door and twice in succession will unlock all the doors simultaneously.

The front doors can be opened by pulling
the inside handles even if the lock knobs
are in the locked position.

This double key turning operation to unlock all the doors can be changed to a
single key turning operation. For details,
contact your Toyota dealer.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

LOCKING
AND
UNLOCKING
POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

CAUTION

Push the switch.

Do not pull the inside handle of the
front doors while driving. The doors
will open and an accident may occur.
Toyota strongly recommends that all
children be placed in the rear seat of
the vehicle.
Closing the door with the lock knob in the
lock position will also lock the door. Be
careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle.
Doors cannot be locked when either front
door is open and the key is in the ignition.

WITH

To lock: Push the switch down on the
front side.
To unlock: Push the switch down on the
rear side.
All the doors lock or unlock simultaneously.

Driver’s side

When the front doors are locked with the
inside lock knob, the key or the wireless
remote control transmitter, the power door
lock switch will not work until either front
door is unlocked with the key, lock knob,
or wireless remote control transmitter.

Passenger’s side

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Access doors
(access cab models)
CAUTION
Before driving, be sure that the doors
are closed and locked, especially
when small children are in the vehicle. Along with the proper use of
seat belts, locking the doors helps
prevent the driver and passengers
from being thrown out from the vehicle during an accident. It also helps
prevent the doors from being opened
unintentionally.
REAR DOOR CHILD−PROTECTORS
Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”
position as shown on the label.
When the child−protector is locked, you
cannot open the rear door by the inside
door handle. We recommend using this
feature whenever small children are in the
vehicle.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Wireless remote control
(standard and access cab
models for U.S.A. only)—
The wireless remote control system is
designed to lock or unlock all the
doors or activate the “PANIC” mode
from a distance within approximately 1
m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.

For easy access to the rear seat, open
the access door (rear door).
To open: First, open the front door widely.
Then pull the outside handle or inside lever of the access door.

When you operate any switch, push it
slowly and securely.

If you try to open the front and rear doors
simultaneously, they will not open.

The wireless remote control transmitter is
an electronic component. Observe the following instructions in order not to cause
damage to the transmitter.

To close: First, close the access door
completely. Then close the front door.
You can open and close the access door
only when the front door is widely opened.

NOTICE
The front door and access door could
be damaged if they hit each other
when being opened or closed. Be
sure to follow the above instructions.

D Do not leave the transmitter in places
1. Indicator light
2. “LOCK” switch
3. “UNLOCK” switch
4. “PANIC” switch

where the temperature becomes high
such as on the dashboard.

D Do not disassemble it.
D Avoid knocking it hard against other
objects or dropping it.

D Avoid putting it in water.
You can use up to 4 wireless remote control transmitters for the same vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for detailed
information.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Locking and unlocking
doors
If the wireless remote control transmitter
does not actuate the doors or alarm, or
operate from a normal distance, or the
indicator light on the transmitter is
dimmed or does not come on:

MODEL/FCC ID: BAB237131−056
CAN: 2024 102 1519
ASSEMBLED IN U.S.A.

D Check for closeness to a radio trans-

This complies with Part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

D The battery may have been consumed.

(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

mitter such as a radio station or an
airport which can interfere with normal
operation of the transmitter.
Check the battery in the transmitter. To
replace the battery, see “—Replacing
battery”.

If you lose your transmitter, contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
avoid the possibility of theft, or an accident. (See “If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter” in Section 4.)

Locking operation

Unlocking operation

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Activating panic mode
To lock and unlock all the doors, push
the switches slowly and securely. At
this time, the indicator light on the
transmitter flash once.
To lock: Push the “LOCK” switch. All the
doors are locked simultaneously. At this
time one beep will be heard, and the tail
lights and front side marker lights will
flash once.
Check to see that the doors are securely
locked.
If any door is not securely closed, locking
cannot be performed by the “LOCK”
switch and a beep will sound continuously
for 5 seconds. However, if the key is in
the ignition, a beep will not sound.
To stop the beep, close all the doors securely or push the “UNLOCK” switch.
To unlock: Push the “UNLOCK” switch
once to unlock the driver’s door alone.
Pushing the switch twice within 3 seconds
unlocks all the doors simultaneously. Each
time the “UNLOCK” switch is pushed, two
beeps will be heard, and the tail lights
and front side marker lights will flash
twice.

When the “UNLOCK” switch is pressed,
the interior light, personal light come on.
The lights remain on for about 30 seconds
unless any door is opened and closed.
(For details, see “Interior light” and “Personal lights” in Section 1−5.)
You have 30 seconds to open a door after
using the wireless remote unlock feature.
If a door is not opened by then, all the
doors will be automatically locked again.
If the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” switch is kept
pressed in, the locking or unlocking operation is not repeated. Release the switch
and then push again.

Pushing the “PANIC” switch blows the
horn intermittently, flashes the tail
lights, and turns on the interior light.
The “PANIC” switch is used to deter vehicle theft when you witness anyone attempting to break into or damage your
vehicle.
The alarm will last for one minute. To stop
alarm midway, push the “PANIC” switch
once again, lock or unlock any door with
the key or transmitter, or turn the ignition
key from the “LOCK” to “ON” position.
The “PANIC” mode does not work when
the ignition key is in the ignition switch.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Replacing battery
For replacement, use a CR2025 lithium
battery or equivalent.

CAUTION
Special care should be taken to prevent small children from swallowing
the removed transmitter battery or
components.

NOTICE
z When replacing the battery, be careful not to lose the components.
z Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by a
Toyota dealer.

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open the
transmitter case.

2. Remove the rubber gasket and set it
aside.

z Dispose of used batteries according
to the local laws.
Replace the transmitter battery by following these procedures:

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

z Do not touch or move any components inside the transmitter, or it
may interfere with proper operation.
z Be careful not to bend the electrode
when inserting the transmitter battery and that dust or oils do not
adhere to the transmitter case.
z Close the transmitter case securely.

3. Remove the discharged transmitter battery.

NOTICE
Do not bend the terminals.

4. Put in a new transmitter battery with
positive (+) side up.

After replacing the battery, check that the
transmitter operates properly. If the transmitter still does not operate properly, contact your Toyota dealer.

Place the rubber gasket back on the
transmitter. Then close the transmitter
case securely.

NOTICE
z Make sure the positive side and
negative side of the transmitter battery are faced correctly.
z Do not replace the battery with wet
hands. Water may cause unexpected
rust.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Wireless remote control
(double cab models)—
The wireless remote control system is
designed to lock or unlock all the
doors or activate the “PANIC” mode
from a distance within approximately 1
m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.
When you operate any switch, push it
slowly and securely.

1. “LOCK” switch
2. “UNLOCK” switch
3. “PANIC” switch

If the wireless remote control transmitter
does not actuate the doors or alarm, or
operate from a normal distance:

D Check for closeness to a radio trans-

mitter such as a radio station or an
airport which can interfere with normal
operation of the transmitter.

The wireless remote control transmitter is
an electronic component. Observe the following instructions in order not to cause
damage to the transmitter.

D The battery may have been consumed.

D Do not leave the transmitter in places

where the temperature becomes high
such as on the dashboard.

D Do not disassemble it.
D Avoid knocking it hard against other
objects or dropping it.

D Avoid putting it in water.
You can use up to 4 wireless remote control transmitters for the same vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for detailed
information.

Check the battery in the transmitter. To
replace the battery, see “—Replacing
battery”.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Locking and unlocking
doors
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:

D Reorient or relocate the receiving an-

D Connect the equipment into an outlet

on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.

D Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio / TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada

Locking operation

Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.

tenna.

D Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.

Unlocking operation

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

To lock and unlock all the doors, push
the switches slowly and securely.
To lock: Push the “LOCK” switch. All the
doors are locked simultaneously. At this
time one beep will be heard, and the
parking lights, tail lights and license plate
lights flash once.
Check to see that all the doors are securely locked.
If any of the doors is not securely closed,
locking cannot be performed by the
“LOCK” switch and a beep will sound continuously for 10 seconds. However, if the
key is in the ignition, a beep will not
sound.
To stop the beep, close all the doors securely or push the “UNLOCK” switch.
The beep can be disabled. For details,
contact your Toyota dealer.
To unlock: Push the “UNLOCK” switch
once to unlock the driver’s door alone.
Pushing the switch twice within 3 seconds
unlocks all the doors simultaneously. Each
time the “UNLOCK” switch is pushed, two
beeps will be heard, and the parking
lights, tail lights and license plate lights
flash twice.

This double switch operation to unlock all
the doors can be changed to a single
switch operation. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.

SWITCHING BEEP SOUND ON AND OFF

When all the doors are unlocked simultaneously with a wireless remote control
transmitter, the interior light, ignition
switch light, step light come on for about
15 seconds and cargo lamp for about 20
seconds before fading out, even if the
door is not opened. (For details, see
“Center interior and personal lights”, “Ignition switch and step lights” and “Cargo
lamp” in Section 1−5.)

To switch the beep on and off:

You have 30 seconds to open a door after
using the wireless remote unlock feature.
If a door is not opened by then, all the
doors will be automatically locked again.
The timing for the automatic door lock
function can be changed. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.
If the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” switch is kept
pressed in, the locking or unlocking operation is not repeated. Release the switch
and then push again.
The wireless door locking or unlocking
function can be erased. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

You can switch the beep on and off. (The
beep is on initially and after battery replacement.)
With the driver’s door opened—
1. Insert the ignition key and remove it.
2. Within 5 seconds, insert the ignition
key again and turn it to the “ON” position.
3. After 10 seconds, push the same
“LOCK”, “UNLOCK” or “PANIC” switch
twice within 10 seconds.
Two beep sounds inform you that the
program has been switched on or off.
If this procedure is not followed exactly,
the beep will not operate as expected.
Check the beep ON/OFF operation by
pushing the transmitter switch after you
finish this procedure. If the beep does not
operate as expected, repeat this procedure from step 1.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Activating panic mode

—Replacing battery
This alarm function can be disabled. For
details, contact your Toyota dealer.

For replacement, use a CR2016 lithium
battery or equivalent.

CAUTION
Special care should be taken to prevent small children from swallowing
the removed battery or components.

NOTICE

Pushing the “PANIC” switch blows the
horn intermittently and flashes the
headlights and tail lights.
The “PANIC” switch is used to deter vehicle theft when you witness anyone attempting to break into or damage your
vehicle.
The alarm will last for one minute. To stop
alarm midway, do the following:

z When replacing the transmitter battery, be careful not to lose the components.
z Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by a
Toyota dealer.
z Dispose of used batteries according
to the local laws.
Replace the battery by following these
procedures:

D Push any of the switches on the wireless remote control transmitter.

D Unlock any of the doors with the key.
D Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK”
to the “ON” position.

The “PANIC” mode does not work when
the ignition key is in the “ON” position.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open the
transmitter case.

2. Remove the discharged transmitter battery.

NOTICE
Do not bend the terminals.

3. Put in a new transmitter battery with
positive (+) side up.
Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE
z Make sure the positive side and
negative side of the transmitter battery are faced correctly.
z Do not replace the battery with wet
hands. Water may cause unexpected
rust.
z Do not touch or move any components inside the transmitter, or it
may interfere with proper operation.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Power windows
The windows can be operated with the
switch on either front door (standard
and access cab models)/each door
(double cab models).

z Be careful not to bend the electrode
when inserting the transmitter battery and that dust or oils do not
adhere to the transmitter case.
z Close the transmitter case securely.

The power windows work when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.

After replacing the battery, check that the
transmitter operates properly. If the transmitter still does not operate properly, contact your Toyota dealer.

Key off operation: If both front doors are
closed, they work for 43 seconds even
after the ignition switch is turned off. They
stop working when either front door is
opened.
OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW
Standard and access cab models

Use the switch on the driver’s door.
Normal operation: The window moves as
long as you hold the switch.
To open: Lightly push down the switch.
To close: Pull up the switch.

Double cab models

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Automatic operation (to open only):
Push the switch completely down and then
release it. The window will fully open. To
stop the window partway, lightly pull the
switch up and then release it.

Standard and access cab models

Window lock switch

Driver’s door switch (standard and access
cab models)

Window
lock
switch

Double cab models

Driver’s door switches (double cab models)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

OPERATING
WINDOWS

THE

PASSENGERS’

Use the switches on the passenger’s
door (standard and access cab models)/passengers’ doors (double cab
models) or the switch on the driver’s
door that controls each passenger’s
window.
The window moves as long as you hold
the switch.
To open: Push down the switch.
To close: Pull up the switch.
If you push in the window lock switch on
the driver’s door, the passenger’s (standard and access cab models)/ passengers’
(double cab models) windows and power
back window cannot be operated.

Passenger’s door switch (Standard and
access cab models)

Passenger’s
models)

door

switch

(Double

cab

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Rear side windows
(access cab models)
CAUTION

D Be sure to remove the ignition key

To avoid serious personal injury, you
must do the following.

D Never leave anyone (particularly a

D Before you close the power win-

dows, always make sure there is
nobody around the power windows.
You must also make sure the
heads, hands and other parts of the
bodies of all occupants are kept
completely inside the vehicle. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in a closing window, it
could result in a serious injury.
When anyone closes the power windows, make sure he or she operates the windows safely.

D When small children are in the ve-

hicle, never let them use the power
window switches without supervision. Use the window lock switch to
prevent them from making unexpected use of the switches.

when you leave your vehicle.

small child) alone in your vehicle,
especially with the ignition key still
inserted. Otherwise, he/she could
use the power window switches and
get trapped in a window. Unattended person (particularly a small
child) can be involved in a serious
accident.
To open the rear side window, pull the
latch handle toward you and swing it
fully out.
After closing the window, make sure it is
completely closed.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Back window

Power back window
The back window can be operated with
the switch on the instrument panel.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
Key off operation: If both front doors are
closed, they work 43 seconds even after
the ignition switch is turned off. The power back window stops working when either
front door is opened.
The back window moves as long as you
hold the switch.
Access cab models—

To open the back window, push the lever and slide the window.

Access cab models

After closing the window, make sure it is
completely closed.

To open: Push the switch on the “
side.
To close: Push the switch on the “
side.

”
”

Double cab models—
To open: Push the switch on the
side.
To close: Push the switch on the
side. At this time, the window will
partway. Push the switch again to
close the window.

”

“

“ ”
stop
fully

Double cab models

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury, you
must do the following.

D Before you close the power back

Access cab models only—If you push in
the window lock switch on the driver’s
door, the back window cannot be operated.

window, always make sure there is
nobody around the power back window. You must also make sure the
heads, hands and other parts of the
bodies of all occupants are kept
completely inside the vehicle. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in a closing window, it
could result in a serious injury.
When anyone closes the power
back window, make sure he or she
operates the window safely.

D Never leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,
especially with the ignition key still
inserted. Otherwise, he/she could
use the power back window switch
and get trapped in a window. Unattended person (particularly a small
child) can be involved in a serious
accident.

D Keep the back window closed while
driving. This not only keeps the
luggage from being thrown out but
also prevents exhaust gases from
entering the vehicle.

D When small children are in the ve-

hicle, never let them use the power
back window switch without supervision.

D Be sure to remove the ignition key
when you leave your vehicle.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Tailgate
Support cable bracket

OPENING

REMOVAL

To open the tailgate, pull the handle up.

1. Open the tailgate to the angle where
you can release the brackets on the
support cables from the lugs on
both sides.

The support cables will hold the tailgate
horizontal.
See “—Stowage precautions” in Section 2
for precautions when loading luggage.
After closing the tailgate, try pulling and
pushing it to make sure it is securely
closed.

2. Tilt the tailgate to about 30° from
vertical and pull up the right side of
the tailgate to unhook the right side.

To release the support cable bracket, lift
it up and slide it off.

NOTICE
Avoid driving with the tailgate open.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Hood

3. Slide the tailgate a little to the right
to unhook the left side.
To attach the tailgate, follow the removal
procedure in reverse order.
After closing the tailgate, try pulling it toward you to make sure it is securely
closed.
We recommend you keep
closed when not in use.

the

tailgate

NOTICE

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

To open the hood:

Insert the key into the keyhole and turn
it to lock or unlock the tailgate.

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The
hood will spring up slightly.

To lock: Turn the key clockwise.
To unlock: Turn the key counterclockwise.

CAUTION
Before driving, be sure that the hood
is closed and securely locked. Otherwise, the hood may open unexpectedly while driving and an accident may
occur.

Make sure the support brackets are
securely latched on both side panels
when installing the tailgate.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Toyota vehicle intrusion protection
system (TVIP) (standard and
access cab models for U.S.A. only)

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up the
auxiliary catch lever and lift the
hood.
Before closing the hood, check to see that
you have not forgotten any tools, rags,
etc. Then lower the hood and make sure
it locks into place. If necessary, press
down gently on the front edge to lock it.

TVIP is a theft deterrent system. If
someone attempts to damage or break
into your vehicle, the system sounds
the alarm while flashing the lights.

SETTING THE SYSTEM
You can set the system as follows.
1. Remove
switch.

the

key

from

the

ignition

2. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle.
3. Close all the doors securely.
4. Lock all the doors with the key or remote keyless entry transmitter. At this
time, the TVIP indicator light comes
on.
The system will be set in 30 seconds.
When the system is set, the indicator
light will start to flash.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

5. Make sure that the indicator light
flashes. Then you may leave the vehicle.

After one minute, the alarm automatically
stops and the indicator light starts flashing
again.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle when
you set the system because unlocking
from the inside activates the alarm.

Reactivating the alarm

Activating the alarm
If the system
vehicle, blows
for one minute
and front side
on the interior

detects a threat to the
the horn intermittently
while flashing tail lights
marker lights, and turns
light.

The system detects a threat under any of
the following conditions:

D Either of the front doors is unlocked by

Once set, until you cancel the system, the
system automatically resets the alarm after the alarm has stopped.
The alarm will activate again under the
same circumstances described in “Activating the alarm”.
Stopping the alarm
You can stop the alarm in either of the
following ways:

D Unlock any of the doors with the key

NOTE: If your vehicle’s tail lights and
front side marker lights turn on
and the buzzer sounds for 2 seconds when the system is canceled, the trigger memory was activated; an alarm was triggered
while you were away from the vehicle.
TESTING THE SYSTEM
You can check the system operation as
follows.
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the system as described
“SETTING THE SYSTEM”.

means other than the key or remote
keyless entry transmitter.

D Place the ignition switch in the “ON”

3. Unlock the driver’s door with the inside
lock knob. The system should activate
and the alarm should sound.

If the key is not in the ignition switch,
all the doors will be automatically
locked again.

CANCELLING THE SYSTEM

4. Stop the alarm as described in “Stopping the alarm”.

D Any door is forcibly opened.
D The side windows are tapped or broken.

D The battery terminal is disconnected
and then reconnected.

or remote keyless entry transmitter.
position.

You can cancel the system as described
in “Stopping the alarm”.
If you cancel the system by unlocking any
of the doors but no door is opened within
30 seconds, all the doors lock automatically and the system will be set again.

5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the passenger’s door.
If the system does not work properly,
have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

D The ignition is hotwired.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Theft deterrent system
(double cab models)
The system will automatically be set after
30 seconds. When the system is set, the
indicator light will start flashing again.
4. After making sure the indicator light
starts flashing, you may leave the vehicle.
Never leave anyone in the vehicle when
you set the system, because unlocking
from the inside will activate the system.
WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET
Activating the system
To deter vehicle theft, the system is
designed to sound an alarm if any of
the doors or hood is forcibly unlocked
or opened or the battery terminal is
disconnected and then reconnected
when the vehicle is locked.
The alarm blows the horn intermittently
and flashes the headlights and tail lights.

SETTING THE SYSTEM
1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”
position and remove it.
The indicator light will start flashing when
the key is removed from the ignition
switch.
2. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle.
3. Close and lock all the doors and hood.
The indicator light will remain on when all
the doors and hood are closed and
locked.

The system will sound the alarm under
the following conditions:

D If any of the doors is unlocked or

opened without the key or wireless remote control transmitter, or if the hood
is forcibly opened

D If the battery terminal is disconnected
and then reconnected

The indicator light will come on when the
system is activated.
If the alarm has been activated and the
key is not in the ignition switch, all the
doors will re−lock automatically.
After one minute, the alarm will automatically stop and the indicator light will starts
flashing again.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Fuel tank cap
Reactivating the alarm

TESTING THE SYSTEM

Once set, the system automatically resets
the alarm after the alarm stops.

1. Open all the windows.

The alarm will activate again under the
same
circumstances
described
in
“Activating the system”.
Stopping the alarm
The alarm will be stopped by the following
two ways:

D Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK”
to “ON” position.

D Unlock any of the doors with the key
or wireless remote control transmitter.

These ways cancel the system at the
same time.

2. Set the system as described above.
The doors should be locked with the
key or wireless remote control transmitter. Be sure to wait until the indicator
light goes off or starts flashing.
3. Unlock any door from the inside. The
system should activate the alarm.
4. Stopping the alarm as described above.
5. Repeat this operation for the other
doors and hood. When testing the
hood, also check that the system is
activated when the battery terminal is
disconnected and then reconnected.

Without tachometer

If the system does not work properly,
have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

With tachometer

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

This indicates that the fuel filler door
is on the left side of your vehicle.

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the
door toward out as shown.
When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

D Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-

low open flames when refueling.
The fumes are flammable.

D When opening the cap, do not re-

Type A

move the cap quickly. In hot weather, fuel under pressure could cause
injury by spraying out of the filler
neck if the cap is suddenly removed.

D Do not fill a fuel container on a

plastic truck bed liner, a rubber
truck bed mat, or any other insulating material. A static electricity
charge could cause a spark and fire
hazard. The proper procedure is to
place an approved fuel container on
the ground away from the truck for
filling.

Type B

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn
the cap counterclockwise by 90 degrees (to the pressure point 1), and
then turn it an additional 30 degrees
(to point 2). Pause slightly before
removing it.
It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh
when the cap is opened.
When installing the cap, turn the cap
clockwise until you hear a click. When
you hear the click, the cap is fully
closed.
Type A

If the cap is not tightened securely, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on.
Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

CAUTION

D Make sure the cap is tightened se-

curely to prevent fuel spillage in
the event of an accident.

D Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tank

cap for replacement. It is designed
to regulate fuel tank pressure.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the cap, apply
force only in the turning direction to
the cap. Do not pull or pry it.

The indicator lamp goes off after driving
several times. If the indicator lamp does
not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.

Type B

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Electric moon roof
To operate the moon roof, use the
switches between the personal lights.
The moon roof works when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The sun shade can be opened or closed
by hand.
Sliding operation—
To open: Push the “SLIDE” switch on the
“Ɯ” (rear) side.

Sliding operation

The roof will open and stop partway 135
mm (5.3 in.) from the fully opened position. When you push “Ɯ” (rear) side
again, the moon roof will open fully. To
stop the roof partway, push the same side
or “Ɲ” (front) side while the roof is moving.
As driving with the moon roof opened fully
will cause wind throbs, we recommend
you to drive with the moon roof partway
135 mm (5.3 in.) from the fully opened
position.
The sun shade will be opened together
with the roof.

The roof will fully close. To stop the roof
partway, push the same side or “Ɯ” (rear)
side briefly.
Tilting operation—
To tilt up: Push the “TILT” switch on the
“UP” side.
To lower: Push the “TILT” switch on the
opposite side of “UP”.
You may stop the moon roof at any desired position. The roof will move while
the switch is being pushed and stop when
released.
Key off operation: If all the doors are
closed, it works for 43 seconds even after
the ignition switch is turned off. It stops
working when any of the doors is opened.
Jam protection function: If something
gets caught between the moon roof and
frame during closing operation, the moon
roof stops and opens half way.
If the moon roof receives a strong impact,
this function may work even if nothing is
caught.

To close: Push the “SLIDE” switch on the
“Ɲ” (front) side.
Tilting operation

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury, you
must do the following.

D While the vehicle is moving, always

keep the heads, hands and other
parts of the bodies of all occupants
away from the roof opening. Otherwise, they could be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly
or if the vehicle is involved in an
accident.

D Before you close the moon roof,

always make sure there is nobody
around the moon roof. You must
also make sure nobody places his
or her head, hands and other parts
of the body in the roof opening. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in the closing roof, it could
result in a serious injury. When
anyone closes the moon roof, first
make sure it is safe to do so.

D Never leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,
especially with the ignition key still
inserted. Otherwise, he/she could
use the moon roof switches and get
trapped in the roof opening. Unattended person (particularly a small
child) can be involved in a serious
accident.

D Never sit on top of the vehicle
around the roof opening.

D Never try jamming any part of your

body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally.

D The jam protection function may

not work if something gets caught
just before the window is fully
closed.

D Be sure to remove the ignition key
when you leave your vehicle.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SECTION

1− 3

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Occupant restraint systems

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Swing−up rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Tumbling rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Seat heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Passenger airbag manual on−off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Front passenger occupant classification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Front seats—
—Front seat precautions

Seats
While the vehicle is being driven, all vehicle occupants should have the seatback
upright, sit well back in the seat and properly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

D Do not drive the vehicle unless the
occupants are properly seated. Do
not allow any passengers to sit on
top of a folded−down seatback, or
in the luggage compartment or cargo area. Persons not properly
seated and/or not properly restrained by seat belts can be severely injured in the event of emergency braking or a collision.

D During driving, do not allow any

passengers to stand up or move
around between seats. Otherwise,
severe injuries can occur in the
event of emergency braking or a
collision.

Driver seat

D Slightly recline the back of the
CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys with
considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if
the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for driver airbag
is the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) of
inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10
in.) from your driver airbag provides
you with a clear margin of safety.
This distance is measured from the
center of the steering wheel to your
breastbone. If you sit less than 250
mm (10 in.) away now, you can
change your driving position in several ways:

D Move your seat to the rear as far

seat. Although vehicle designs vary,
many drivers can achieve the 250
mm (10 in.) distance, even with the
driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the
seat somewhat. If reclining the back
of your seat makes it hard to see
the road, raise yourself by using a
firm, non−slippery cushion, or raise
the seat if your vehicle has that
feature.

D If your steering wheel is adjustable,
tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of
your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while
still maintaining control of the foot
pedals, steering wheel, and your view
of the instrument panel controls.

as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Seat adjustment precautions
Front passenger seats

CAUTION
The SRS front passenger airbag also
deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the
airbag as possible with the seatback
adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.

—Adjusting front seats
(manual seat)

CAUTION

D Do not adjust the seat while the

vehicle is moving as the seat may
unexpectedly move and cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.

D Be careful that the seat does not
hit a passenger or luggage.

D After adjusting the seat position, re-

lease the lever and try sliding the
seat forward and backward to make
sure it is locked in position.

D After adjusting the seatback, push

your body back against the seat to
make sure the seat is locked in
position.

D Do not put objects under the seats.

Otherwise, the objects may interfere
with the seat−lock mechanism or
unexpectedly push up the seat position adjusting lever and the seat
may suddenly move, causing the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.

D While adjusting the seat, do not put

your hands under the seat or near
the moving parts. Otherwise, your
hands or fingers may be caught and
injured.

Non−split bench seat

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER
Non−split bench seat: Pull the lever up.
Then slide the seat to the desired position with slight body pressure and release the lever.
Separate seat and split bench seat:
Hold the center of the lever and pull it
up. Then slide the seat to the desired
position with slight body pressure and
release the lever.
2. SEAT CUSHION HEIGHT ADJUSTING
LEVER
Pull up or push down the lever.
3. SEATBACK
LEVER

ANGLE

ADJUSTING

CAUTION
Avoid reclining the seatback any
more than needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal
or rear collision when the driver and
the front passenger are sitting up
straight and well back in the seats. If
you are reclined, the lap belt may
slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen
or your neck may contact the shoulder belt. In the event of a frontal
collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of death
or personal injury.

Lean forward and pull the lever up.
Then lean back to the desired angle
and release the lever.

Separate seat and split bench seat

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Adjusting front seats (power
seats)
1. SEAT POSITION AND SEAT CUSHION
ANGLE ADJUSTING SWITCH
Move the control switch in the desired
direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat at
that position.
Do not place anything under the front
seats, as this might interfere with the seat
movement.
2. SEATBACK
SWITCH

ANGLE

ADJUSTING

Move the control switch in the desired
direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seatback at that position.

SUPPORT

Push the control switch on either way.
The amount of lumbar support will change
while the switch is pushed.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Tilting passenger’s seatback
for rear seat entry
(access cab models)

—Folding seatback
(non−split bench seat)
CAUTION

D After putting back the seatback, try

pushing the seatback forward and
rearward to make sure it is secured
in place.

D Never allow anyone to rest their

foot on the press pedal while the
vehicle is moving.

For easy access to the rear seat, do
this.

Pull the seatback lock release lever and
fold down the seatback.

Lift the seatback angle adjusting lever or
press the pedal behind the seatback.

Hold the lever until you have swung the
seatback forward slightly.

The seatback will tilt forward.
After passengers are in, lift up the seatback until it locks.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Swing−up rear seats
(access cab models)
CAUTION
When returning the seatback to the
upright position, observe the following precautions in order to prevent
personal injury in a collision or sudden stop:

D Make sure the seatback is securely

locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback.
Failure to do so will prevent the
seat belt from operating properly.

Make sure the shoulder belt pass
through the guide when returning the
seatback.

D Make sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught in the seatback
and are arranged in their proper
position and are ready to use.

1. Stow the rear seat belt buckles as
shown in the illustration.
This prevents the belt buckles from falling
out when you swing up the rear seat.

NOTICE
The seat belt buckles must be stowed
before you swing up the rear seat.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Tumbling rear seats
(double cab models)
CAUTION
When returning the bottom cushion to
its original position, observe the following precautions in order to prevent personal injury in a collision or
sudden stop:

D Make sure the bottom cushion is

securely locked by trying to pull up
the edge of the bottom cushion.
Failure to do so will prevent the
seat belt from operating properly.

2. Raise the bottom cushion while
pushing the lock release lever.

D Make sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught under the bottom
cushion and are arranged in their
proper position and are ready to
use.

BEFORE TUMBLING REAR SEATS
Stow the rear seat belt
shown in the illustration.

buckles as

This prevents the buckles from falling out
when you tumble the seatback.

NOTICE
The seat belt buckles must be stowed
before you tumble the rear seat.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION

D Make sure people or luggage are

clear of the seat. Then, hold the
seat and slowly move it. Otherwise,
people may be injured or luggage
may be damaged, if the seat hits
them.

D To avoid serious injury, do not sit
on the folded seatback.

D Use the seat lock release lever on
TUMBLING REAR SEATS
1. Lower the head restraints to the lowest position. Fold down the seatback
while pulling the seatback angle adjusting lever and swing the whole
seat up and forward while pulling
the seat lock release lever on the
side.
To return the tumbled seat to the original
position, reverse the above operation.

the side only when tumbling the
seat.

2. Take the holding strap out of its
hole, and hook the strap onto the
assist grip. Then, pull the strap on
the free end to secure the seat.
When returning the rear seat to its original
position, put the holding strap into the
hole.

CAUTION
When tumbling the rear seats, fix the
seats securely by adjusting the length
of the holding strap. Failure to do so
may cause an unexpected accident or
severe injury in the event of emergency braking or a collision.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Head restraints
CAUTION
When returning seats to their original
position, observe the following precautions in order to prevent personal
injury in a collision or sudden stop:

D Be careful not to get your hands or
feet pinched in the seat.

D Make sure the seat is securely

WHEN RETURNING THE REAR SEATS
If you cannot raise the seatback because of the locked seat belt, do not
try it forcibly. Release the lock of the
seat belt in the following way. Push in
the lower front edge of the seatback
cushion to slacken the seat belt (1) and
let the seat belt retract a little (2).

locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback or
by trying to pull up the edge of the
bottom cushion. Failure to do so
will prevent the seat belt from operating properly.

Front (separate seat and non−split bench
seat)

D Make sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught in the seatback
and are arranged in their proper
position and are ready to use.

Front (split bench seat)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Armrest
CAUTION

D Adjust the center of the head re-

straint so that it is closest to the
top of your ears.

D After adjusting the head restraint,
make sure it is locked in position.

D Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

Rear

Non−split bench seat

For your safety and comfort, adjust the
head restraint before driving.
To raise: Pull it up.
To lower: Push it down while pressing the
lock release button.
Center head restraint—When an occupant
sits on the center position of the seats,
always pull up the center head restraint to
the lock position.
The head restraint is most effective when
it is close to your head. Therefore, using
a cushion on the seatback is not recommended.

Split bench seat

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Seat heaters
CAUTION
Occupants must use caution when operating the seat heater because it
may make them feel too hot or cause
burns at low temperatures (erythema,
varicella). Use extra caution for;

D Babies, small children, elderly per-

sons, sick persons or persons with
physical disabilities

Separate seat

To use the armrest, do this.
Non−split and split bench seat—Pull the
armrest out as shown in the illustration.
Separate seat—Pull the armrest down as
shown in the illustration.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the armrest,
avoid putting heavy loads on it.

To turn on the seat heater, push the
switch (“L” switch for the left front
seat and “R” switch for the right seat).
At this time, the indicator light will illuminate to indicate the seat heater is
operating.
The seat heater switches have the following positions.

D Persons who have delicate skin
D Persons who are exhausted
D Person who have taken alcohol or

drugs which induce sleep (sleeping
drug, cold remedy, etc.)

To prevent the seat overheating, do
not use the seat heater with a blanket, cushion, or other insulating objects which cover the seat.

“HI”—High heating temperature
“LO”—Low heating temperature
The key must be in the “ON” position to
operate seat heaters.
Pushing lightly on the opposite side will
turn it off.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Seat belts—
—Seat belt precautions
Toyota strongly urges that the driver and
passengers in the vehicle be properly restrained at all times with the seat belts
provided. Failure to do so could increase
the chance of injury and/or the severity of
injury in accidents.

If a child must sit in the front seat, the
seat belts should be worn properly. If an
accident occurs and the seat belts are not
worn properly, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag may cause death or
serious injury to the child.

The seat belts provided for your vehicle
are designed for people of adult size,
large enough to properly wear them.

Do not allow any children to stand up or
kneel on either rear or front seats. An
unrestrained child could suffer serious injury or death during emergency braking or
a collision. Also, do not let the child sit
on your lap. Holding a child in your arms
does not provide sufficient restraint.

Child. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”
in this Section for details.
STANDARD CAB MODELS—
If a child is too large for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the seat
and must be restrained using the vehicle’s
seat belt.
ACCESS CAB AND
DOUBLE CAB
MODELS—
If a child is too large for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear
seat and must be restrained using the
vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident
statistics, the child is safer when properly
restrained in the rear seat than in the
front seat.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends the
use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for
specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as
possible over the hips and not on the
waist.
Injured person. Toyota recommends the
use of a seat belt. Depending on the injury, first check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.

CAUTION
Persons should ride in their seats
properly wearing their seat belts
whenever the vehicle is moving.
Otherwise, they are much more likely
to suffer serious bodily injury or
death in the event of sudden braking
or a collision.
When using the seat belts, observe
the following:

D Use the belt for only one person at

a time. Do not use a single belt for
two or more people—even children.

D Avoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts
provide maximum protection in a
frontal or rear collision when the
driver and the front passenger are
sitting up straight and well back in
the seats. If you are reclined, the
lap belt may slide past your hips
and apply restraint forces directly
to the abdomen or your neck may
contact the shoulder belt. In the
event of a frontal collision, the
more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of death or personal injury.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Fastening front and rear
seat belts
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and is then retracted
even slightly, the belt is locked in that
position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint
system securely. (For details, see “Child
restraint” in this Section.) To free the belt
again, fully retract the belt and then pull
the belt out once more.

D Be careful not to damage the belt

webbing or hardware. Take care that
they do not get caught or pinched
in the seat or side doors.

D Inspect the belt system periodically.

Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Damaged parts should be replaced. Do not disassemble or
modify the system.

D Keep the belts clean and dry. If

they need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Never
use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners, or allow them to come into
contact with the belt—they may severely weaken the belts. (See
“Cleaning the interior” in Section
5.)

D Replace the belt assembly (includ-

ing bolts) if it has been used in a
severe impact. The entire assembly
should be replaced even if damage
is not obvious.

Tab

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the
retractor, firmly pull the belt and release
it. You will then be able to smoothly pull
the belt out of the retractor.

Buckle

Adjust the seat as needed and sit
straight and well back in the seat.
fasten your belt, pull it out of the
tractor and insert the tab into
buckle.

up
To
rethe

You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.
The seat belt length automatically adjusts
to your size and the seat position.
The retractor will lock the belt during a
sudden stop or on impact. It also may
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A
slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend, and you can move around freely.

CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the belt is not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.

D If the seat belt does not function

normally, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
until the seat belt is fixed, because
it cannot protect an adult occupant
or your child from injury.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION

D Both high−positioned lap belts and
Take up slack
Too high

D Do not place the shoulder belt un-

Keep as low on
hips as possible

Adjust the position
shoulder belts.

loose−fitting belts could cause serious injuries due to sliding under
the lap belt during a collision or
other unintended event. Keep the
lap belt positioned as low on hips
as possible.
der your arm.

the

Position the lap belt as low as
on your hips—not on your waist,
just it to a snug fit by pulling the
portion upward through the latch

lap and

Standard and double cab models

possible
then adshoulder
plate.

Access cab models

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulder
anchor—
Adjust the shoulder anchor position to
your size.
Standard and double cab models—
To raise: Slide the anchor up.
To lower: Push in the lock release button
and slide the anchor down.
Access cab models—
To raise: Slide the anchor up.
To lower: Pull the lock release knob and
slide the anchor down.
After adjustment, make sure the anchor is
locked in position.

CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt
is positioned across the center of
your shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from your neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Failure to
do so could reduce the amount of
protection in an accident and cause
severe injuries in a collision.

To release the belt, press the buckle
release button and allow the belt to
retract.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull
it out and check for kinks or twists. Then
make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.

FRONT CENTER SEAT BELT (standard
cab models with non−split bench seat)
AND REAR CENTER SEAT BELT (access
cab models)
The center seat belt is a 3−point type
restraint with 2 buckles. Both seat belt
buckles must be correctly located and securely latched for proper operation.
Make sure buckle 1 (with light gray
buckle−release button) is securely latched
for ready use of the center seat belt.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION
Make sure the both buckles are correctly located and securely latched.
Failure to properly match the buckle
and tab may cause severe injury in
case of an accident or a collision.

Front center seat belt only—
Make sure the shoulder belt pass
through the guide when using the seat
belt for front center seat.

Two buckles and tabs for center seat
belt
The 2 buckles for the center seat belt are
distinguished with colors of the buckle release button. Also the 2 tabs have different shape for its end so that the belt is
not buckled in the wrong place.
Buckle 1 (with light gray buckle−release button)—Properly matches with
concave end tab
Buckle 2 (with red buckle−release button)—Properly matches with round end
tab

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Stowing the rear seat belt
buckles (access cab models)

To release the concave end tab, insert the
key into the hole on buckle 1 (with light
gray buckle−release button) and allow the
belt to retract.

CAUTION
Do not use the center seat belt with
either buckle released. Fastening only
the shoulder belt or lap belt may
cause severe personal injury in case
of sudden braking or a collision.

The rear seat belt buckles
stowed when not in use.

can

Seat belt buckles must be stowed before
you swing up the bottom cushion. (See
“Swing−up rear seats” in this Section.)

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Stowing the rear seat belt
buckles (double cab models)

—Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough,
a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of
charge.
Please contact your local Toyota dealer to
order the proper required length for the
extender. Bring the heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper measurement and
selection of length. Additional ordering information is available at your Toyota dealer.

The rear seat belt buckles
stowed when not in use.

can

Seat belt buckles must be stowed before
you fold the seatback. (See “Tumbling rear
seats” in this Section.)

CAUTION
When using the seat belt extender,
observe the following precautions.
Failure to follow these instructions
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seat belt restraint system in case of
an accident, increasing the chance of
personal injury.

D Remember that the extender pro-

vided for you may not be safe when
used on a different vehicle, for
another person, or at a different
seating position than the one originally intended.

D If the seat belt extender has been

connected to the driver’s seat belt
buckle without wearing the seat belt
when using the extender in the
driver’s seat, the SRS driver’s airbag system will judge that the driver wears the seat belt even if not
wearing it. In this case, the driver’s
airbag may not activate correctly,
causing death or serious injury in
the event of collision. Be sure to
wear the seat belt with the seat belt
extender.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D Vehicles with separate seat—Make

sure the front passenger occupant
classification indicator light indicates “ON” when using the seat
belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the indicator light indicates “OFF”, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle,
then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after
making sure the indicator light indicates “ON”. If you use the seat belt
extender while the indicator light
indicates “OFF”, the front passenger airbag and side airbag on the
front passenger side may not activate correctly, which could cause
death or serious injury in the event
of collision.

D Be sure to wear the seat belt with-

out the seat belt extender if you
can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.

D Do not use the seat belt extender

when installing a child restraint
system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt,
the seat belt will not securely hold
the child restraint system, which
could cause death or serious injury
to the child or other passengers in
the event of collision.

To connect the extender to the seat
belt, insert the tab into the seat belt
buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on
the buckle release buttons of the extender and the seat belt are both facing
outward as shown.
You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.
When releasing the seat belt, press on
the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt. This helps prevent
damage to the vehicle interior and extender itself.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Seat belt pretensioners
Vehicles with separate seat—The front
passenger’s seat belt pretensioner will not
activate if no passenger is detected in the
front passenger seat by the front passenger occupant classification system. However, the front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner may activate if luggage is put
on the seat, or the seat belt is buckled
up regardless of the presence of an occupant in the seat. (As for the front passenger occupant classification system, see
“Front passenger occupant classification
system” in this Section.)

Vehicles with separate seat—As far as the
seat belt extender on the front passenger
side is concerned, do not fail to disconnect the extender from the seat belt after
the above operation in order to activate
the front passenger airbag correctly when
getting into the vehicle next time.
When not in use, remove the extender
and store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt and the seat belt extender are not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.

D If the seat belt does not function

normally, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
until the seat belt is fixed, because
it cannot protect an adult occupant
or your child from injury.

The driver and front passenger seat
belt pretensioners are designed to be
activated in response to a severe frontal impact.

The seat belt pretensioners and SRS airbags may not operate together in all collisions.

When the sensor detects a severe frontal
impact, the front seat belts are quickly
drawn back by the retractors so that the
belts snugly restrain the occupants.
Vehicles with bench seat—The seat belt
pretensioners are activated even with no
passenger in the front seat.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

The seat belt pretensioners are controlled
by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag
sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor.
When the seat belt pretensioners are activated, an operating noise may be heard
and a small amount of non−toxic gas may
be released. This does not indicate that
a fire is occurring. This gas is normally
harmless.
Once the seat belt pretensioners have
been activated, the seat belt retractors
remain locked.
Double cab models only—The seat belt
pretensioners will not operate in a vehicle
rollover if the “RSCA OFF” indicator light
is on. For details, see “Roll sensing of
curtain shield airbags off switch” in this
Section.

The seat belt pretensioner system consists mainly of the following components
and their locations are shown in the illustration.
1. Front airbag sensors
2. Separate seat only—Front passenger
occupant classification indicator light
3. Separate seat only—Front passenger
occupant classification system (ECU
and sensors)
4. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies
5. Front passenger’s
switch

seat

belt

buckle

CAUTION
Do not modify, remove, strike or open
the seat belt pretensioner assemblies,
airbag sensor or surrounding area or
wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent the seat belt pretensioners from activating correctly,
cause sudden operation of the system
or disable the system, which could
result in death or serious injury. Consult your Toyota dealer about any repair and modification.

6. Airbag sensor assembly
7. SRS warning light

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

This indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.
It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the seat belt pretensioners are
operating properly.

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
seat belt pretensioners in some
cases.

z Modification of the front end structure

This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system and indicator light,
passenger airbag manual on−off switch,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring
and power sources. (For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” in Section 1−6.)

z Attachment of a grille guard (bull
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
winches or any other equipment to
the front end

If any of the
this indicates
or seat belt
Toyota dealer

z Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure or console

D The light does not come on when the

z Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
z Repairs on or near the front seat
belt pretensioner assemblies

Without tachometer

z Modification of the suspension system

following conditions occurs,
a malfunction of the airbags
pretensioners. Contact your
as soon as possible.

ignition key is turned to the “ON” position or remains on for more than 6
seconds.

With tachometer

D The light comes on while driving.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SRS driver airbag and front
passenger airbag (standard
and access cab models)
D If any seat belt does not retract or can
not be pulled out due to a malfunction
or activation of the relevant seat belt
pretensioner.

D The seat belt pretensioner assembly or
surrounding area has been damaged.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:

D The front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the seat belt pretensioners to operate.

D Either seat belt pretensioner assembly

or surrounding area is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbags are designed to provide
further protection for the driver and
right front passenger in addition to the
primary safety protection provided by
the seat belts.
Vehicles with bench seat—The SRS airbags are designed to protect the driver
and right front passenger and they are not
designed to protect an occupant in the
front center seating position.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

In response to a severe frontal impact,
the SRS airbags work together with the
seat belts to help reduce injury by inflating. The SRS airbags help reduce injuries
mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s
head or chest caused by hitting the vehicle interior.
Vehicles with bench seat—The SRS front
passenger airbag is activated even with
no passenger in the front seat.
Vehicles with separate seat—The SRS
front passenger airbag will not activate if
there is no passenger sitting in the front
passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is
put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled
up, regardless of the presence of an occupant in the seat. (As for the front passenger occupant classification system, see
“Front passenger occupant classification
system” in this Section.)
Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

D The SRS airbag system is designed

only as a supplement to the primary protection of the driver and front
passenger seat belt systems. The
driver and front passenger can be
killed or seriously injured by the
inflating airbags if they do not wear
the available seat belts properly.
During sudden braking just before
a collision, an unrestrained driver
or front passenger can move forward into direct contact with or
close proximity to the airbag which
may then deploy during the collision. To ensure maximum protection
in an accident, the driver and all
passengers in the vehicle must
wear their seat belts properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an
accident reduces the chances of
death or serious injury or being
thrown out of the vehicle. For instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, see “Seat
belts” in this Section.

D Improperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed
or seriously injured by the deploying airbags. An infant or child who
is too small to use a seat belt
should be properly secured using a
child
restraint
system.
Toyota
strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the
rear seat of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seat is the
safest for infants and children. For
instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see
“Child restraint” in this Section.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Indicator
light

Except for separate seat with automatic
transmission
Indicator
light

The
passenger
airbag
system
is
equipped with a manual on−off switch
and indicator light. Turning the passenger airbag manual on−off switch clockwise to the “ON” or “AUTO” position
makes the passenger airbag system operational. To disable the passenger airbag system, turn the manual on−off
switch counterclockwise to the “OFF”
position and remove the key. The indicator light on the passenger airbag
manual on−off switch will come on
when the passenger airbag system has
been disabled.
See “Passenger airbag manual
switch” in this Section for detail.

D When the passenger airbag manual

on−off switch is turned off, the passenger airbag will not inflate in a
collision and turning off the passenger airbag can reduce the occupant protection which your vehicle
safety systems can provide to you
in certain accidents and increase
the likelihood of death or serious
personal injuries.

on−off

CAUTION

D Do not turn off the passenger air-

bag manual on−off switch except
when a member of a passenger risk
group identified in TABLE 1 is occupying the right front passenger
seating position.

For separate seat with automatic transmission

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

TABLE 1: A PASSENGER RISK GROUP
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) who must ride in the front seat because:

D Vehicle has no rear seat;
D Vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear−facing infant seat;
or

D The infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s physician,

makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.

Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because:

D Vehicle has no rear seat:
D Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever possible,
children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is
available in the rear seat(s) of vehicle; or

D The child has a medical condition which, according to the child’s physician,

makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can
constantly monitor the child’s condition.

Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which according to his
or her physician:

D Causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger: and
D Makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater than the
potential harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the passenger, even if
belted, to hit the dashboard, or windshield in a crash.

The SRS airbags are designed to deploy
in severe (usually frontal) collisions
where the magnitude and duration of
the forward deceleration of the vehicle
exceeds the designed threshold level.
The SRS airbags will deploy if the severity of the impact is above the designed
threshold level, comparable to an approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision when the
vehicle has the impact straight into a fixed
barrier that does not move or deform.
However, this threshold velocity will be
considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
an object, such as a parked vehicle or
sign pole, which can move or deform on
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an
underride collision (e.g. a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”,
or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
It is possible that in some collisions
where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS airbags and front seat
belt pretensioners may not activate together.
Always wear your seat belts properly.

For more detailed information concerning about the passenger risk group, please
contact NHTSA at 1−800−424−9393 or Transport Canada at 1−800−333−0371.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Collision from the rear

Hitting a curb,
edge of pavement
or hard surface

Falling into or
jumping over a
deep hole

Collision from the side
Vehicle rollover

The SRS airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it
rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−
speed frontal collision. But, whenever a
collision of any type causes sufficient
forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS airbags may occur.

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS airbags may also deploy if a
serious impact occurs to the underside
of your vehicle. Some examples are
shown in the illustration.

The SRS airbag system consists mainly of
the following components, and their locations are shown in the illustration.
1. Front airbag sensors
2. Front passenger occupant classification
indicator light or passenger airbag on−
off indicator light
3. Airbag module for right front passenger
(airbag and inflator)
4. Separate seat only—Front passenger
occupant classification system (ECU
and sensors)
5. Front passenger’s
switch

seat

belt

buckle

6. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

7. Driver’s seat position sensor
8. For separate seat with automatic transmission—Passenger airbag manual on−
off switch
9. Except for separate seat with automatic
transmission—Passenger airbag manual
on−off switch
10. Airbag sensor assembly
11. Airbag module for driver
(airbag and inflator)
12. SRS warning light
The airbag sensor assembly consists of a
safing sensor and airbag sensor.
The front airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of the vehicle.
If an impact results in a forward deceleration beyond the designed threshold level,
the system triggers the airbag inflators. At
this time a chemical reaction in the inflators very quickly fills the airbags with
non−toxic gas to help restrain the forward
motion of the occupants. The airbags then
quickly deflate, so that there is no obstruction of the driver’s vision should it be
necessary to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce a
loud noise and release some smoke and
residue along with non−toxic gas. This
does not indicate a fire. This smoke may
remain inside the vehicle for some time,
and may cause some minor irritation to
the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to
wash off any residue as soon as possible
to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit
from the vehicle, you should do so immediately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in a
fraction of a second, so the airbags must
inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the head and chest, it
may also cause other, less severe injuries
to the face, chest, arms and hands. These
are usually in the nature of minor burns
or abrasions and swelling, but the force of
a deploying airbag can cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant’s
hands, arms, chest or head is in close
proximity to the airbag module at the time
of deployment. This is why it is important
for the occupant to: avoid placing any
object or part of the body between the
occupant and the airbag module; sit
straight and well back into the seat; wear
the available seat belt properly; and sit as
far as possible from the airbag module,
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel
hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot
for several minutes after deployment, so
do not touch! The airbags inflate only
once. The windshield may be damaged by
absorbing some of the force of the inflating airbag.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who is
too close to the steering wheel or
dashboard during airbag deployment
can be killed or seriously injured.
Toyota strongly recommends that:

A member of a passenger risk group
should never sit or be occupied in
the front outside passenger seat with
airbag manual on−off switch in the
“ON” or “AUTO” position. (For details, see “SRS driver airbag and
front passenger airbag” in this Section.)

D The driver sit as far back as pos-

sible from the steering wheel while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.

D The front passenger sit as far back
as possible from the dashboard.

D All vehicle occupants be properly
restrained using the available seat
belts.

For instructions and precautions concerning the seating position, see
“—Front seat precautions” in this
Section.

D Do not sit on the edge of the seat

or lean against the dashboard when
the vehicle is in use, since the
front passenger airbag could inflate
with considerable speed and force.
Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, an airbag when it inflates,
can be killed or seriously injured.
Sit up straight and well back in the
seat, and always use your seat belt
properly.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D Do not hold a child on your lap or

in your arms. Use a child restraint
system in the rear seat. For instructions concerning the installation of
a child restraint system, see “Child
restraint” in this Section.

D Toyota strongly recommends that all

infants and children be placed in
the rear seat of the vehicle and be
properly restrained.

D Vehicles with bench seat—Do not

allow a child to stand up or kneel
on the front passenger seat, since
the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and
force. Otherwise, the child may be
killed or seriously injured.

D Do not put anything or any part of

your body on or in front of the
dashboard or steering wheel pad
that houses the airbag system. They
might restrict inflation or cause
death or serious injury as they are
projected rearward by the force of
the deploying airbags. Likewise, the
driver and front passenger should
not hold objects in their arms or on
their knees.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D Do not modify or remove any wir-

ing. Do not modify, remove, strike
or open any components such as
the steering wheel pad, steering
wheel, column cover, dashboard
near the front passenger airbag,
front passenger airbag cover, front
passenger airbag or airbag sensor
assembly. Doing so may prevent the
front airbag system from activating
correctly, cause sudden activation
of the system or disable the system, which could result in death or
serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructions
can result in death or serious injury.
Consult your Toyota dealer about any
repair and modification.
If you wish to modify your vehicle for
a person with physical disability, consult your Toyota dealer. It may dangerously interfere with the SRS front
airbags operation.

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
SRS airbag system in some cases.
z Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
z Modification of the suspension system
z Modification of the front end structure

Without tachometer

z Attachment of a grille guard (bull
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
winches or any other equipment to
the front end
z Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure, console, steering column, steering
wheel or dashboard near the front
passenger airbag

With tachometer

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

This indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.
It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the SRS airbags are operating
properly.
This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system and indicator light,
passenger airbag manual on−off switch,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring
and power sources. (For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” in Section 1−6.)
If either of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction of the airbags
or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

D The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” position or remains on for more than 6
seconds.

D The light comes on while driving.

Vehicles with separate seat—The SRS
warning light will come on and front passenger occupant classification indicator
light will indicate “OFF” if there is a malfunction in the front passenger occupant
classification system.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:

D The SRS airbags have been inflated.
D The front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS airbags to inflate.

D The pad section of the steering wheel

or
front passenger
airbag cover
(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables
before contacting your Toyota dealer.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SRS driver airbag and front
passenger airbag
(double cab models)
Vehicles with separate seat—The SRS
front passenger airbag will not activate if
there is no passenger sitting in the front
passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is
put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled
up, regardless of the presence of an occupant in the seat. (As for the front passenger occupant classification system, see
“Front passenger occupant classification
system” in this Section.)
Always wear your seat belt properly.
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbags are designed to provide
further protection for the driver and
front passenger in addition to the primary safety protection provided by the
seat belts.
In response to a severe frontal impact,
the SRS front airbags work together with
the seat belts to help reduce injury by
inflating. The SRS front airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s or front
passenger’s head or chest caused by hitting the vehicle interior.

CAUTION

D The SRS front airbag system is de-

signed only as a supplement to the
primary protection of the driver and
front passenger seat belt systems.
The driver and front passenger can
be killed or seriously injured by the
inflating airbags if they do not wear
the available seat belts properly.
During sudden braking just before
a collision, an unrestrained driver
or front passenger can move forward into direct contact with or
close proximity to the airbag which
may then deploy during the collision. To ensure maximum protection
in an accident, the driver and all
passengers in the vehicle must
wear their seat belts properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an
accident reduces the chances of
death or serious injury or being
thrown out of the vehicle. For instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, see “Seat
belts” in this Section.

Vehicles with split bench seat—The SRS
front passenger airbag is activated even
with no passenger in the front seat.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D Improperly seated and/or restrained

The SRS front airbags are designed to
deploy in severe (usually frontal) collisions where the magnitude and duration
of the forward deceleration of the vehicle exceeds the designed threshold
level.
The SRS front airbags will deploy if the
severity of the impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an
approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision
when the vehicle has the impact straight
into a fixed barrier that does not move or
deform.
However, this threshold velocity will be
considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
an object, such as a parked vehicle or
sign pole, which can move or deform on
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an
underride collision (e.g. a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”,
or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
It is possible that in some collisions
where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the
seat belt pretensioners may not activate
together.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the side
Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are generally not
designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it
rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−
speed frontal collision. But, whenever a
collision of any type causes sufficient
forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may
occur.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

7. Driver’s seat position sensor
8. Airbag sensor assembly
Hitting a curb, edge
of pavement or
hard surface

9. Airbag module for driver
(airbag and inflator)

Falling into or
jumping over
a deep hole

10. SRS warning light
The airbag sensor assembly consists of a
safing sensor and airbag sensor.

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deploy
if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples
are shown in the illustration.

The SRS front airbag system consists
mainly of the following components, and
their locations are shown in the illustration.
1. Front airbag sensors
2. Separate seat only—Front passenger
occupant classification indicator light

The front airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of the vehicle.
If an impact results in a forward deceleration beyond the designed threshold level,
the system triggers the airbag inflators. At
this time a chemical reaction in the inflators very quickly fills the airbags with
non−toxic gas to help restrain the forward
motion of the occupants. The airbags then
quickly deflate, so that there is no obstruction of the driver’s vision should it be
necessary to continue driving.

3. Airbag module for front passenger
(airbag and inflator)
4. Separate seat only—Front passenger
occupant classification system (ECU
and sensors)
5. Front passenger’s
switch

seat

belt

buckle

6. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION
The driver or front passenger who is
too close to the steering wheel or
dashboard during airbag deployment
can be killed or seriously injured.
Toyota strongly recommends that:

D The driver sit as far back as pos-

sible from the steering wheel while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.

D The front passenger sit as far back
as possible from the dashboard.

D All vehicle occupants be properly
restrained using the available seat
belts.

For instructions and precautions concerning the seating position, see
“—Front seat precautions” in this
Section.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel
hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot
for several minutes after deployment, so
do not touch! The airbags inflate only
once. The windshield may be damaged by
absorbing some of the force of the inflating airbag.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D Do not hold a child on your lap or

in your arms. Use a child restraint
system in the rear seat. For instructions concerning the installation of
a child restraint system, see “Child
restraint” in this Section.

D Do not sit on the edge of the seat

D Toyota strongly recommends that all

infants and children be placed in
the rear seat of the vehicle and be
properly restrained.

D Vehicles with split bench seat—Do

not allow a child to stand up or
kneel on the front passenger seat,
since the front passenger airbag
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the
child may be killed or seriously injured.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D Do not modify or remove any wir-

D Do not put anything or any part of

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the
SRS front airbag system in some
cases.
z Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
z Modification of the suspension system
z Modification of the front end structure
z Attachment of a grille guard (bull
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
winches or any other equipment to
the front end
z Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure, console, steering column, steering
wheel or dashboard near the front
passenger airbag

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system and indicator light,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring
and power sources. (For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” in Section 1−6.)
This indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.
It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the SRS front airbags are operating properly.

If either of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction of the airbags
or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

D The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” position or remains on for more than 6
seconds.

D The light comes on while driving.
Vehicles with separate seat—The SRS
warning light will come on and front passenger occupant classification indicator
light will indicate “OFF” if there is a malfunction in the front passenger occupant
classification system.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:

D The SRS front airbags have been inflated.

D The front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS front airbags to inflate.

D The pad section of the steering wheel

or
front passenger
airbag cover
(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Passenger airbag manual
on−off switch (standard cab
and access cab models only)
NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables
before contacting your Toyota dealer.

Indicator
light

This on−off switch is designed to disable the passenger airbag in order to
allow usage, if necessary, of a member
of a passenger risk group identified in
TABLE 1 is occupying the right front
passenger seating position. (For details,
see “SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag” in this Section.)
Operate on−off switch as follows:
Insert key into the keyhole.
To turn passenger airbag on—

Except for separate seat with automatic
transmission
Indicator
light

For separate seat with automatic transmission

Except for separate seat with automatic
transmission: Turn the key clockwise to
the “ON” position. At this time, the “ON”
indicator light comes on.
For separate seat with automatic transmission: Turn the key clockwise to the
“AUTO” position. At this time, the indicator
light condition varies depending on the occupant in the right front seat. (For details,
see “Front passenger occupant classification system” in the Section.)
To turn passenger airbag off—Turn the
key counterclockwise to the “OFF” position
and remove it. At this time, the “OFF”
indicator light comes on. If the key is
removed at any other position than “OFF”,
the switch will automatically return to the
“ON” or “AUTO” position.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags
The SRS warning light and the front
passenger occupant classification indicator light or passenger airbag manual
on−off indicator light will indicate
“OFF” if there is a malfunction in the
passenger airbag manual on−off switch.

CAUTION

D Do not turn off the passenger air-

Without tachometer

bag manual on−off switch except
when a member of a passenger risk
group identified in TABLE 1 is occupying the right front passenger
seating position.

D When the passenger airbag manual

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to provide further
protection for the driver, front passenger and rear outside passengers in
addition to the primary safety protection provided by the seat belts.

For details, see “SRS driver airbag
and front passenger airbag” in this
Section.
With tachometer

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

In response to a severe side impact, the
SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags work with the seat belts to help
reduce injury by inflating. The SRS side
airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the
driver’s or front passenger’s chest and the
SRS curtain shield airbags help reduce
injuries mainly to the driver’s, front passenger’s or rear outside passenger’s head.
Vehicles with separate seat—The SRS
side airbag on the passenger seat will not
activate if there is no passenger sitting in
the front passenger seat. However, the
side airbag on the passenger seat may
deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the
seat belt is buckled up, regardless of the
presence of an occupant in the seat. (As
for the front passenger occupant classification system, see “Front passenger occupant classification system” in this Section.)

Roll sensing function:
In response to a vehicle rollover, the curtain shield airbags on both sides work
with the seat belts to help reduce injury
by inflating. The curtain shield airbags
help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s
or front passenger’s head and help prevent them from being thrown out of the
vehicle. (This function can be turned off
if inflation is not desired. See “Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch” in
this Section.)
The SRS curtain shield airbag on the passenger side are activated even with no
passenger in the front seat or rear outside
seat.
The SRS curtain shield airbags may activate even when the side airbags are not
activated.

CAUTION

D The SRS side airbag and curtain

shield airbag system is designed
only as a supplement to the primary protection of the driver, front
passenger and rear outside passenger seat belt systems. To ensure
maximum protection in an accident,
the driver and all passengers in the
vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an accident reduces the
chances of death or serious injury
or being thrown out of the vehicle.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the seat belt system,
see “Seat belts” in this Section.

Always wear your seat belt properly.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D Do not allow anyone to lean his/her

head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the
seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof
side rail from which the SRS side
airbag and curtain shield airbag
deploy even if he/she is a child
seated in the child restraint system.
It is dangerous if the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact of the deploying airbag could cause death or serious injury to the occupant.

D Improperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed
or seriously injured by the deploying airbags. An infant or child who
is too small to use a seat belt
should be properly secured using a
child
restraint
system.
Toyota
strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the
rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
the safest for infants and children.
For instructions concerning the
installation of a child restraint system, see “Child restraint” in this
Section.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system may not activate if the
vehicle is subjected to a collision from
the side at certain angles, or a collision
to the side of the vehicle body other
than the passenger compartment as
shown in the illustration.
The SRS side airbags are designed to
inflate when the passenger compartment
area suffers a severe impact from the
side.
The curtain shield airbags are designed to
inflate when the passenger compartment
area suffers a severe impact from the
side or vehicle rollover.
Always wear your seat belts properly.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Collision from the rear

Collision from the front
Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbags are not generally
designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a front or rear collision, if it
rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−
speed side collision.

Collision from
the front

The angle of
vehicle tip−up
is manual

Skidding vehicle
hitting a curb
stone

The curtain shield airbags may inflate
if the angle of vehicle tip−up is marginal or if the skidding vehicle’s tires hit
a curb stone laterally as shown in the
illustration.

Collision from
the rear

Pitch end over end

The curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle
is involved in a front or rear collision,
if it pitches end over end, or if it is
involved in a low−speed side collision.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

7. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors
8. Front passenger’s
switch
Hitting a curb, edge
of pavement or
hard surface

belt

buckle

9. Airbag sensor assembly

Falling into or
jumping over
a deep hole

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system is controlled by the airbag
sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and
airbag sensor.

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags
may deploy if a serious impact occurs
to the underside of your vehicle. Some
examples are shown in the illustration.

seat

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system consists mainly of the following components, and their locations are
shown in the illustration.
1. SRS warning light
2. Separate seat only—Front passenger
occupant classification indicator light
3. Curtain shield airbag modules
(airbag and inflator)
4. Separate seat only—Front passenger
occupant classification system (ECU
and sensors)

In a severe side impact, the side and
curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the
curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the
side airbag inflators and/or the curtain
shield airbag inflators. At this time a
chemical reaction in the inflators quickly
fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to help
restrain the lateral motion of the occupants.
In a vehicle rollover, the airbag sensor
assembly triggers the curtain shield airbag
inflator. At this time, a chemical reaction
in the inflators quickly fills the airbags
with non−toxic gas to help restrain the
lateral motion of the occupants.

5. Side airbag modules
(airbag and inflator)
6. Curtain shield airbag sensors

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

When the airbags inflate, they produce a
fairly loud noise and release some smoke
and residue along with non−toxic gas. This
does not indicate a fire. This smoke may
remain inside the vehicle for some time,
and may cause some minor irritation to
the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to
wash off any residue as soon as possible
to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit
from the vehicle, you should do so immediately.
Deployment of the airbags happens in a
fraction of a second, so the airbags must
inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, it may also cause minor burns or
abrasions and swelling.
Front seats as well as parts of the front
and rear pillars, and roof side rail may be
hot for several minutes, but the airbags
themselves will not be hot. The airbags
are designed to inflate only once.

CAUTION
SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbags
inflate with considerable
force. To reduce the possibility of
death or serious injury when they inflate, the driver, front passenger and
rear outside passengers must:

D Wear their seat belts properly.
D Remain properly seated with their

backs upright and against the seats
at all times.

D Do not allow anyone to lean against

the door when the vehicle is in use,
since the side airbag and curtain
shield airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should
be taken especially when you have
a small child in the vehicle.

D Sit up straight and well back in the

seat, distributing your weight evenly
in the seat. Do not apply excessive
weight to the outer side of the
seats with a side airbag, and to the
front pillar, rear pillar and roof side
rail with a curtain shield airbag.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D Make sure the “RSCA OFF” indica-

tor light is off. The curtain shield
airbags will not inflate in a vehicle
rollover if this indicator light is on
and you may be killed or seriously
injured. For details, see “Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off
switch” in this Section.

D Do not allow anyone to get his/her

head closer to the area where the
side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, since these airbags
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.

D Do not allow anyone to kneel on

the passenger seat, facing the passenger’s side door, since the side
airbag and curtain shield airbag
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D Do not allow anyone to get his/her

head or hands out of windows
since the curtain shield airbags
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.

D Do not attach a cup holder or any
other device or object on or around
the door. When the side airbag inflates, the cup holder or any other
device or object will be thrown with
great force or the side airbag may
not activate correctly, resulting in
death or serious injury. Likewise,
the driver and front passenger
should not hold objects in their
arms or on their knees.

D Do not attach a microphone or any

other device or object around the
area where the curtain shield airbag
activates such as on the windshield
glass, side door glass, front and
rear pillars, roof side rail and assist
grips. When the curtain shield airbag inflates, the microphone or other device or object will be thrown
away with great force or the curtain
shield airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D Do not hook a hanger, heavy or

sharp pointed objects on the coat
hook. If the curtain shield airbag
inflates, those items will be thrown
away with great force or the curtain
shield airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury. When you hang clothes,
hang them on the coat hook directly.

D Do not use seat accessories which
cover the parts where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or
serious injury.

D Do not modify or replace the seats

or upholstery of the seats with side
airbags. Such changes may prevent
the side airbag system from activating correctly, disable the system or
cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

D Do not disassemble or repair the
front and rear pillars and roof side
rails containing the curtain shield
airbags. Such changes may disable
the system or cause the curtain
shield airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

D Do not use tires or wheels other

than the manufacturer’s recommended size. Such a use may cause
the curtain shield airbags to inflate
accidentally, which could result in
death or serious injury. For details,
see “Checking and replacing tires”
in Section 7−2.

Failure to follow these instructions
can result in death or serious injury.
Consult your Toyota dealer about any
repair and modification.

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system in some cases.
z Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
z Modification of the suspension system
z Modification of the side structure of
the passenger compartment
z Repairs made on or near the console or front seat

If you wish to modify your vehicle for
a person with physical disability, consult your Toyota dealer. It may dangerously interfere with the SRS side
airbags and curtain shield airbags operation.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system and indicator light,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, “RSCA OFF” indicator
light, interconnecting wiring and power
sources. (For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” in Section 1−6.)
This indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.
It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags are operating properly.

If either of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction of the airbags
or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

D The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” position or remains on for more than 6
seconds.

D The light comes on while driving.
Vehicles with separate seat only—The
SRS warning light will come on and front
passenger occupant classification indicator
light will indicate “OFF” if there is a malfunction in the front passenger occupant
classification system.

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Front passenger occupant
classification system (separate
seat only)
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:

D Any of the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags have been inflated.

D The portion of the doors (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.

D The surface of the seats with the side
airbag (shaded in the illustration) is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

D The portion of the front pillars, rear

pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside (shaded in the illustration)
is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.

NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables
before contacting your Toyota dealer.

Your vehicle is equipped with a front
passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions
1—4 in the table and based on these
conditions activates or deactivates front
passenger airbags. The system monitors the weight and load on the front
passenger seat, and the seat belt
buckle switch to determine conditions
1—4. In order for the system to detect
the conditions correctly, do not do any
of the following.

D Put a heavy load on the front passenger seat.

D Attach a seatback table to the front
passenger seatback.

D Put weight on the front passenger by

putting your hands or feet on the front
passenger seatback from the rear passenger seat.

The front passenger occupant classification indicator light indicates the actuation of the front passenger airbag,
side airbag on the front passenger seat
and front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner.
The indicator light will indicate “OFF”
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position with the condition 2 in the table
shown below.
If the front passenger occupant classification system determines that a person of
adult size sits in the front passenger seat
but the “OFF” indicator is illuminated, one
of the following is likely to have occurred:

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D A rear passenger lifts the front passen-

The SRS warning light will come on
and front passenger occupant classification indicator light will indicate
“OFF” if there is a malfunction in the
front passenger occupant classification
system.

ger seat cushion with their legs.

D Objects are placed under the front passenger seat.

D The front passenger seatback is in
contact with the rear seat.

To ensure the system correctly detects an
adult sitting in the front passenger seat,
make sure the above do not occur.
Make sure that the “ON” indicator is illuminated when an adult is seated in the
front passenger seat. If the “OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit
up straight, well back in the seat, and
with the seat belt worn correctly. If the
“OFF” indicator still remains illuminated,
either ask the passenger to move to the
rear seat, or if that is not possible, move
the front passenger seat fully rearward.

Without tachometer

The front passenger occupant classification indicator light will indicate “ON”
and “OFF” when the ignition key is
turned to the “ON” position. After
about four seconds, it will go off. After
that, the front passenger occupant classification system operates and judges
whether to indicate “ON” or “OFF”.
With tachometer

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
Access cab models
Condition detected by
the front passenger
occupant classification
system
1. Adult∗1
2. Child∗2 or child
restraint system∗3
3. Unoccupied
4. There is a
malfunction in the
system

Indicator/warning light
Passenger
airbag on−off
switch position

Front passenger
occupant
classification
indicator light

“AUTO”

“ON”

“OFF”

“AUTO”
“OFF”

“OFF”

“AUTO”

Not illuminated

“OFF”

“AUTO”
“OFF”

“OFF”

Devices

SRS warning
light

Front
passenger’s
seat belt
reminder light

Off

Flashing∗4

Off

Flashing∗4

Off

Front passenger
airbag
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated

Front
passenger’s
seat belt
pretensioner
Activated
Activated

Deactivated

Activated

∗1 :

The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may
recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
∗2 : When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her
as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
∗3 : Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only be
installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” in this Section as for installing the child restraint
system.)
∗4 :
In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

100

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
Double cab models
Indicator/warning light
Condition detected by
the front passenger
occupant classification
system
1. Adult∗1
2.

Child∗2

or child
restraint system∗3

3. Unoccupied
4. There is a
malfunction in the
system

Devices

Front
passenger
occupant
classification
indicator light

SRS warning
light

Front
passenger’s
seat belt
reminder light

“ON”

Off

Flashing∗4

“OFF”

Off

Flashing∗4

Deactivated

Not
illuminated

Off

Deactivated

“OFF”

Off

Deactivated

Front
passenger
airbag

Side airbag
on the front
passenger
seat

Curtain shield
airbag in the
front
passenger
side

Front
passenger’s
seat belt
pretensioner

Activated
Activated
Activated

Deactivated
Activated

∗1 :

101

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION
To avoid potential death or serious
injury when the front passenger occupant classification system does not
detect the conditions correctly, observe the following.

D Make sure the front passenger oc-

cupant classification indicator light
indicates “ON” when using the seat
belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the indicator light indicates “OFF”, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle,
then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after
making sure the indicator light indicates “ON”. If you use the seat belt
extender while the indicator light
indicates “OFF”, the front passenger airbag and side airbag on the
front passenger side may not activate correctly, which could cause
death or serious injury in the event
of collision.

D Do not recline the front passenger

seatback so far that it touches a
rear seat. This may cause the
“OFF” indicator to be illuminated,
which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the
event of a severe accident. If the
seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position
where it does not touches the rear
seat.
Keep the front passenger seatback
as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.

D If an adult sits in the front passen-

ger seat, the occupant classification
indicator light should indicate “ON”.
If the “OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up
straight, well back in the seat, feet
on the floor, and with the seat belt
worn correctly. If the “OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either
ask the passenger to move to the
rear seat, or if that is not possible,
move the front passenger seat fully
rearward.

D Wear the seat belt properly.
D Make sure the front passenger’s
seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger
seat.

D Do not put a heavy load in the
front passenger seatback pocket or
attach a seatback table to the front
passenger seat seatback.

D Do not put weight on the front pas-

senger seat by putting your hands
or feet on the front passenger seat
seatback from the rear passenger
seat.

D Do not let a rear passenger lift the
front passenger seat with their feet
or press on the seatback with their
legs.

D Do not put objects under the front
passenger seat.

D Child restraint systems installed on

the rear seat should not contact the
front seatbacks.

102

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Roll sensing of curtain shield
airbags off switch
In a severe side impact, the curtain shield
airbags on impacted side will inflate even
if the roll sensing function is turned off.
(For details about the curtain shield airbags, see “SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags” in this Section.)

D When it is unavoidable to install the
forward−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat,
install the child restraint system on
the front passenger seat in the
proper order. (As for the installation
order, see “—Installation with seat
belt” in this Section.)

In a severe frontal impact, the seat belt
pretensioners will work even if the roll
sensing function is turned off. (For details
about the seat belt pretensioners, see
“—Seat belt pretensioners” in this Section.)

D Do not remove the front seats.
D Do not kick the front passenger

seat or subject it to severe impact.
Otherwise, the SRS warning light
may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this
case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

The front passenger occupant classification indicator light may indicate “ON” (the
front passenger airbag and side airbag on
the front passenger seat may deploy)
even if observing the above cautions,
when a child sits in, or a forward−facing
child restraint system is installed on the
front passenger seat. Refer to all the cautions in “SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag”, “SRS side airbags and
curtain shield airbags” and “Child restraint”
in this Section.

The roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch (“RSCA OFF” switch)
can turn off the curtain shield airbags
and seat belt pretensioners in a vehicle
rollover. This switch should only be
used if inflation is not desired (such as
extreme off−road driving).

If the ignition switch is turned to “ACC” or
“LOCK” with the roll sensing function off
and then the ignition switch is turned back
to “ON”, the roll sensing function will turn
back on automatically.

When you push the “RSCA OFF” switch
for a few seconds with the ignition switch
on, the “RSCA OFF” indicator light comes
on and the roll sensing function is turned
off. When you push the switch again, the
indicator light goes off and the roll sensing function is turned on. (For details
about the roll sensing function, see “SRS
side airbags and curtain shield airbags” in
this Section.)

103

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Child restraint—
—Child restraint precautions
CAUTION

D Before normal driving, make sure
the “RSCA OFF” indicator light is
off.

D When the roll sensing function is
turned off (and the “RSCA OFF”
indicator light is on), the curtain
shield airbags and seat belt pretensioners will not work in a vehicle
rollover. Turning off the curtain
shield airbags and seat belt pretensioners reduces occupant protection
which your vehicle safety systems
can provide in accidents and increase the likelihood of death or
serious injuries.

Toyota strongly urges the use of appropriate child restraint systems for
children.

Standard and access cab models—

D STANDARD CAB MODELS—

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.
and Canada now require the use of a
child restraint system.

Toyota strongly urges use of a
proper child restraint system which
conforms to the size of the child.

Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.

ACCESS CAB MODELS—
Toyota strongly urges use of a
proper child restraint system which
conforms to the size of the child,
installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child
is safer when properly restrained in
the rear seat than in the front seat.

If a child is too large for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear
seat and must be restrained using the
vehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” in this
Section for details.

CAUTION

D For effective protection in automo-

bile accidents and sudden stops, a
child must be properly restrained,
using a seat belt or child restraint
system depending on the age and
size of the child. Holding a child in
your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed
against the windshield, or between
you and the vehicle’s interior.

104

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D Never put infant or child age 1 to

12 in a passenger risk group on the
right front passenger seat with the
passenger airbag manual on−off
switch in the “ON” or “AUTO” position. In the event of an accident,
the force of the rapid inflation of
the front passenger airbag can
cause death or serious injury to the
child.
If you must put infant or child age
1 to 12 in a passenger risk group
on the right front seat, make sure
that the passenger airbag manual
on−off switch is in the “OFF” position with the key removed and that
the indicator light is on. (For details, see “SRS driver airbag and
front passenger airbag” in this Section.)

D Do not use the seat belt extender

D Make sure you have complied with

all installation instructions provided
by the child restraint manufacturer
and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly,
it may cause death or serious injury
to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

Double cab models—

D Toyota strongly urges use of a

proper child restraint system which
conforms to the size of the child,
installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child
is safer when properly restrained in
the rear seat than in the front seat.

D Vehicles with separate seat—Never

install a rear−facing child restraint
system on the front passenger seat
even if the front passenger occupant classification indicator light indicates “OFF”. In the event of an
accident, the impact of the rapid
inflation of the front passenger airbag could cause death or serious
injury to the child if the rear−facing
child restraint system is installed
on the front passenger seat.

105

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Child restraint system
D Vehicles with separate seat—A for-

ward−facing child restraint system
should be allowed to be installed
on the front passenger seat only
when it is unavoidable. Always
move the seat as far back as possible even if the front passenger
occupant
classification
indicator
light indicates “OFF”, because the
front passenger airbag could inflate
with considerable speed and force.
Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured.

D On vehicles with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean his/her head or
any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front
or rear pillar or roof side rail from
which the side airbags or curtain
shield airbags deploy even if the
child is seated in the child restraint
system. It is dangerous if the side
airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.

D Do not use the seat belt extender

D Make sure you have complied with

A child restraint system for a small
child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must
carefully consult the manufacturer’s
instructions which accompany the child
restraint system.
To provide proper restraint, use a child
restraint system following the manufacturer’s instructions about the appropriate age
and size of the child for the child restraint
system.
Install the child restraint system correctly
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer. General directions are also
provided under the following illustrations.
The child restraint system should be
installed on the rear seat if your vehicle
is equipped with rear seats. According to
accident statistics, the child is safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than
in the front seat.
When not using the child restraint system,
keep it secured with the seat belt or place
it somewhere other than the passenger
compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

106

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Types of child restraint
system
Child restraint systems are classified into
the following 3 types depending on the
child’s age and size.
(A) Infant seat
(B) Convertible seat
(C) Booster seat
Install the child restraint system following
the instructions provided by its manufacturer.
Your vehicle has anchor brackets for securing the top strap of a child restraint
system.
For instructions about how to use the anchor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” in
this Section.

(A) Infant seat

The child restraint lower anchorages approved for your vehicle may also be used.
See “—Installation with child restraint lower anchorages” in this Section.

(B) Convertible seat

107

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Installation with seat belt
(standard cab models and
access cab models)
CAUTION
Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front seat with
the passenger airbag manual on−off
switch in the “ON” or “AUTO” position. In the event of an accident, the
force of the rapid inflation of the
front passenger airbag can cause
death or serious injury to the child if
the rear−facing child system is
installed on the front passenger seat.
(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION
An infant seat must be used in rear−
facing position only.

Except for separate seat with automatic
transmission

For separate seat with automatic transmission

108

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

When you install a rear−facing child restraint system which belongs to a passenger risk group on the right front
seat, turn the passenger airbag manual
on−off switch counterclockwise to the
“OFF” position and remove the key.
(For details, see “SRS driver airbag and
front passenger airbag” in this Section.)
The indicator light comes on when the
system is off.

CAUTION
Except for separate seat with automatic
transmission

If you must install a rear−facing child
restraint system on the right front
seat, make sure that the passenger
airbag manual on−off switch is in the
“OFF” position with the key removed
and that the indicator light is on.

CAUTION

D Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes
with the lock mechanism of the
front seats. Otherwise, the child or
front seat occupants, may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

D If the driver’s seat position does

not allow sufficient space for safe
installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right
seat.

For separate seat with automatic transmission

109

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

D If the seat belt does not function
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the infant seat following the
instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle
taking care not to twist the belt. Keep
the lap portion of the belt tight.

normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted even slightly, it cannot
be extended.
To hold the infant seat securely, make
sure the belt is in the lock mode before
letting the belt retract.

110

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

3. While pressing
against the seat
let the shoulder
it will go to hold
ly.

the infant seat firmly
cushion and seatback,
belt retract as far as
the infant seat secure-

CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.

4. To remove the infant seat, press the
buckle release button and allow the
belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or older child passenger.

111

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION
A convertible seat must be used in forward−facing or rear−facing position depending on the child’s age and size.
When installing, follow the manufacturer’s instruction about the applicable
child’s age and size as well as directions for installing the child restraint
system.

Except for separate seat with automatic
transmission

Rear−facing child restraint system:
Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front seat with
the passenger airbag manual on−off
switch in the “ON” or “AUTO” position. In the event of an accident, the
force of the rapid inflation of the
front passenger airbag can cause
death or serious injury to the child if
the rear−facing child system is
installed on the front passenger seat.

For separate seat with automatic transmission

112

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION
Except for separate seat with automatic
transmission

CAUTION
Forward−facing child restraint system:
A forward−facing child restraint system which belongs to a passenger
risk group should never be installed
on the right front passenger seat with
the passenger airbag manual on−off
switch in the “ON” or “AUTO” position, because the force of the deploying airbag could cause death or serious injury to the child in forward
seating position. (For details, see
“SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag” in this Section.)

For separate seat with automatic transmission

113

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

D If the seat belt does not function
CAUTION

D Do not install a child restraint sys-

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the convertible seat following
the
instructions
provided
by
its
manufacturer and insert the tab into
the buckle taking care not to twist the
belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt
tight.

normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed.

D If the driver’s seat position does

not allow sufficient space for safe
installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right
seat.

114

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted slightly, it cannot be extended.
To hold the convertible seat securely,
make sure the belt is in the lock mode
before letting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the convertible seat
firmly against the seat cushion and
seatback, let the shoulder belt retract
as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely.

CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.

115

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION

4. To remove the convertible seat, press
the buckle release button and allow the
belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or older child passenger.

A forward−facing child restraint system which belongs to a passenger
risk group should never be installed
on the front outside passenger seat
with the passenger airbag manual on−
off switch in the “ON” or “AUTO”
position, because the force of the deploying airbag could cause death or
serious injury to the child in forward
seating position. (For details, see
“SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag” in this Section.)

A booster seat must be used in forward−facing position only.

116

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION

D Always make sure the shoulder belt

is positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from child’s neck, but
not falling off child’s shoulder.
Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

D If the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed.

D Both high−positioned lap belts and
1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run
the lap and shoulder belt through or
around the booster seat and across the
child following the instructions provided
by its manufacturer and insert the tab
into the buckle taking care not to twist
the belt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is
across the child’s shoulder and
lap belt is positioned as low as
on the child’s hips. See “Seat
this Section for details.

correctly
that the
possible
belts” in

loose−fitting belts could cause
death or serious injuries due to
sliding under the lap belt during a
collision or other unintended event.
Keep the lap belt positioned as low
on a child’s hips as possible.

D For child’s safety, do not place the
shoulder belt under child’s arm.

D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

117

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Installation with seat belt
(double cab models)

2. To remove the child restraint system,
press the buckle release button and
allow the belt to retract.

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION
An infant seat must be used in rear−
facing position only.

CAUTION

D Vehicles with split bench seat—Nev-

er install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation
of the front passenger airbag can
cause death or serious injury to the
child if the rear−facing child restraint system is installed on the
front passenger seat.

118

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D Vehicles with separate seat—Never

D Do not install a child restraint sys-

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the infant seat following the
instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle
taking care not to twist the belt. Keep
the lap portion of the belt tight.

D If the driver’s seat position does

not allow sufficient space for safe
installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right
seat.

119

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

D If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed.

3. While pressing the infant seat firmly
against the seat cushion and seatback,
let the shoulder belt retract as far as
it will go to hold the infant seat securely.

120

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.

4. To remove the infant seat, press the
buckle release button and allow the
belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or older child passenger.

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION
A convertible seat must be used in forward−facing or rear−facing position depending on the age and size of the
child. When installing, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions about the
applicable age and size of the child as
well as directions for installing the
child restraint system.

121

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Vehicles with separate seat only—
Install the child restraint system on the
front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with a
front passenger occupant classification
system. In order to activate the occupant
classification system correctly, install the
forward−facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat in the following
order:
1. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” position.
2. Move the front passenger seat to the
rearward position.
3. Put the child restraint system on the
front passenger seat without putting
your weight on the front passenger
seat.

6. While pressing the convertible seat
firmly against the seat cushion and
seatback, let the shoulder belt retract
as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely.

CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.
7. Put a child on the child restraint system and secure the child, complying
with the instructions provided by the
child restraint system manufacturer.

The occupant classification indicator light
should indicate “OFF” when the ignition
key is in the “ON” position and the child
is in the child restraint system after following these procedures. The “OFF” indicator indicates the SRS front passenger
airbag and side airbag on the passenger
side will not deploy. If the indicator light
indicates “ON”, remove the child restraint
system and reinstall it with the ignition
key in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. If
the indicator light still indicates “ON” when
the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, then the SRS front passenger airbag
and side airbag on the passenger side
may deploy in an accident. Do not drive
the vehicle in this condition. Remove the
child restraint system and contact your
Toyota dealer.

4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seat
belt buckle.
5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted even slightly, it cannot
be extended. To hold the seat securely,
make sure the belt is in the lock mode
before letting the belt retract.

122

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D Vehicles with separate seat—Never

CAUTION

D Vehicles with separate seat—Never

install a rear−facing child restraint
system on the front passenger seat.
A forward−facing child restraint system should only be installed on the
front passenger seat when unavoidable. If you must install the child
restraint system on the front passenger seat, put the seat in its
most rearward position, and install
the forward−facing child restraint
system in the proper order. Otherwise, the front passenger occupant
classification system can not detect
the presence of the child restraint
system and the front passenger airbag and side airbag on the front
passenger seat could deploy.

D Vehicles with split bench seat—Nev-

123

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D Vehicles with separate seat—A for-

Move seat fully back

D On vehicles with side airbags and
D Vehicles with split bench seat—A

forward−facing child restraint system should be allowed to be
installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable.
Always move the seat as far back
as possible, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with
considerable
speed
and
force.
Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured.

D Do not install a child restraint sys-

D If the driver’s seat position does

not allow sufficient space for safe
installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right
seat.

124

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

D If the seat belt does not function
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the convertible seat following
the
instructions
provided
by
its
manufacturer and insert the tab into
the buckle taking care not to twist the
belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt
tight.

normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed.

125

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

3. While pressing the convertible seat
firmly against the seat cushion and
seatback, let the shoulder belt retract
as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely.

CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.

126

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D Vehicles with separate seat—A for-

Move seat fully back

CAUTION

D Vehicles with split bench seat—A

D On vehicles with side airbags and

127

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION

D Always make sure the shoulder belt

D If the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed.

correctly
that the
possible
belts” in

D For child’s safety, do not place the
shoulder belt under child’s arm.

D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

128

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Using a top strap
(standard cab models)

Anchor brackets

2. To remove the child restraint system,
press the buckle−release button and allow the belt to retract.

Follow the procedure below for a child
restraint system that requires the use
of a top strap.

Use the anchor bracket on the back panel
to attach the top strap.
Anchor brackets are installed for each
passenger seating position.
This symbol indicates the locations of
user ready anchor brackets.

129

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:
1. Remove
straint.

the

passenger

head

re-

2. Lightly push down on the top surface of the anchor bracket cover,
then pull it forward to remove.

3. Fix the child restraint system with
the seat belt.
Latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top strap.
For instructions to install the child restraint system, see “Child restraint” in this
Section.

CAUTION
Make sure the top strap is securely
latched, and check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing
and pulling it in different directions.
Follow all the installation instructions
provided by its manufacturer.

130

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Using a top strap
(access cab models)
Follow the procedure below for a child
restraint system that requires the use
of a top strap.

4. Replace
straint.

the

passenger

head

re-

Outside position

Store any removed covers in a safe place
such as the glove box.
Be sure to replace all covers when the
anchor bracket is not in use.

Center position

131

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Symbol

Routing devices

Routing device

Anchor brackets

Use the routing device on the rear of the
seat back and the anchor bracket on the
side floor to attach the top strap.
Anchor brackets are installed for each
rear seating position.
This symbol indicates the locations of
user ready anchor brackets.

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:
Outside position
1. Remove the head restraint.

2. Route the top strap through the
routing device as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION
Make sure
twisted.

the

top

strap

not

132

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

3. Fix the child restraint system with
the seat belt.

4. Replace the head restraint.

Latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket on the side floor and tighten
the top strap.
For instructions to install the child restraint system, see “Child restraint” in this
Section.

133

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Center position
1. Remove the head restraint.

2. Fold down the cup holder, unfasten
the Velcro that attaches the anchor
bracket cover, and lift the cover.

3. Route the top strap through the slot
on top of the seat, pass the strap
through the seat, then latch the hook
onto the anchor bracket.
Close the cover and return the cup
holder to the original position.

134

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Using a top strap
(double cab models)

4. Move the child restraint system to
the correct position.
Then fix the child restraint system
with the seat belt and tighten the
top strap.

5. Replace the head restraint.

Follow the procedure below for a child
restraint system that requires the use
of a top strap.

135

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Anchor brackets

Use one anchor bracket on the back of
rear seats and two anchor brackets on the
floor as shown above to attach the top
strap.

TO USE THE ANCHORAGES:

Outside position

1. Remove the head restraint.

Anchor brackets are installed for each
rear seating position.

Center position

136

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Installation with child
restraint lower anchorages
(standard cab models)
2. Fix the child restraint system with
the seat belt.
Latch the hook onto the anchorages
and tighten the top strap.
For instructions to install the child restraint system, see “Child restraint” in this
Section.

3. Replace the head restraint.

Lower anchorages for the child restraint
systems complying with the FMVSS225
or
CMVSS210.2
specifications
are
installed in the front seat.
The anchorages are installed in the gap
between the seat cushion and seatback of
the right side of the seat as shown in the
illustration.
Child restraint systems complying with the
FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification
can be fixed to these anchorages. In this
case, it is not necessary to fix the child
restraint system with a seat belt on the
vehicle.

137

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

For owners in Canada
The symbol on a child restraint system
indicates the presence of a lower connector system.
CHILD
RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION

SYSTEM

Type A—
1. Widen the gap between the seat
cushion and seatback slightly and
confirm the position of the lower anchorages near the button on the
seatback.
2. Latch the hooks of lower straps onto
the anchorages and tighten the lower
straps.
Type B—
1. Widen the gap between the seat
cushion and seatback slightly and
confirm the position of the lower anchorages near the button on the
seatback.
2. Latch the buckles onto the anchorages.
Canada only
Type A

Canada only
Type B

138

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Installation with child
restraint lower anchorages
(access cab models)
If your child restraint system has a top
strap, it should be anchored. (For the
installation of the top strap, see “—Using
a top strap” in this Section.)
For installation details, refer to the instruction manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

D When using the lower anchorages

for the child restraint system, be
sure that there are no irregular objects around the anchorages or that
the seat belt is not caught.

D Push and pull the child restraint

system in different directions to be
sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by
its manufacturer.

D After securing the child restraint

system, never slide or recline the
seat.

Lower anchorages for the child restraint
systems complying with the FMVSS225
or
CMVSS210.2
specifications
are
installed in the rear seat.
The anchorages are installed in the gap
between the seat cushion and seatback of
the outsides of the rear seat as shown in
the illustration.
Child restraint systems complying with the
FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification
can be fixed to these anchorages. In this
case, it is not necessary to fix the child
restraint system with a seat belt on the
vehicle.

Canada only
Type A

139

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

For owners in Canada
The symbol on a child restraint system
indicates the presence of a lower connector system.
CHILD
RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION

SYSTEM

If your child restraint system has a top
strap, it should be anchored. (For the
installation of the top strap, see “—Using
a top strap” in this Section.)
For installation details, refer to the instruction manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

D When using the lower anchorages

for the child restraint system, be
sure that there are no irregular objects around the anchorages or that
the seat belt is not caught.

D Push and pull the child restraint

system in different directions to be
sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by
its manufacturer.

D After securing the child restraint

system, never slide or recline the
seat.

D Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes
with the lock mechanism of the
front seats. Otherwise, the child or
front seat occupant(s) may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

140

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Installation with child
restraint lower anchorages
(double cab models)
Lower anchorages for the child restraint
systems complying with the FMVSS225
or
CMVSS210.2
specifications
are
installed in the center and left positions
of the rear seats.

Cap

The anchorages are installed in the gap
between the seat cushion and seatback
for center and left positions of rear seats.

Center

Covers

Child restraint systems complying with the
FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification
can be fixed to these anchorages. In this
case, it is not necessary to fix the child
restraint system with a seat belt on the
vehicle.

Canada only
Left

Type A

141

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Cap

For owners in Canada

Type B—

The symbol on a child restraint system
indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

1. Turn up the covers for left lower
anchorage on the center position of
the seats and for anchorages on the
left side position of the seat, and
remove the cap for the right lower
anchorage of the center position of
the seat as shown in the illustration.

CHILD
RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION
Covers

SYSTEM

Type A—
1. Turn up the covers for left lower
anchorage on the center position of
the seats and for anchorages on the
left side position of the seats, and
remove the cap for the right lower
anchorage of the center position of
the seat as shown in the illustration.
2. Widen the gap between the seat
cushion and seatback slightly and
confirm the position of the lower anchorages below the button and cap
in the seat cushion.
3. Latch the hooks of lower straps onto
the anchorages and tighten the lower
straps.

2. Widen the clearance gap the seat
cushion and seatback slightly and
confirm the position of the lower anchorages below the button and cap
in the seat cushion.
3. Latch the buckles onto the anchorages.
If your child restraint system has a top
strap, it should be anchored. (For the
installation of the top strap, see “—Using
a top strap” in this Section.)
For installation details, refer to the instruction manual equipped with each product.

Canada only
Type B

142

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION

D When using the lower anchorages

for the child restraint system, be
sure that there are no irregular objects around the anchorages or that
the seat belt is not caught.

D Push and pull the child restraint

system in different directions to be
sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by
its manufacturer.

D After securing the child restraint
system, never recline the seat.

D Do not install a child restraint sys-

143

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

144

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SECTION

1− 4

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Steering wheel and Mirrors

Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti−glare inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

146
146
148
149
150

145

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Tilt steering wheel

Outside rear view mirrors—
CAUTION

D Do not adjust the steering wheel

while the vehicle is moving. Doing
so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may
occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.

D After adjusting the steering wheel,

try moving it up and down to make
sure it is locked in position.

To change the steering
hold the steering wheel,
release lever toward you,
ing wheel to the desired
lease the lever.

wheel angle,
pull the lock
tilt the steerangle and re-

When the steering wheel is in a low position, it will spring up as you release the
lock release lever.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the side of your vehicle in the mirror.
Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen in the outside
rear view mirror on the passenger’s side
because it is a convex mirror. Any object
seen in a convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than when seen in a flat
mirror.

146

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Power rear view mirror
control
On some models, when you push the outside rear view mirror heater switch or outside rear view mirror defogger switch, the
heater panels in the outside rear view
mirrors will quickly clear the mirror surface. (See “Back window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers” in Section 1−5 and
“Outside rear view mirror heaters” in Section 1−5.)

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.
1. Master switch—To select the mirror to
be adjusted
Push the switch to “L” (left) or “R”
(right).
2. Control switch—To move the mirror
Push the switch in the desired direction.

CAUTION

Mirrors can be adjusted when the key is
in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

D Do not adjust the mirror while the

NOTICE

vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the
vehicle and an accident may occur
resulting in death or serious injuries.

Standard and access cab models

If ice should jam the mirror, do not
operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de−icer to free
the mirror.

D On some models, since the mirror

surfaces can get hot, do not touch
them when the outside rear view
mirror heater or defogger switch is
on.

Double cab models

147

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Folding rear view mirrors

Anti−glare inside rear view
mirror
CAUTION
Do not adjust the mirror while the
vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

The rear view mirrors can be folded
backward for parking in compact areas.
To fold the rear view mirror, push backward.

CAUTION
Do not drive with the mirrors folded
backward. Both the driver and passenger side rear view mirrors must
be extended and properly adjusted
before driving.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the rear of your vehicle in the mirror.
To reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicle behind you during night
driving, operate the lever on the lower
edge of the mirror.
Daylight driving—Lever at position 1
The reflection in the mirror has greater
clarity at this position.
Night driving—Lever at position 2
Remember that by reducing glare you also
lose some rear view clarity.

148

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Auto anti−glare inside rear
view mirror
In automatic function mode, if the mirror
detects light from the headlights of the
vehicle behind you, the mirror surface
darkens slightly to reduce the reflected
light.
To turn off the automatic function, push
the “OFF” switch.
To turn on the automatic function again,
push the “AUTO” switch.
Adjust it before driving so that the rear
view is in the best condition.
Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the rear of your vehicle in the mirror.
This mirror is equipped with auto anti−
glare function. The function is designed
to reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicle behind you during night
driving.
When the ignition key is inserted and
turned on, the inside rear view mirror always turns on in the automatic function
mode.

When the inside air temperature is low, it
may take a little longer for the mirror to
darken in response to the detection of
headlights.

CAUTION

To ensure correct functioning of anti−
glare mirror sensors located on both
sides of the mirror, do not touch or
cover the sensors with your finger or
a piece of cloth, etc.

Do not adjust the mirror while the
vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

The indicator illuminates to show you that
the function is on.

149

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Sun visors—
To block out glare, move the sun visor.
To block out glare from the front—Swing
down the sun visor (position 1).
To block out glare from the side—Swing
down the sun visor, remove it from the
hook and swing it to the lateral side (position 2).
If glare comes from obliquely behind you,
extend the plate at the end of the visor
(to position 3).

Standard and access cab models

Double cab models

150

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Vanity mirrors
To block the glare from the front when the
main sun visor is swung to the lateral
side (position 2), swing down the sub visor.

To use the vanity mirrors, swing down
the sun visor and open the cover.
The vanity light(s) comes on when you
open the cover.

CAUTION
Do not extend the plate at the end of
the sun visor when the visor is in the
position 1. It can cover the anti−glare
inside rear view mirror and obstruct
the rear view.
Standard and access cab models

Double cab models

151

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

152

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SECTION

1− 5

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Lights and Wipers

Headlights and turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center interior and personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition switch and step lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wipers and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside rear view mirror heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back window and outside rear view mirror defoggers . . . . . . . . . . .

154
155
156
156
157
157
158
159
160
161
162
163

153

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Headlights and turn signals
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on
for a long period when the engine is
not running.
Daytime running light system (on some
models)

HEADLIGHTS
To turn on the following lights: Twist
the headlight/turn signal lever knob.
Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights
Position
above

2—Headlights

and

all

the

The lights automatically turn off when the
driver’s door is opened with the ignition
turned off. To turn them on again, turn the
key to the “ON” position or actuate the
headlight switch. If you are going to park
for over one week, make sure the headlight switch is off.

The headlights turn on at reduced intensity when the parking brake is released with
the engine started, even with the light
switch in the “OFF” position. They will not
go off until the ignition switch is turned
off.
To turn on the other exterior lights and
instrument panel lights, twist the knob to
the position 1.
Twist the knob to the position 2 to turn
the headlights to full intensity for driving
at night.

High−Low beams—For high beams, turn
the headlights on and push the lever away
from you (position 1). Pull the lever toward you (position 2) for low beams.
The headlight high beam indicator light
(blue light) on the instrument panel will
tell you that the high beams are on.
Flashing the high
(position 3)—Pull the
back. The high beam
when you release the

beam headlights
lever all the way
headlights turn off
lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights
with the knob turned to “OFF”.

154

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Emergency flashers
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the switch on
longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

TURN SIGNALS
To signal a turn, push the headlight/
turn signal lever up or down to position
1.
The key must be in the “ON” position.
The lever automatically returns after you
make a turn, but you may have to return
it by hand after you change lanes.
To signal a lane change, move the lever
up or down to the pressure point (position
2) and hold it.
If the turn signal indicator lights (green
lights) on the instrument panel flash faster
than normal, a front or rear turn signal
bulb is burned out.

To turn on the
push the switch.

emergency

flashers,

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn
them off, push the switch once again.
Turn on the emergency flashers to warn
other drivers if your vehicle must be
stopped where it might be a traffic hazard.
Always pull as far off the road as possible.
The turn signal light switch will not work
when the emergency flashers are operating.

155

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Instrument panel light control

Front fog lights
To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights, turn the knob.

Standard and access cab models

To turn on the front fog lights, twist
the band of the headlight/turn signal
lever. They will come on only when the
headlights are on low beam.

Double cab models

156

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Interior light

Personal lights
Standard cab and access cab models only
(with wireless remote control)—When the
switch is in the “DOOR” position and all
the door are unlocked using the wireless
remote control transmitter simultaneously,
the lights will come on and remain for
about 30 seconds unless any door is
opened or closed.

To turn on the interior light, slide the
switch.

Standard and access cab models

The interior light switch has the following
positions:
“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.
“OFF”—Turns the light off.
“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any
door is opened. The light goes off when
all the doors are closed.

Double cab models

157

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Center interior and personal
lights
Standard and access cab models—

CENTER INTERIOR LIGHT

To turn on the light, push the lens on
your side. To turn the light off, push
the lens once again.

Type A—

The personal light switch has the following
positions:

The interior light switch has the following
positions:

To turn on the interior light, slide the
switch.

“OFF”—Turns the lights off.

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“DOOR”—Turns the lights on when any of
the doors are opened.
With wireless remote control—When the
switch is in the “DOOR” position and all
the door are unlocked using the wireless
remote control transmitter simultaneously,
the lights will come on and remain for
about 30 seconds unless any door is
opened or closed.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.
“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any of
the doors is opened. The light remains on
when all the doors are closed.
Type A

Type B—
To turn on the interior lights, push the
switch.

Double cab models—

The interior light switch has the following
positions:

To turn on the personal light, push the
switch. To turn the light off, push the
switch once again.

“DOOR”—Turns the lights on when any of
the doors is opened. The light remains on
when all the doors are closed.

Turn the light on when any door is
opened. The light goes off when all the
doors are closed.

“OFF”—The lights are off unless you operate either outside switch.

Type B

158

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Ignition switch and step lights
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
When the switch is in the “DOOR” position and any of the doors is opened, the
light will come on. After all the doors are
closed, the light remains on for a certain
time before fading out.
However, in the following cases, the light
goes out immediately:

D All the doors are closed when the igni-

To prevent the battery being discharged,
the light will automatically turn off when
the key is removed and the door is left
opened with the switch at “DOOR” position
for 20 minutes or more.
CENTER PERSONAL LIGHTS
To turn on the center personal light,
push the switch. To turn the light off,
push the switch once again.

tion key is in “ACC” or “ON” position.

D The ignition key is turned to “ACC”,

“ON” or “START” after all the doors are
closed.

D All the doors are locked when the light
is still on.

When all the doors are unlocked using
either the key or the wireless remote control transmitter simultaneously, the lights
come on for about 15 seconds before fading out.
The following adjustments can be made in
this system. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.

D Cancelling the door key or wireless remote control transmitter linked operation

D Changing the timing for the light turning off

Standard and access cab models—
For easy access to the ignition switch,
the ignition switch light comes on when
the driver’s door is opened. The step
light also comes on when the driver’s
door is opened.
The ignition switch light remains on for
some time after the driver’s door is
closed.
Double cab models—
For easy access to the ignition switch,
the ignition switch light comes on when
any of the doors are opened. The step
light also comes on when the any of
the doors are opened.

159

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Cargo lamp
The lights remain on for some time after
all the doors are closed.

The cargo lamp is designed to light up
the rear deck of your vehicle.

However, in the following cases, the lights
go off immediately.

CARGO LAMP OPERATION

D All the doors are closed when the ignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

D The ignition key is turned to the “ACC”,

“ON”, or “START” position after all the
doors are closed.

D All the doors are closed and locked.
When all the doors are unlocked using
either the key or the wireless remote control transmitter simultaneously, the lights
will come on and remain on for about 15
seconds before fading out.
To prevent the battery being discharged,
the lights will automatically turn off when
the key is removed and the door is left
opened for 20 minutes or more.
The following adjustments can be made in
this system. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.

D Cancelling the door key or wireless remote control transmitter linked operation

D Changing the timing for the light turn-

By pushing the “CARGO LAMP” switch
To turn on: Push the “CARGO LAMP”
switch once.
At this time, the indicator light on the
instrument panel will come on.
To turn off: Push the “CARGO LAMP”
switch once again.
By locking and unlocking the doors (vehicles with the power door lock system)
You can operate the cargo lump by this
method when all the doors are closed and
the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position or the key is removed.
To turn on: Unlock the doors with the key,
the power door lock switch or the wireless
remote control transmitter (double cab
models).
The cargo lamp will automatically turn off
after 20 seconds.
To turn off: Lock the doors with the key,
the power door lock switch or the wireless
remote control transmitter (double cab
models).

ing off

160

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Windshield wipers and washer
(intermittent type)
To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever
toward you and release it.

By opening and closing the doors
To turn on: Open any of the doors.
To turn off: Close all the doors:

If the windshield wipers are off, they will
operate a couple of times after the washer
squirts.

D When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the cargo lamp will go off immediately.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see “Adding washer fluid” in Section 7−3.

D When the ignition switch is in the

In freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before using the washer.
This will help prevent the washer fluid
from freezing on your windshield, which
can block your vision.

“ACC” or “LOCK” position or the key is
removed, the cargo lamp will automatically go off after 20 seconds.

CARGO LAMP AUTOMATIC POWER−OFF
FUNCTION
To prevent the battery being discharged,
the cargo lamp will automatically go off
when the lamp remains on for 30 minutes
or more.

To turn on the windshield wipers, move
the lever to the desired setting.
The key must be in the “ON” position.
Lever position

Speed setting

Position 1

Intermittent

Position 2

Slow

Position 3

Fast

NOTICE
Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may scratch the
glass.

The “INT TIME” band lets you adjust the
wiping time interval when the wiper lever
is in the intermittent position (position 1).
Twist the band upward to increase the
time between sweeps, and downward to
decrease it.

161

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Windshield wipers and washer
(mist type)

Outside rear view mirror
heaters
In freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before using the washer.
This will help prevent the washer fluid
from freezing on your windshield, which
can block your vision.

NOTICE
Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may scratch the
glass.

To turn on the windshield wipers, move
the lever to the desired setting.

To defog or defrost the outside rear
view mirrors, push the switch.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

Lever position

Speed setting

Position 1

Slow

Position 2

Fast

For a single sweep of the windshield,
push the lever up and release it.
To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever
toward you and release it.
For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see “Adding washer fluid” in Section 7−3.

The heater panels in the outside rear view
mirrors will quickly clear the mirror surfaces. An indicator light will illuminate to
indicate the mirror heaters are operating.
Push the switch once again to turn the
mirror heaters off.
The system will automatically shut off after the mirror heaters have operated about
15 minutes.

162

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Back window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers
Make sure you turn the defoggers off
when the surfaces are clear. Leaving the
defoggers on for a long time could cause
the battery to discharge, especially during
stop−and−go driving. The defoggers are
not designed for drying rain water or for
melting snow.

CAUTION
Since the mirror surfaces can get hot,
do not touch them when the switch
is on.
Make sure you turn the mirror heaters off
when the mirror surfaces are clear. Leaving the mirror heaters on for a long time
could cause the battery to discharge, especially during stop−and−go driving. The
mirror heaters are not designed for drying
rain water or for melting snow.
If the outside rear view mirrors are heavily coated with ice, use a spray de−icer
before operating the switch.

CAUTION
Since the mirror surfaces can get hot,
do not touch them when the defogger
switch is on.
To defog or defrost the back window,
push the switch with the back window
closed.
The key must be in the “ON” position.
The thin heater wires on the inside of the
back window will quickly clear the surface.
An indicator light will illuminate to indicate
the defogger is operating.

NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the back
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the heater wires or connectors.

Heater panels in the outside rear view
mirrors will also quickly clear the surfaces.
Push the switch once again to turn the
defogger off.
The system will automatically shut off after the defoggers have operated about 15
minutes.

163

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

164

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SECTION

1− 6

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS

Gauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer and two trip meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

166
166
167
168
168
169
170

165

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Engine coolant temperature
gauge

Fuel gauge
The gauge indicates the approximate
quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
when the ignition switch is on.
Nearly full—Needle at “F”
Nearly empty—Needle at “E”
It is a good idea to keep the tank over
1/4 full.
The needle moves when braking, accelerating or making turns. This is caused by
the movement of the fuel in the tank.

Without tachometer

If the fuel level approaches “E” or the low
fuel level warning light comes on, fill the
fuel tank as soon as possible.

Without tachometer

On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge
needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than
usual.
If the fuel tank is completely empty, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill
the fuel tank immediately.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving
several times. If the indicator lamp does
not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.

With tachometer

166

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Oil pressure gauge
The gauge indicates the engine coolant
temperature when the ignition switch is
on. The engine operating temperature
will vary with changes in weather and
engine load.
If the needle moves into the red zone,
your engine is too hot. If your vehicle
overheats, stop your vehicle and allow the
engine to cool.
Your vehicle may overheat during severe
operating conditions, such as:

D Driving up a long hill on a hot day.
D Reducing speed or stopping after high
speed driving.

D Idling for a long period with the air
conditioning on in stop−and−go traffic.

D Towing a trailer.

NOTICE
z Do not remove the thermostat in
the engine cooling system as this
may cause the engine to overheat.
The thermostat is designed to control the flow of coolant to keep the
temperature of the engine within
the specified operating range.
z Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. See “If your vehicle overheats” in Section 4.

Normal driving

Idling

The oil pressure gauge indicates engine
oil pressure when the ignition switch is
on. Check it while driving to make sure
that the needle is in the proper range.
If the oil pressure should stay below the
normal range, pull off the road to a safe
place and stop the engine immediately.
Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair
shop for assistance.
Oil pressure may not build up when the
oil level is too low. The oil pressure
gauge is not designed to indicate oil level,
and the oil level must be checked using
the level dipstick.

167

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Voltmeter

Tachometer

The voltmeter tells whether the battery
is charged or discharged. Check it
while the engine is running—the needle
should always indicate as shown above.

The tachometer indicates engine speed
in thousands of rpm (revolutions per
minute). Use it while driving to select
correct shift points and to prevent engine lugging and over−revving.

NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle with the oil
pressure below the normal range until
the cause is fixed—it may ruin the
engine.

If the needle reads below or above the
normal range while the engine is running,
it indicates the charging system needs immediate repair.
However, it is normal for the needle to
drop below the normal range during engine starting.

Driving with the engine running too fast
causes excessive engine wear and poor
fuel economy. Remember, in most cases
the slower the engine speed, the greater
the fuel economy.

NOTICE
Do not let the indicator needle get
into the red zone. This may cause
severe engine damage.

168

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Odometer and two trip meters
3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the two
trip meters to zero, and also change
the meter display.
To change the meter display, quickly
push and release the knob. The meter
display changes in the order from the
odometer to trip meter A to trip meter
B, then back to the odometer each
time you push.

This meter displays the odometer and
two trip meters.
1. Odometer—Shows the total
the vehicle has been driven.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, display the meter A reading, then push
and hold the knob until the meter is
set to zero. The same process can be
applied for resetting the trip meter B.

distance

2. Two trip meters—Show two different
distances independently driven since
the last time each trip meter was set
to zero.
You can use one trip meter to calculate
the fuel economy and the other to
measure the distance on each trip. All
trip meter data is cancelled if the electrical power source is disconnected.

169

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers
If the indicator or buzzer comes on...

(a)

Do this.
If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(indicator and

buzzer∗)

(b)

∗:

For vehicles with the vehicle stability control system only

Fasten driver’s seat belt.
(indicator and buzzer)

(c)

Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.

(d)

Stop and check.

(e)

Stop and check.

(f)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(g)

Fill up tank.

170

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on...

(h)

Do this.
Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(i)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(j)

Close all doors.

(k)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(l)

Adjust tire inflation pressure (including spare tire). If the light blinks, contact Toyota
dealer.

(m)

Stop and check.

(n)

Add washer fluid.

(o)

Replace engine oil.

171

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on...

Do this.

(p)

Key reminder buzzer

Remove key.

(q)

Four−wheel drive system
warning buzzer

Shift the transfer mode correctly.

172

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

(a) Brake System Warning Light and
Buzzer

Have your vehicle checked at your
Toyota dealer in the following cases:

This light comes on in the following cases
when the ignition key is in the “ON” position.

D The light does not come on even if the

D When the parking brake is applied...

With the vehicle stability control system—

D The light does not come on even if the

This light comes on for a few seconds
when the ignition key is turned to the
“ON” position even after the parking brake
is released.

D When the brake fluid level is low...
CAUTION
It is dangerous to continue driving
normally when the brake fluid level is
low.

D When the hydraulic brake booster
fails (with the vehicle stability control system)...

If the hydraulic booster causes a problem
resulting in poor braking performance, the
warning light comes on and buzzer sounds
continuously.

parking brake is applied when the ignition key is in the “ON” position.

ignition key is turned on with the parking brake released.

A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION
Without the vehicle stability control
system—
If the light does not turn off even
after the parking brake is released
while the engine is running, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe
place and contact your Toyota dealer.
In this case, the brakes may not work
properly and your stopping distance
will become longer. Depress the brake
pedal firmly and bring the vehicle to
an immediate stop.

With the vehicle stability control system—
If any of the following conditions occurs, immediately stop your vehicle at
a safe place and contact your Toyota
dealer.

D The light does not turn off even
after the parking brake is released
while the engine is running.

D The warning buzzer comes on together with the warning light.

In either case, this can indicate that
the brakes may not work properly
and your stopping distance will become longer. Depress the brake
pedal firmly and bring the vehicle
to an immediate stop.

D The brake system warning light remains on together with the “ABS”
warning light.

In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.

173

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

With the vehicle stability control system—

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light
and Buzzer

Any of the following conditions may occur, but do not indicate the malfunction:

The light and buzzer act as a reminder to
buckle up the driver’s seat belt.

D The light may stay on for about 60

seconds after the ignition key is turned
to the “ON” position. It is normal if it
turns off after a while.

D Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the warning light and
buzzer. It is normal if the light turns off
and the buzzer stops sounding after a
few seconds.

D You may hear a small sound in the
engine compartment
started or the brake
repeatedly. This is
sound of the brake
not a malfunction.

after the engine is
pedal is depressed
a pump pulsating
system, and it is

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or
“START”, the reminder light flashes and
buzzer sounds if the driver’s seat belt is
not fastened. Unless the driver fastens the
belt, the light continues flashing and the
buzzer stops after about 4 to 8 seconds.

Vehicles with separate seat—
Once the ignition key is turned to “ON”,
the reminder light flashes if a passenger
sits in the front passenger seat and does
not fasten the seat belt.
If luggage or other load is placed on the
front passenger seat, depending on its
weight, the reminder light may come on.
(d) Discharge Warning Light

Re-

This light warns that the battery is being
discharged.

The light acts as a reminder to have the
front passenger buckle up the seat belt.

If it comes on while you are driving, there
is a problem somewhere in the charging
system.

Seat

Belt

Vehicles with bench seat—
Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or
“START”, the reminder light flash if a passenger sits in the front passenger seat
and does not fasten the seat belt. However, if a front passenger uses an additional
seat cushion, the light may not flash even
when the seat belt is not buckled up.
If luggage or other load is placed on the
front passenger seat, depending on its
weight and how it is placed on the seat,
built−in sensors in the seat cushion may
detect the pressure, causing the reminder
light to flash.

The engine ignition will continue to operate, however, until the battery is discharged. Turn off the air conditioning,
blower, radio, etc., and drive directly to
the nearest Toyota dealer or repair shop.

NOTICE
Do not continue driving if the engine
drive belt is broken or loose.

174

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

(e) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning
Light
This light warns that the engine oil pressure is too low.
If it flickers or stays on while you are
driving, pull off the road to a safe place
and stop the engine immediately. Call a
Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for
assistance.
The light may occasionally flicker when
the engine is idling or it may come on
briefly after a hard stop. There is no
cause for concern if it then goes out when
the engine is accelerated slightly.
The light may come on when the oil level
is extremely low. It is not designed to
indicate low oil level, and the oil level
must be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle with the
warning light on—even for one block.
It may ruin the engine.

(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp
This lamp comes on when the ignition
key is turned to the “ON” position and
goes off after the engine starts. This
means that the warning light system is
operating properly.
If the lamp remains on, or the lamp
comes on while driving, first check the
followings.

D Empty fuel tank
If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immediately.

D Loose fuel tank cap
If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely
tighten it.
These cases are temporary malfunctions.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off
after taking several driving trips.
If the lamp does not go off even after
several trips, contact your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible.

If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel
tank cap is not loose...

D There is a problem somewhere in the
engine, emission control system, electronic throttle control system, automatic
transmission electrical system or warning light system itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible to service the vehicle.
If engine speed does not increase when
the accelerator pedal is depressed, there
may be a problem somewhere in the electronic throttle control system.
At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the accelerator pedal
more firmly and slowly, you can drive your
vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle
checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
Even if the abnormality of the electronic
throttle control system is corrected during
low speed driving, the system may not be
recovered until the engine is stopped and
the ignition key is turned to “ACC” or
“LOCK” position.

175

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION
Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal operation.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) programs
Your vehicle may not pass a state
emission inspection if the malfunction
indicator lamp remains on. Contact your
Toyota dealer to check your vehicle’s
emission
control
system
and
OBD
(On−Board Diagnostics) system before
taking your vehicle for the inspection.
For details, see “Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) programs” in Section 6.
(g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light
This light comes on when the fuel level
in the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up
the tank as soon as possible.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than
usual.

(h) “ABS” Warning Light
Vehicles without vehicle stability control
system—
The light comes on when the ignition key
is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−
lock brake system works properly, the
light turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter, if the system malfunctions, the light
comes on again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate,
but the brake system still operates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate
so that the wheels could lock up during
a sudden braking or braking on slippery
road surfaces.

If either of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
somewhere in the components monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible to service the vehicle.

D The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, or the light remains on.

D The light comes on while you are driving.

A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.
Vehicles with vehicle stability control
system—
The light comes on when the ignition key
is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−
lock brake system and the brake assist
system work properly, the light turns off
after a few seconds. Thereafter, if either
of the systems malfunctions, the light
comes on again.

176

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
following systems do not operate, but the
brake system still operates conventionally.

D
D
D
D
D

Anti−lock brake system
Brake assist system
Traction control system
“AUTO LSD” system
Vehicle stability control system

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate,
so that the wheels will lock up during a
sudden braking or braking on slippery
road surfaces.
If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by
the warning light system. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
service the vehicle.

D The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, or remains on.

D The light comes on while you are driving.

A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on
together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.
Either of the following conditions may
occur, but do not indicate a malfunction:

D The light may stay on for about 60

seconds after the ignition key is turned
to the “ON” position. It is normal if it
turns off after a while.

D Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if it
turns off after a few seconds.

(i) “VSC TRAC” Warning Light
The light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the following.

D Vehicle stability control system
D Traction control system
D “AUTO LSD” system
The light will come on when the ignition
key turned to “ON”, and will go off after
a few seconds.
It is not a malfunction that the warning
light may stay on for 60 seconds after the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the lights. It is normal if they
go out after a few seconds.
If the light comes on while driving, the
above mentioned systems do not work.
However, as the brakes operate normally
when applied, it is no problem to continue
your driving.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

D The warning light does not come on
after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

D The warning light remains on after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.

D The warning light comes on while driving.

177

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

When the brake fluid level is too low, the
traction control system, “AUTO LSD” system and vehicle stability control system
will not operate and the warning light
comes on.

If either of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction somewhere in
the parts monitored by the warning light
system. Contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible to service the vehicle.

(j) Open Door Warning Light

D The light does not come on when the

This light remains on until all the doors
are completely closed.
(k) SRS Warning Light
This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.
After about 6 seconds, the light will go
off. This means the system of the airbag and front seat belt pretensioners
are operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system and indicator light,
passenger airbag manual on−off switch,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, “RSCA OFF” indicator
light, interconnecting wiring and power
sources.

ignition key is turned to the “ON” position or remains on for more than 6
seconds.

D The light comes on while driving.
(l) Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
This light warns that the tire pressure of
one or more of your tires (including the
spare tire) is low. The light comes on
when the ignition key is turned to the
“ON” position. It goes off after a few seconds. This indicates that the tire pressure
warning system is functioning properly.
If the warning light comes on, stop your
vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and check that the inflation pressure
of all tires (including the spare tire) is as
specified on the tire and loading information label. (See “Checking tire inflation
pressure” in Section 7−2.) The light should
go off a few minutes after the tire pressure is adjusted.

For details, see “Tire pressure warning
system” in Section 1−7.
(m) Automatic
Transmission
Temperature
Warning
(four−wheel drive models)

Fluid
Light

This light warns that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high.
If this light comes on while you are driving, slow down and pull off the road. Stop
the vehicle at a safe place and put the
selector lever in “P”. With the engine idling, wait until the light goes off. If the
light goes off, you may start the vehicle
again. If the light does not go off, call a
Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for
assistance.
(n) Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level
Warning Light
This light warns that the windshield washer fluid level is too low. Add washer fluid
at your earliest opportunity. (For instructions, see “Adding washer fluid” in Section
7−3.)

If the warning light blinks, the tire pressure warning system may be malfunctioning. Contact your Toyota dealer.

178

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

(o) Engine Oil Replacement Reminder
Light (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)
This light acts as a reminder when to
replace the engine oil.
This light will come on when the ignition
key is turned to “ON” and will go off after
about a few seconds.
When you drive for about 7200 km (4500
miles) after the engine oil replacement,
this light illuminates for about 3 seconds
and then flashes for about 12 seconds
with the ignition key turned to the “ON”
position. If you continue driving without
replacing the engine oil, and if the distance driven exceeds 8000 km (5000
miles), the light will come on after the
ignition key is turned to “ON” position.
The light will remain on thereafter.
If the light is flashing, we recommend that
you replace the engine oil at an early
opportunity depending on the driving and
road conditions. If the light comes on,
replace it as soon as possible.

The system must be reset after the engine oil replacement. Reset the system by
the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position with the odometer
reading shown. (For details, see
“Odometer and two trip meters” in this
Section.)
2. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” position while holding down the trip meter
reset knob.

(q) Four−wheel Drive System Warning
Buzzer
This buzzer reminds you that the transfer
mode is not selected correctly.
If the buzzer sounds when you shift the
transfer from “2WD” to “4HI”, “4LO” to
“4HI”, “4HI” to “4LO”, or “4LO” to “2WD”
mode, follow the instructions in “Four−
wheel drive system” in Section 1−7.

Hold down the knob for at least 5 seconds. The odometer indicates “000000”
and the light goes off.
If the system fails to reset, the light will
continue flashing.
(p) Key Reminder Buzzer
This buzzer acts as a reminder to remove
the key when you open the driver’s door
with the ignition key in the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position.

179

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CHECKING
SERVICE
REMINDER
INDICATORS (except the low fuel level
warning light and low windshield
washer fluid level warning light)
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Open one of the doors.
The open door warning light should
come on.
3. Close the door.
The open door warning light should go
off.
4. Turn the ignition key to “ON”, but do
not start the engine.
All the service reminder indicators except the open door warning light should
come on.

D Slip indicator light
The SRS warning light goes off after
about 6 seconds.
There may be the case that the “ABS”
warning light (brake assist system
warning light), “VSC TRAC” warning
light, slip indicator light and “VSC OFF”
(four−wheel drive models) indicator light
stay on for about 60 seconds after the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if they go out after
a while.
If any service reminder indicator or warning buzzer does not function as described
above, have it checked by your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.

The following service reminder indicators go off after a few seconds:

D
D
D
D
D

“ABS” warning light
“VSC TRAC” warning light
Low tire pressure warning light
Engine oil replacement reminder light
Roll sensing of curtain shield airbag off
indicator light

D “AUTO LSD” indicator light
D “VSC OFF” indicator light
(four−wheel drive models)

180

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SECTION

1− 7

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS

Ignition switch, Transmission and Parking brake
Ignition switch with steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four−wheel drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“AUTO LSD” system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle stability control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

182
183
187
188
191
193
197
200
205
206

181

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Ignition switch with steering
lock
“ACC”—Accessories such as the radio
operate, but the engine is off.
If you leave the key in the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position and open the driver’s
door, a buzzer will remind you to remove
the key.
“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steering
wheel is locked. The key can be removed only at this position.

“START”—Starter motor on. The key
will return to the “ON” position when
released.
For starting tips, see Section 3.
“ON”—Engine on and all accessories
on.
This is the normal driving position.
It is not a malfunction if the needle on all
meters and gauges move slightly when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.

You must push in the key to turn the key
from “ACC” to the “LOCK” position. On
vehicles with an automatic transmission,
the selector lever must be in the “P” position before pushing the key.
When starting the engine, the key may
seem stuck at the “LOCK” position. To
free it, first be sure the key is pushed all
the way in, and then rock the steering
wheel slightly while turning the key gently.

CAUTION
For manual transmission:
Never remove the key when the vehicle is moving, as this will lock the
steering wheel and result in loss of
steering control.

NOTICE
Do not leave the key in the “ON”
position if the engine is not running.
The battery will discharge and the
ignition could be damaged.

Approximately five hours after the engine
is turned off, you may hear sound coming
from underneath the rear deck for several
minutes. This is normal operation and
does not indicate a malfunction. (See
“Leak detection pump”.)

182

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Automatic transmission

Overdrive switch

Your automatic transmission has a shift
lock system to minimize the possibility of
incorrect operation. This means you can
only shift out of “P” position when the
brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition
switch in “ON” or “ACC” position and the
selector lever pulled toward you).
(a) Selector lever
The shift position is displayed on the instrument cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and key
removal
R: Reverse

With the brake pedal
depressed, shift while pulling
the selector lever toward you.
(The ignition switch must be
in “ON” or “ACC” position.)
Shift while pulling the selector
lever toward you.

N: Neutral
D: Normal driving (with overdrive on)
3,2: Stronger engine braking
(b) Shift position “L” switch
(“SHIFT L” switch)

Selector lever

To down shift to first gear (“L” position),
push this switch with the shift lever in the
“2” position. The “ L” is displayed on the
instrument cluster and engine braking will
be maximized.

Shift normally.
Push the shift position “L” switch.
To shift from the “L” position to a
position other than “2”, move the
selector lever to that position.

Shift position
“L” switch

To shift up to the “2” position, push this
switch again.
To shift up to a position other than “2”,
move the selector lever to that position.

183

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Vehicles with cruise control—When the
cruise control is being used, even if you
downshift the transmission by pushing and
releasing the overdrive switch, engine
braking will not be enabled because the
cruise control is not cancelled.
For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,
see “Cruise control” in this Section.
(d) Normal driving
1. Start the engine as instructed in “How
to start the engine” in Section 3. The
transmission must be in “P” or “N”.
(c) Overdrive switch
You can select either fourth gear (with
overdrive off) or fifth gear (with overdrive
on) by pushing this switch.
To turn the overdrive off, push the switch.
The “O/D OFF” indicator light should come
on. To turn the overdrive on again, push
the switch again. The “O/D OFF” indicator
light should go off.
Always drive your vehicle with the overdrive on for better fuel economy and
quieter driving.
If the engine is turned off when the overdrive is off and restarted, the overdrive
will automatically be on.

2. With your foot holding down the brake
pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.
When the lever is in the “D” position, the
automatic transmission system will select
the most suitable gear for running conditions such as normal cruising, hill climbing, hard towing, etc.
Always turn the overdrive on for better
fuel economy and quieter driving. If the
engine coolant temperature is low, the
transmission will not shift into the overdrive gear even with the overdrive on.

3. Release the parking brake and brake
pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal
slowly for smooth starting.
(e) Using engine braking
To use engine braking, you can downshift
the transmission as follows:

D Push the overdrive switch. The “O/D

OFF” indicator light will come on and
the transmission will downshift to third
gear.

D Shift into the “3” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to third gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than the following speed, and
stronger engine braking will be enabled.
Two−wheel drive models
127 km/h (79 mph)
Four−wheel drive models
“4HI” mode is selected
127 km/h (79 mph)
“4LO” mode is selected
49 km/h (30 mph)

CAUTION
Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while shifting.

184

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D Shift into the “2” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to second gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than the following speed, and
stronger engine braking will be enabled.

Two−wheel drive models
84 km/h (52 mph)

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,
see “Cruise control” in this Section.

Four−wheel drive models
“4HI” mode is selected
84 km/h (52 mph)
“4LO” mode is selected
32 km/h (20 mph)

D Push the “SHIFT L” switch. The trans-

mission will downshift to first gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than the following speed, and
maximum engine braking will be enabled.
Two−wheel drive models
1GR−FE engine

40 km/h (25 mph)

2UZ−FE engine
“2WD” or “4HI” mode is selected
36 km/h (22 mph)
“4LO” mode is selected
14 km/h (8 mph)

CAUTION
Be careful when downshifting on a
slippery
surface.
Abrupt
shifting
could cause the vehicle to skid or
spin.
(f) Using “3”, “2” and “L” positions
The “3”, “2” and “L” positions are used for
strong engine braking as described previously.
With the selector lever in “3”, “2” or
“SHIFT L” switch depressed, the vehicle
can move just as if the lever was in “D”.

NOTICE
z Be careful not to over−rev the engine. Watch the tachometer to keep
engine rpm from going into the red
zone. The approximate maximum allowable speed for each position is
given below for your reference:
Two−wheel drive models
1GR−FE engine—
“3” . . . . . . . . . 140 km/h (87 mph)
“2” . . . . . . . . . . 95 km/h (59 mph)
“L” . . . . . . . . . . 55 km/h (34 mph)
2UZ−FE engine—
Access cab models
“3” . . . . . . . 140 km/h (87 mph)
“2” . . . . . . . . 95 km/h (59 mph)
“L” . . . . . . . . 55 km/h (34 mph)
Double cab models
“3” . . . . . . . 135 km/h (84 mph)
“2” . . . . . . . . 90 km/h (56 mph)
“L” . . . . . . . . 50 km/h (31 mph)

With the selector lever in “3”, “2”, the
vehicle will start in first gear and automatically shift to second gear.
With the “SHIFT L” switch depressed, the
transmission is engaged in first gear.

185

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Four−wheel drive models
“2WD” or “4HI” mode is selected
Standard and access cab
els
“3” . . . . . . . 140 km/h (87
“2” . . . . . . . . 95 km/h (59
“L” . . . . . . . . 55 km/h (34

modmph)
mph)
mph)

Double cab models
“3” . . . . . . . 135 km/h (84 mph)
“2” . . . . . . . . 90 km/h (56 mph)
“L” . . . . . . . . 50 km/h (31 mph)
“4LO” mode is selected
“3” . . . . . . . . . . 55 km/h (34 mph)
“2” . . . . . . . . . . 35 km/h (22 mph)
“L” . . . . . . . . . . 20 km/h (12 mph)
z Do not continue hill climbing or
hard towing for a long time in the
“3”, “2” or “L” position. This may
cause severe automatic transmission damage from overheating. To
prevent such damage, “D” position
should be used in hill climbing or
hard towing.

(g) Backing up

(i) Good driving practice

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

D If the transmission repeatedly shifts up

2. With the brake pedal held down with
your foot, shift the selector lever to the
“R” position.

NOTICE
Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving.
(h) Parking
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal pressed down,
fully depress the parking brake pedal
to apply the parking brake securely.
3. With the brake pedal pressed down,
shift the selector lever to the “P” position.

CAUTION
Never attempt to move the selector
lever into “P” position under any circumstances while the vehicle is moving. Serious mechanical damage and
loss of vehicle control may result.

and down between fourth gear and overdrive when climbing a gentle slope,
the overdrive should be turned off. Be
sure to turn the switch on immediately
afterward.

D When towing a trailer, in order to main-

tain engine braking efficiency, do not
use overdrive.

CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake
pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle
from creeping.

NOTICE
Always use the brake pedal or the
parking brake to hold the vehicle on
an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold
the vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause the transmission
to overheat.

186

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Manual transmission
Recommended shifting speeds

Maximum allowable speeds

The transmission is fully synchronized and
upshifting or downshifting is easy.

To get on a highway or to pass slower
traffic, maximum acceleration may be necessary. Make sure you observe the following maximum allowable speeds in each
gear:

For the best compromise between fuel
economy and vehicle performance, you
should upshift or downshift at the following
speeds:
1
2
3
4
5
The shift pattern is as shown above.
In case of driving your vehicle, the buzzer
will sound when you shift the gear into
“R” (reverse).
Press the clutch pedal down fully while
shifting, and then release it slowly. Do not
rest your foot on the pedal while driving,
because it will cause clutch trouble. Do
not use the clutch to hold the vehicle
when stopped on an uphill grade—use the
parking brake.

to
to
to
to
to

gear
2 or 2
3 or 3
4 or 4
5 or 5
6 or 6

to
to
to
to
to

1
2
3
4
5

km/h
24
40
64
72
80

(mph)
(15)
(25)
(40)
(45)
(50)

Downshift to the appropriate gear if acceleration is needed when you are cruising
below the above downshifting speeds.

gear
1
2
3
4

km/h
45
90
130
165

(mph)
(28)
(56)
(81)
(112)

NOTICE
Do not downshift if you are going
faster than the maximum allowable
speed for the next lower gear.

Upshifting too soon or downshifting too
late will cause lugging, and possibly pinging. Regularly revving the engine to maximum speed in each gear will cause excessive engine wear and high fuel
consumption.

187

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Four−wheel drive system—
(a) Front drive control
Good driving practice

D If it is difficult to shift into reverse, put

the transmission in neutral, release the
clutch pedal momentarily, and then try
again.

D When towing a trailer, in order to main-

tain engine braking efficiency, do not
use sixth gear.

CAUTION
Be careful when downshifting on a
slippery
surface.
Abrupt
shifting
could cause the vehicle to skid or
spin.

NOTICE
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before shifting into reverse.

Use the “2WD/4HI” and “4LO” switches
to select the following transfer modes.
1. “2WD” (high speed position, two−
wheel drive): “2WD/4HI” and “4LO”
switches left out
Use this for normal driving on dry,
hard−surfaced roads. This position
gives greater economy, the quietest
ride and least wear.
2. “4HI” (high speed position, four−
wheel drive): “2WD/4HI” switch pushed
in
The “4HI” (high speed four−wheel
drive) indicator light comes on when
the “4HI” mode is selected.
Use this for normal driving on wet, icy
or snow−covered roads. This position
provides greater traction than two−
wheel drive.
In this mode, the vehicle stability control system is off. (See “Vehicle stability control system” in this Section.)

188

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

(b) A.D.D.
(automatic disconnecting
differential)
3. “4LO” (low speed position, four−
wheel drive): With the “2WD/4HI”
switch pressed in, push the “4LO”
switch
The “4LO” (low speed four−wheel drive)
indicator light comes on when the
“4LO” mode is selected.
Use this for maximum power and traction. Use “4LO” mode for climbing or
descending steep hills, off−road driving,
and hard pulling in sand, mud or deep
snow.
In this mode, the vehicle stability control system is off. (See “Vehicle stability control system” in this Section.)
See “(c) Shifting procedure” for further
instructions.

The A.D.D. can be engaged or disengaged by the shifting operations described in “(c) Shifting procedure”.
You should drive in four−wheel drive for
at least 16 km (10 miles) each month.
This will assure that the front drive components are lubricated.

(c) Shifting procedure
SHIFTING BETWEEN “2WD” AND “4HI”
To shift from “2WD” to “4HI”, reduce
the vehicle speed to less than 100 km/h
(62 mph) and push in the “2WD/4HI”
switch.
If the “4HI” (high speed four−wheel drive)
indicator light flashes when you push in
the “2WD/4HI” switch, this reminds you
that the transfer mode is not securely in
“4HI” mode. Drive straight ahead while
accelerating or decelerating.
If the “4HI” (high speed four−wheel drive)
indicator light flashes and the buzzer
sounds when you push in the “2WD/4HI”
switch, this reminds you that the transfer
mode is not in “4HI” mode. Reduce the
vehicle speed to less than 100 km/h (62
mph). Push the switch to turn it off, then
once again to turn it back on.

CAUTION
Never push the “2WD/4HI” switch if
the wheels are slipping. Stop the slipping or spinning before shifting.

189

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

To shift from “4HI” to “2WD”, push the
“2WD/4HI” switch again to turn it off.
This can be done at any speed.
If the “4HI” (high speed four−wheel drive)
indicator light flashes when you push the
“2WD/4HI” switch again to return to “2WD”
mode, this reminds you that the transfer
mode is not securely in “2WD” mode.
Drive straight ahead while accelerating or
decelerating, or drive forward or backward
in a short distance.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “4HI” AND “4LO”

SHIFTING BETWEEN “2WD” AND “4LO”

To shift from “4HI” to “4LO”, stop the
vehicle and put the transmission into “N”.
With the brake pedal depressed, push the
“4LO” switch. If the “2WD/4HI” switch left
out, push in the “2WD/4HI” switch to select the “4HI” mode.

To shift from “2WD” to “4LO”, stop the
vehicle and put the transmission into “N”.
With the brake pedal depressed, push the
“2WD/4HI” switch in to select the “4HI”
mode, then push the “4LO” switch.

If the “4LO” (low speed four−wheel drive)
indicator light flashes and the buzzer
sounds for three times when you push the
“4LO” switch, this reminds you that the
transfer mode is not in “4LO” mode. Drive
forward or backward in a short distance,
then stop the vehicle completely, put the
transmission securely into “N” and push
the switch again.
To shift from “4LO” to “4HI”, stop the
vehicle and put the transmission into “N”.
With the brake pedal depressed, push the
“4LO” switch.

If the “4LO” (low speed four−wheel drive)
indicator light flashes and the buzzer
sounds for three times when you push the
“4LO” switch, this reminds you that the
transfer mode is not in “4LO” mode. Drive
forward or backward in a short distance,
then stop the vehicle completely, put the
transmission securely into “N” and push
the switch again.
To shift from “4LO” to “2WD”, stop the
vehicle and put the transmission into “N”.
With the brake pedal depressed, push the
“2WD/4HI” switch again to turn it off.

190

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Traction control system
If the “4LO” (low speed four−wheel drive)
indicator light flashes and the buzzer
sounds when you push the “2WD/4HI”
switch, this reminds you that the transfer
mode is not in “2WD” mode. Push the
“2WD/4HI” switch in to return to “4LO”
mode, drive forward or backward in a
short distance, then stop the vehicle completely, put the transmission securely into
“N” and push the “2WD/4HI” switch once
again.

The traction control system automatically helps prevent the spinning of rear
wheels (two−wheel drive models) or 4
wheels (four−wheel drive models) when
the vehicle is started or accelerated on
slippery road surfaces.

If the “4LO” (low speed four−wheel drive)
indicator light flashes when you push the
“2WD/4HI” switch, this reminds you that
the transfer mode is not in “2WD” mode.
Drive straight ahead while accelerating or
decelerating, or drive forward or backward
in a short distance.

Under certain slippery road conditions, full traction of the vehicle and
power to the rear wheels (two−wheel
drive models) or 4 wheels (four−wheel
drive models) cannot be maintained,
even though the traction control system is in operation. Do not drive the
vehicle under any speed or maneuvering conditions which may cause the
vehicle to lose traction control. In situations where the road surface is
covered with ice or snow, your vehicle should be fitted with snow tires
or tire chains. Always drive at an appropriate and cautious speed for the
present road conditions.

When the ignition key is turned to “ON”,
the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION

Without tachometer

With tachometer

191

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Leave the system on during the ordinary driving so that it can operate
when needed.
You may hear a sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the traction control system is in the self−check
mode, but does not indicate a malfunction.
When the traction control system is operating, the following conditions occur:

D The system controls the spinning of the
rear wheels (two−wheel drive models)
or 4 wheels (four−wheel drive models).
At this time, the slip indicator light
blinks.

D You may feel vibration or noise in your

vehicle, caused by operation of the
brakes. This indicates the system is
functioning properly.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few
seconds when the ignition key is turned
to “ON”. If the indicator light does not
come on when the ignition is turned on,
contact your Toyota dealer.

Without tachometer

At the time, the slip indicator light will
come on and the traction control system
temporarily stops operating in order to
protect the brake actuator. (Although the
traction control system does not operate,
it is no problem to continue driving.) The
system will be automatically restored after
a short time and the slip indicator light
goes off.

With tachometer

192

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

“AUTO LSD” system
“VSC TRAC” warning light
This light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the following.

D Traction control system
D Vehicle stability control system
D “AUTO LSD” system
When the system is normal and the ignition key is turned to “ON”, the light will
come on and will go off after a few seconds.
It is not a malfunction that the warning
light may stay on for 60 seconds after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the light. It is normal if it
goes out after a few seconds.
If the “VSC TRAC” warning light and slip
indicator light comes on while driving, the
traction control system does not work.
However, as the brakes operate normally
when applied, it is no problem to continue
your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

D The warning light does not come on
after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

D The warning light remains on after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.

D The warning light comes on while driving.

The “AUTO LSD” system aids traction
by using the traction control system to
control engine performance and braking
when one of the rear wheels begins to
spin.
This system is used only when wheel
spinning occurs in a ditch or rough
surface.
This system is effective in case one of
the rear wheels is spinning.

193

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

If the engine is turned off while the
“AUTO LSD” indicator light is on and then
restarted, the indicator light will turn off
automatically.

NOTICE
Do not use the “AUTO LSD” system
in conditions other than the above. A
much greater steering effort and more
careful cornering control will be required.

To activate the system, push the “AUTO
LSD” switch with the vehicle stopped.
The “AUTO LSD” is activated under the
following condition. At this time, the
“AUTO LSD” indicator light will come
on.

D The driving mode is set in the two−
wheel drive mode (in the four−wheel
drive mode, the system does not
work.)

D Driving at a speed under 100 km/h (62
mph)

To cancel the system, push the “AUTO
LSD” switch once again.

194

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Make sure the “AUTO LSD” indicator light
comes on under the above condition when
you use the “AUTO LSD” system.
The slip indicator light blinks when the
system is controlling the spinning of the
rear wheels.
The “AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights
come on for a few seconds when the
ignition key is turned to “ON”. If the indicator lights does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to “ON”, contact
your Toyota dealer.
Without tachometer

The brake actuator temperature increases
during the traction control system, vehicle
stability control system or “AUTO LSD”
system operating. If the brake actuator
temperature becomes too high while any
of the systems is operating, a buzzer will
start to sound intermittently to indicate
that the “AUTO LSD” system can no longer operate. In this case, immediately stop
your vehicle at a safe place.
If the system continues to operate, the
buzzer sound changes from intermittent to
continuous.
(The
continuous
buzzer
sounds for about 3 seconds.)
At the time the slip indicator light will
come on and the “AUTO LSD” system
temporarily stops operating in order to
protect the brake actuator. (Although the
“AUTO LSD” system does not operate, it
is no problem to continue driving.) The
system will be automatically restored after
a short time and the slip indicator light
goes off.

With tachometer

195

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

“VSC TRAC” warning light
This light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the following.

D “AUTO LSD” system
D Traction control system
D Vehicle stability control system
When the system is normal and the ignition key is turned to “ON”, the light will
come on and will go off after a few seconds.
Without tachometer

It is not a malfunction that the warning
light may stay on for 60 seconds after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

D The warning light does not come on
after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

D The warning light remains on after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.

D The warning light comes on while driving.

NOTICE
Do not drive with the “AUTO LSD”
switch continuously turned on.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the light. It is normal if it
goes out after a few seconds.
If the “VSC TRAC” warning light and slip
indicator light comes on while driving, the
“AUTO LSD” system does not work. However, as the brakes operate normally when
applied, it is no problem to continue your
driving.

With tachometer

196

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Vehicle stability control
system
The vehicle stability control system
helps provide integrated control of the
systems such as anti−lock brake system, traction control, engine control,
etc. This system automatically controls
the output of the brakes or engine to
help prevent the vehicle from skidding
when cornering on a slippery road surface or operating steering wheel abruptly.
The vehicle stability control activates
when the vehicle speed is more than 15
km/h (9 mph).
You may hear a sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the system is in the self−check mode, but does
not indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

D Do not rely excessively on the ve-

hicle stability control system. Even
if the vehicle stability control system is operating, you must always
drive carefully and attentively to
avoid serious injury. Reckless driving will result in an unexpected accident. If the slip indicator light
blinks and an alarm sounds, special
care should be taken while driving.

D Only use tires of specified size. The

size, manufacturer, brand and tread
pattern for all 4 tires should be the
same. If you use the tires other
than specified, or different type or
size, the vehicle stability control
system may not function correctly.
When replacing the tires or wheels,
contact your Toyota dealer. (See
“Checking and replacing tires” in
Section 7−2.)

Without tachometer

With tachometer

197

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, the slip indicator light blinks and an
alarm sounds intermittently. Special care
should be taken while driving.
If the brake pedal is depressed while the
vehicle stability control system is active,
the brake pedal will become hard at an
earlier position than usual. However, the
brakes will respond to the pedal force if
depressed further.
The slip indicator light comes on for a few
seconds when the ignition key is turned
to “ON”. If the indicator light does not
come on when the ignition is turned on,
contact your Toyota dealer.

Four−wheel drive models only—
Shifting the driving mode into the four−
wheel drive mode automatically turns
the vehicle stability control system off.
At this time, the “VSC OFF” indicator
comes on.
“VSC OFF” indicator light comes on for a
few seconds when the ignition key is
turned to “ON”. It will come on again
when you shift the driving mode into the
four−wheel drive mode.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

D The indicator light does not come on
when the ignition key is
“ON”.

turned to

D The indicator light remains on after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.

D The indicator light comes on when the
system is on while driving.

198

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

“VSC TRAC” warning light
This light warns that when there is a
problem somewhere in the following.

D Vehicle stability control system
D Traction control system
D “AUTO LSD” system
The light will come on when the ignition
key is turned to “ON”, and will go off after
about a few seconds.

Without tachometer

The light may come on for 60 seconds
after the ignition key is turned to “ON”. It
is normal if they go out after a while.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

D The warning light does not come on
after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

D The warning light remains on after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.

D The warning light comes on while driving.

The “VSC OFF” indicator light will come
on when the “VSC TRAC” warning light
comes on even if the “2WD/4HI” or “4LO”
switch is not pushed.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the light. It is normal if they
go out after a few seconds.
If the light comes on while driving, the
vehicle stability control system does not
work. However, as the brakes operate normally when applied, it is no problem to
continue your driving.

With tachometer

199

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Tire pressure warning
system—
The tire pressure warning system is designed to provide warning when tire
inflation pressure of one or more of
your tires (including the spare tire) is
low. The low tire pressure warning light
comes on to inform you that low tire
inflation pressure may hamper driving.

LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT
This light comes on when the ignition key
is turned to the “ON” position. It goes off
after a few seconds. This indicates that
the tire pressure warning system is functioning properly.
If the low tire pressure warning light
comes on or blinks, do the following.
If the warning light comes on:

Without tachometer

Stop your vehicle in a safe place as
soon as possible and check that the
inflation pressure of all tires (including
the spare tire) is as specified on the
tire and loading information label. (See
“Checking tire inflation pressure” in
Section 7−2.) If the warning light comes
on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, you may have a flat tire. If
you have a flat tire, replace it with the
spare tire. For details, see “If you have
a flat tire” in Section 4.
The warning light goes off a few minutes
after air is put into the deflated tire.

With tachometer

This warning light may turn on due to
natural causes such as natural air leaks
or tire pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire
pressure will turn off the warning light.

200

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION
When the tire pressure warning light
comes on, observe the following instructions:

D Depending on the conditions, re-

duce to an appropriate speed as
soon as possible.

D Adjust the tire pressure to the specified level as soon as possible.

D Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneu-

vering and braking. Tire deterioration may reduce steering wheel control and brake effectiveness. This
may lead to serious injury or death.

D The tire pressure warning system
may not activate immediately if sudden bursts of air leakage occur.

NOTICE
z Do not use liquid sealants for a flat
tire as air pressure sensors will be
damaged.
z When the tires must be repaired or
replaced, have them repaired or replaced by the nearest Toyota dealer
or authorized tire dealer. The tire
pressure sensors will be affected by
the installation or removal of tires.
z The tire pressure warning system is
not to be used as a substitute for
regular inspections. Be sure to
check the air pressure in the tires
on a regular basis.
z When the tires must be replaced,
replace the grommets for air pressure sensors as well.

If the warning light blinks:
The tire pressure warning system may
be malfunctioning. Contact your Toyota
dealer.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
The tire pressure warning system does
not function properly under certain circumstances. In the following cases, the
low tire pressure warning light may not
come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when
the tire inflation pressure is actually
normal.

D Electric devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby.

D A radio set to similar frequencies is in
use.

D A lot of snow or ice covers the vehicle, in particular, around the wheels
or wheel housings.

D The tires are not equipped with an air
pressure sensor.

D
D
D
D

Snow tires or tire chains are used.
Non−genuine Toyota wheels are used.
The sensor battery is expired.
Radio waves from the air pressure sensor installed on the spare tire cannot
be received.

201

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION

D The use of non−genuine wheels will

When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning light is lit, one or
more of your tires is significantly under−inflated. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire
information placard. Driving on a significantly under−inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under−inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each tire,
including
the spare,
should be
checked monthly when cold and set
to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and owner’s manual.

cause the air pressure sensors to
transmit the electronic code in different manner, resulting in the system failure.

D The use of different type of tires
with genuine wheels may also
cause the malfunction of the system.

202

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:

D Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

D Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.

D Connect the equipment into an outlet

on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.

D Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.

203

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Replacing tires and wheels
When replacing the wheels, be sure to
install air pressure sensors on the
wheels.

To initialize the system, perform the following:
1. Park the vehicle at a safe place and
apply the parking brake. Stop the engine.

There are 3 ways to set up the air pressure sensors:
a. Remove the sensor from the old wheel
and install it to the new wheel.

2. Adjust the pressure of all the installed
tires to the specified level. (See “Tires”
in Section 8.)

b. Keep the same wheel with air pressure
sensor and replace only the tire.

3. Turn the ignition key to “ON”.

c. Use a new wheel and sensor. In this
case, you have to register an ID code
for a new sensor.

CAUTION
Have the tires,
placed and ID
Toyota dealer.
purchase from

wheels or sensors recodes registered by a
If you need sensors,
a Toyota dealer.

4. Push and hold the reset switch until
the low tire pressure warning light
blinks three times.
TIRE PRESSURE
RESET SWITCH

WARNING

SYSTEM

Initialization is completed over for more
than 20 minute.

The tire pressure warning system need
to be initialized in the following conditions:

D After replacing or rotating tires or
wheels

D After replacing an air pressure sensor.

When initializing the system, the present tire condition is stored as a standard.

204

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Parking brake
When initializing the system, make sure
the low tire pressure warning light blinks
three times. If the warning light does not
blink three times, initialization failed and
the tire pressure warning system will not
function properly. In this case, initialize
the system again.

Without tachometer

Do not push the reset switch without adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the
specified level. Otherwise, the low tire
pressure warning light may not come on
even if the tire pressure is low, or it may
come on when the tire inflation pressure
is actually normal.

Pedal type

If you push the reset switch while the
vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.
If the low tire pressure warning light does
not blink when you push and hold the
reset switch, have the low pressure warning system checked at your Toyota dealer.

With tachometer

Lever type

205

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Cruise control
When parking, firmly apply the parking
brake to avoid inadvertent creeping.
Pedal type—
To set: Fully depress the parking brake
pedal. For better holding power, first depress the brake pedal and hold it while
setting the parking brake.
To release: Depress the parking brake
pedal once again.
Lever type—
To set: Pull out on the lever. For better
holding power, first depress the brake
pedal and hold it while setting the parking
brake.
To release: Press the lock release button
(1), turn the lever (2), then push it in (3).
To remind you that the parking brake is
set, the parking brake reminder light in
the instrument panel remains on until you
release the parking brake.

CAUTION
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the parking brake reminder light is off.

The cruise control allows you to cruise
the vehicle at a desired speed over 40
km/h (25 mph) even with your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Your cruising speed can be maintained up
or down grades within the limits of engine
performance, although a slight speed
change may occur when driving up or
down the grades. On steeper hills, a
greater speed change will occur so it is
better to drive without the cruise control.

CAUTION

D To help maintain maximum control

of your vehicle, do not use the
cruise control when driving in
heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) or
winding roads.

D Avoid vehicle speed increases when

driving downhill. If the vehicle
speed is too fast in relation to the
cruise control set speed, cancel the
cruise control then downshift the
transmission to use engine braking
to slow down.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON
To operate the cruise control, press the
“ON−OFF” button. This turns the system
on. The indicator light in the instrument
panel shows that you can now set the
vehicle at a desired cruising speed. Another press will turn the system completely
off.

CAUTION
To avoid accidental cruise control engagement, keep the “ON−OFF” button
off when not using the cruise control.

206

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

If you need acceleration—for example,
when passing—depress the accelerator
pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed
the set speed. When you release it, the
vehicle will return to the speed set prior
to the acceleration.

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED

However, a faster way to reset is to accelerate the vehicle and then push the
lever down in the “− SET” direction.

You can cancel the preset speed by:
a. Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL”
direction and releasing it
b. Depressing the brake pedal
c. Pushing the “ON−OFF” button.
SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEED
The transmission must be in “D” before
you set the cruise control speed.
Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,
push the lever down in the “− SET” direction and release it. This sets the vehicle
at that speed. If the speed is not satisfactory, tap the lever up for a faster speed,
or tap it down for a slower speed. Each
tap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h
(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot off
the accelerator pedal.

Push the lever up in the “+ RES” direction
and hold it. Release the lever when the
desired speed is attained. While the lever
is held up, the vehicle will gradually gain
speed.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

If the vehicle speed falls below about 40
km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will automatically cancel out.

Push the lever down in the “− SET” direction and hold it. Release the lever when
the desired speed is attained. While the
lever is held down, the vehicle speed will
gradually decrease.

If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10
mph) below the preset speed, the preset
speed will also automatically cancel out.

However, a faster way to reset is to depress the brake pedal and then push the
lever down in the “− SET” direction.

If the preset speed automatically cancels
out other than for the above cases, have
your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer at the earliest opportunity.

Even if you turn off the overdrive switch
with the cruise control on, engine braking
will not be applied because the cruise
control is not cancelled. To decrease the
vehicle speed, reset to a slower speed
with the cruise control lever or depress
the brake pedal. If you use the brake
pedal, cruise control is cancelled.

207

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED
If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling
the control lever or by depressing the
brake pedal, pushing the lever up in the
“+ RES” direction will restore the speed
set prior to cancellation.
CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING
If the “CRUISE” indicator light in the
instrument cluster flashes when using the
cruise control, press the “ON−OFF” button
to turn the system off and then press it
again to turn it on.
If any of the following conditions then occurs, there is some trouble in the cruise
control system.

D The indicator light does not come on.
D The indicator light flashes again.
D The indicator light goes out after it
comes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyota
dealer and have your vehicle inspected.

208

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SECTION

1− 8

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Audio system

Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using your audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seat audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seat entertainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio/video system operating hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

210
211
232
234
243
291

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to the
separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

209

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Reference

Type 1: AM·FM radio/compact disc player
(with compact disc changer controller)

Type 2: AM·FM radio/cassette player/compact disc player (with compact disc
changer controller)

Type 3: AM·FM radio/cassette player/compact disc player with changer

210

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Using your audio system—
—Some basics
This section describes some of the basic
features on Toyota audio systems. Some
information may not pertain to your system.

TONE AND BALANCE

YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER
When you insert a cassette, the exposed
tape should face to the right.

Your audio system works when the ignition
key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

For details about your system’s tone and
balance controls, see the description of
your own system.
Tone

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
on and off.
Push “AM”, “FM”, “FM1”, “FM2”, “TAPE”,
“DISC” or “LOAD” to turn on that function
without pushing “PWR·VOL”. To turn on
the cassette or compact disc player, a
cassette or compact disc must be loaded
in the player.
You can turn on each player by inserting
a cassette tape or compact disc.
You can turn off each player by ejecting
the cassette tape or compact disc. If the
audio system was previously off, then the
entire audio system will be turned off
when you eject the cassette tape or compact disc. If another function was previously playing, it will come on again.

How good an audio program sounds to
you is largely determined by the mix of
the treble, midrange, and bass levels. In
fact, different kinds of music and vocal
programs usually sound better with different mixes of treble, midrange and bass.
Balance
A good balance of the left and right stereo
channels and of the front and rear sound
levels is also important.
Keep in mind that if you are listening to
a stereo recording or broadcast, changing
the right/left balance will increase the volume of one group of sounds while decreasing the volume of another.
YOUR RADIO ANTENNA
To remove an antenna, carefully turn it
counterclockwise.

NOTICE
Do not oil any part of the player and
do not insert anything other than cassette tapes into the slot, or the tape
player may be damaged.
YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER
(type 1 and type 2)
When you insert a disc, gently push it in
with the label side up. (The player will
automatically eject a disc if the label side
is down.) The player will play from track
1 through the end of the disc. Then it will
play from track 1 again.

NOTICE
Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the compact disc player. Do
not insert anything other than compact discs into the slot.

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS
Push “AM”, “FM”, “FM1”, “FM2”, “TAPE”,
“DISC” or “LOAD” if the system is already
on but you want to switch from one function to another.

211

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

8 cm (3 in.) compact disc singles
Type 1—
Your compact disc player does not need
an adaptor to play compact disc singles.
Compact disc singles are about 8 cm (3
in.) in diameter−smaller than standard
discs.
After you eject a compact disc single, do
not insert a standard 12 cm (4.7 in.) disc
until “DISC” disappears from the display.

NOTICE
Do not use an adaptor for compact
disc singles—it could cause tracking
errors or interfere with the ejection of
compact discs.
Type 2—
The player is intended for use with 12 cm
(4.7 in.) discs only.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITH
CHANGER (type 3)
When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”
button and gently push the disc in with
the label side up. (The player will automatically eject a disc if the label side is
down.) This compact disc player can store
up to six discs. The player will play from
track 1 through the end of the disc. Then
it will play from track 1 of the next disc.
The player is intended for use with 12 cm
(4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE
z Do not stack up two discs for insertion, or it will cause damage to
the compact disc changer. Insert
only one compact disc into slot at
a time.
z Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the compact disc player. Do
not insert anything other than compact discs into the slot.

212

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Controls and features
"Type 1
Details of specific buttons, controls and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.

213

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)
These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio stations.
To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station. (See “TUNE” or
“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the
button until you hear a beep—this will set
the station to the button. The button number will appear on the display.
To recall a preset station: Push the button
for the station you want. The button number and station frequency will appear on
the display.
These systems can store one AM and two
FM stations for each button. (The display
will show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you
push “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” button.)
(Eject button)
Push the compact disc eject button to
eject a compact disc.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)
Push and hold “
” (preset button 6) or
“
” (preset button 5) to fast forward or
reverse within a compact disc. When you
release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.
AM
Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio
and select the AM band. “AM” will appear
on the display.
AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound balance adjustment function)
Each
time
you push
the “AUDIO
CONTROL” knob, the mode changes. To
adjust the tone and balance, turn the
knob.
BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between
the front and rear speakers. The display
ranges from F7 to R7.
BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between
the right and left speakers. The display
ranges from L7 to R7.

DISC (Compact disc)
Push the “DISC” button to play a compact
disc.
When the audio system is set into compact disc operation, the display shows the
track, or track and disc number currently
being played.
Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system—
The “DISC” button may also be used to
operate a DVD player when a disc is
loaded in the DVD player. Pressing the
“DISC” button changes between the CD
player and DVD player. When the DVD
player is in operation, “AUX” appears on
the display.
Error messages
If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display one of the following error
messages.
“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool
down.
“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damaged or inserted incorrectly (up−side
down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.
“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of
separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

214

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside
the system. Eject the disc or magazine.
Set the disc or magazine again.
“ERROR 4”: Over−current.
Toyota dealer to inspect.

Ask

your

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer
lid of separate unit is open. Close the
compact disc changer lid.
If the malfunction still exists, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
Ɲ DISC Ɯ
With compact disc changer only—
Use these buttons to select a disc you
want to listen to.
Push “Ɲ” (preset button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset
button 4) until the number of the disc you
want to listen appears on the display.
FM1 FM2
Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn on
the radio and select the FM band. “FM1”
or “FM2” will appear on the display. This
system allows you to set twelve FM stations, two for each of the preset button.

RAND (Random)

RPT (Repeat)

There are two random features—you can
either listen to the tracks on one compact
disc in random order, or listen to the
tracks on all the compact discs in the
magazine in random order.

There are two repeat features—you can
either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.

To play the tracks on one disc in random
order:
Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset
button 1). “
” will appear on the
display and the player will perform the
tracks on the disc you are listening to in
random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.
With compact disc changer only—
To play all the tracks in the magazine in
random order:
Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)
until you hear a beep. “
” will appear on the display and the player will
perform all the tracks on all the discs in
the magazine in random order. To turn off
the random feature, push this button
again.

Repeating a track:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
button 2) while the track is playing.
“
” will appear on the display. When
the track ends, it will automatically replay.
To turn off the repeat feature, push this
button again.
With compact disc changer only—
Repeating a disc:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
until you hear a beep. “
” will appear on the display. The player will repeat
all the tracks on the disc you are listening
to. When the disc ends, the player will
automatically go back to the first track on
the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat
feature, push this button again.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the
volume.

215

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SCAN

Compact disc player

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

There are two scan features—you can either scan the tracks on a specific disc or
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the
magazine.

Radio

Scanning the tracks on a disc:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” button. “SCAN” will appear on the display
and the player will scan all the tracks on
the disc you are listening to. To stop
scanning, push this button again. If the
player scanned all the tracks on the disc,
it will stop scanning.

To seek the next station, quickly push and
release “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” button. Do this again to find the
station after that.

With compact disc changer only—

You can either scan all the frequencies on
a band or scan only the preset stations
for that band.
To scan the preset stations:
Push and hold the “SCAN” button until
you hear a beep. The radio will tune in
the next preset station up the band, stay
there for 5 seconds, and then move to the
next preset station. To stop scanning,
push this button again.
To scan all the frequencies:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” button. The radio will find the next station up
the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,
and then scan again to the next station.
To stop scanning, push this button again.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs
in the magazine:
Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a
beep. “ ·SCAN” will appear on the display and the player will scan the first
track of the next disc. To stop scanning,
push this button again. If the player has
scanned all the discs, it will stop scanning.

In the seek mode, the radio finds and
plays the next station up or down the
station band.

Compact disc player
Use this button to skip up or down to a
different track.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system—
While the DVD player is in operation, the
chapter or track can be changed by pushing the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” button.

216

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

ST (Stereo reception) display

TUNE (Tuning)

Your radio automatically changes to stereo
reception when a stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If the
signal becomes weak, the radio reduces
the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise.
If the signal becomes extremely weak, the
radio switches from stereo to mono reception.

Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to step
up the frequency. Turn the knob counterclockwise to step down the frequency.

TEXT
This button is used to change the display
for the compact disc that contains text
data.
To change the display, quickly push and
release the “TEXT” button while the compact disc is playing. The display changes
in the order from the elapsed time to disc
title to track title, then back to the
elapsed time.
If this button is pushed while a compact
disc that does not contain text data is
playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the
display.
If the entire disc or track title does not
appear on the display, push and hold the
button until you hear a beep. The rest of
the title will appear.

217

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

"Type 2
Details of specific buttons, controls and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.

218

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)
These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio stations.
To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station. (See “TUNE” or
“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the
button until you hear a beep—this will set
the station to the button. The button number will appear on the display.
To recall a preset station: Push the button
for the station you want. The button number and station frequency will appear on
the display.
These systems can store one AM and two
FM stations for each button. (The display
will show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you
push “AM” or “FM” button.)
(Eject button)
Push the cassette tape eject button to
eject a cassette. Push the compact disc
eject button to eject a compact disc.

(Program)

Compact disc player

Push “
” (preset button 4) to select
the other side of a cassette tape. The
display indicates which side is currently
selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”
indicates the bottom side).

Push and hold “
” (preset button 6) or
“
” (preset button 5) to fast forward or
reverse within a compact disc. When you
release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.

Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette
player reaches the end of a tape side, it
automatically reverses and begins to play
the other side. This is true whether the
cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio
and select the AM band. “AM” will appear
on the display.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)
Cassette player
” (preset button 6) to fast−forPush “
ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on
the display. Push “
” (preset button 5)
to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear on
the display.
To stop the tape while it is fast−forwarding, push “
” or “TAPE” button. To stop
the tape while it is rewinding, push “
”
or “TAPE” button.
If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette
player will stop and then play that same
side. If a tape fast−forwards completely,
the cassette will play the other side of the
tape using the auto−reverse feature.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound balance adjustment function)
Each
time
you push
the “AUDIO
CONTROL” knob, the mode changes. To
adjust the tone and balance, turn the
knob.
BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
MID (access cab models): Adjusts mid−
pitched tones. The display ranges from −5
to 5.
TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between
the front and rear speakers. The display
ranges from F7 to R7.

219

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between
the right and left speakers. The display
ranges from L7 to R7.
DISC (Compact disc)
Push the “DISC” button to play a compact
disc.
When the audio system is set into compact disc operation, the display shows the
track, or track and disc number currently
being played.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of
separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.
“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside
the system. Eject the disc or magazine.
Set the disc or magazine again.
“ERROR 4”: Over−current.
Toyota dealer to inspect.

Ask

your

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer
lid of separate unit is open. Close the
compact disc changer lid.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system—

If the malfunction still exists, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

The “DISC” button may also be used to
operate a DVD player when a disc is
loaded in the DVD player. Pressing the
“DISC” button changes between the CD
player and DVD player. When the DVD
player is in operation, “AUX” appears on
the display.

Ɲ DISC Ɯ

Error messages
If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display one of the six following
error messages.
“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool
down.

With compact disc changer only—
Use these buttons to select the disc you
want to listen to.
Push “Ɲ” (preset button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset
button 4) until the number of the disc you
want to listen appears on the display.

Dolbyr

B NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that was
recorded with Dolbyr B Noise Reduction,
” will
push “ ” (preset button 3). “
appear on the display. Push the button
again to turn off Dolbyr B NR.
The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise
by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduction, play your tapes with this button on
or off according to the mode used to record the tape.
∗

: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the
double D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.

FM
Push the “FM” button to turn on the radio
and select the FM band. “FM1” or “FM2”
will appear on the display. This system
allows you to set twelve FM stations, two
for each of the preset button.
PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the
volume.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damaged or inserted incorrectly (up−side
down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

220

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

RAND (Random)

RPT (Repeat)

With compact disc changer only—

There are two random features—you can
either listen to the tracks on one compact
disc in random order, or listen to the
tracks on all the compact discs in the
magazine in random order.

Cassette player

SCAN

Compact disc player

Radio

There are two repeat features—you can
either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.

You can either scan all the frequencies on
a band or scan only the preset stations
for that band.

To scan the preset stations:
Push and hold the “SCAN” button until
you hear a beep. The radio will tune in
the next preset station up the band, stay
there for 5 seconds, and then move to the
next preset station. To stop scanning,
push this button again.
To scan all the frequencies:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” button. The radio will find the next station up
the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,
and then scan again to the next station.
To stop scanning, push this button again.

221

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Compact disc player

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can either scan the tracks on a specific disc or
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the
magazine.

Radio

Use this button to skip up or down to a
different track.

To seek the next station, quickly push and
release “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” button. Do this again to find the
station after that.

With compact disc changer only—

You can select up to nine recordings (including current one).

In the seek mode, the radio finds and
plays the next station up or down the
station band.

Cassette Player
Use this button to skip up or down to
locate a song or recording.

A blank space of at least 3 seconds is
considered to be a start of a recording.
When the beginning of a tape is reached,
the player automatically resumes play.
When the end of the tape is reached, the
player automatically reverses sides and
resumes normal play.
In addition, the feature may not work well
with some spoken word, live, or classical
recordings.

Push “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” button until the number of the
track you want to listen to appears on the
display. If you want to return to the beginning of the current track, quickly push the
down side of the button one time.
Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system—
While the DVD player is in operation, the
chapter or track can be changed by pushing the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” button.
ST (Stereo reception) display
Your radio automatically changes to stereo
reception when a stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If the
signal becomes weak, the radio reduces
the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise.
If the signal becomes extremely weak, the
radio switches from stereo to mono reception.
TAPE
Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassette
tape.

222

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

223

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

"Type 3
Details of specific buttons, controls and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.

224

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)
These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio stations.
To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station. (See “TUNE” or
“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the
button until you hear a beep—this will set
the station to the button. The preset button number will appear on the display.
RDS stations will be preset to the buttons
when you turn on the RDS. (See “RDS”
button.)
To recall a preset station: Push the button
for the station you want. The preset button number and station frequency will appear on the display.
This radio can store one AM, two FM and
RDS stations for each button. (The display
will show “AM”, “FM1”, “FM2” or “FM
TYPE” when you push “AM” or “FM” button.)

(Eject button)
Cassette player
This button is used to eject a cassette.
Compact disc player
This button is used to eject one or all
compact discs.
To eject the current compact disc, push
and release the compact disc eject button.
To eject a specific disc, push “Ɲ” (preset
button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset button 4) until the
number of the disc you want to eject is
displayed. Push and release the eject button.
To eject all discs at a time, press and
hold the eject button until you hear a
beep. The last compact disc played before
pushing the button will be ejected first. If
the ejected disc is not removed for a long
time, the eject function will be cancelled.

(Program)
Push “
” (preset button 4) to select
the other side of a cassette tape. The
display indicates which side is currently
selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”
indicates the bottom side).
Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette
player reaches the end of a tape side, it
automatically reverses and begins to play
the other side. This is true whether the
cassette was playing or fast forwarding.
(Reverse/Fast−forward button)
Cassette player
” (preset button 6) to fast−forPush “
ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on
the display. Push “
” (preset button 5)
to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear on
the display.
To stop the tape while it is fast−forwarding, push “
” or “TAPE” button. To stop
the tape while it is rewinding, push “
”
or “TAPE” button.
If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette
player will stop and then play that same
side. If a tape fast−forwards completely,
the cassette will play the other side of the
tape using the auto−reverse feature.

225

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Compact disc player
Push and hold “
” (preset button 6) or
“
” (preset button 5) to fast forward or
reverse within a compact disc. When you
release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.
AM
Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio
and select the AM band. “AM” will appear
on the display.
AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound balance adjustment function)
Each
time
you push
the “AUDIO
CONTROL” knob, the mode changes. To
adjust the tone and balance, turn the
knob.
BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
MID: Adjusts mid−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.

Ask

your

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer
lid of separate unit is open. Close the
compact disc changer lid.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system—

If the malfunction still exists, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Ɲ DISC Ɯ
Use these buttons to select a disc you
want to listen to.
Push “Ɲ” (preset button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset
button 4) until the number of the disc you
want to listen appears on the display.

Error messages

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.

If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display one of the six following
error messages.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between
the front and rear speakers. The display
ranges from F7 to R7.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool
down.
“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damaged or inserted incorrectly (up−side
down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

226

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Dolbyr

B NR∗

Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the
double D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.

FM
Push the “FM” button to turn on the radio
and select the FM band. “FM1”, “FM2” or
“FM TYPE” will appear on the display.
This system allows you to set twelve FM
and six RDS stations, three for each of
the preset button. If the RDS is off or
RDS stations are not preset to the preset
buttons, “FM TYPE” will not appear on the
display.

LOAD

RAND (Random)

This button is used to load the compact
discs in the compact disc player. This
player can store up to six discs.

There are two random features—you can
either listen to the tracks on one compact
disc in random order, or listen to the
tracks on all the compact discs in the
magazine in random order.

To load one compact
push and release the
a compact disc. After
the shutter of the slot

disc only, quickly
button, then insert
the disc is loaded,
will close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter
will close after 15 seconds.
To load multiple compact discs, push and
hold the button (until you hear a beep
when the audio system is on), then insert
the first compact disc. After the disc is
loaded, the shutter of the slot will close.
After a few seconds, the shutter will automatically open again so the next disc can
be inserted. The same process can be
applied for loading the rest of the discs.
If the player is full of discs, “DISC FULL”
will appear on the display.
If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter
will close after 15 seconds.

To play the tracks on one disc in random
order:
Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset
button 1). “
” will appear on the
display and the player will perform the
tracks on the disc you are listening to in
random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.
To play all the tracks in the magazine in
random order:
Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)
until you hear a beep. “
” will appear on the display and the player will
perform all the tracks on all the discs in
the magazine in random order. To turn off
the random feature, push this button
again.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the
volume.

227

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

RDS (Radio Data System)

RPT (Repeat)

Your audio system is equipped with Radio
Data System (RDS). RDS station providing
good reception is automatically selected if
current reception worsens.

Cassette player

The “RDS” button turns the RDS on and
off. This button is operational except in
AM mode.
To turn on the RDS, push and hold this
button until you hear a beep and “RDS”
will appear on the display. At this time,
the radio starts to search the RDS stations and “RDS SEARCH” will flash on the
display.
Quickly push and release this button when
the RDS turns on, the radio starts to
search the RDS stations and “RDS
SEARCH” will flash on the display.
When the RDS stations are found,
“FOUND” and the number of the RDS stations will appear on the display, and you
will hear two beeps. The stations will be
preset to the preset buttons.
If the RDS stations can not be found, “NO
RDS ST” will appear on the display and
you will hear a beep, and the display
returns to the previous mode.

Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while the
track is playing. “
” will appear on
the display. When the track ends, it will
automatically rewind and replay. To turn
off the repeat feature, push this button
again.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank
space between tracks in order for the repeat feature to work correctly.
Compact disc player
There are two repeat features—you can
either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.
Repeating a track:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
button 2) while the track is playing.
“
” will appear on the display. When
the track ends, it will automatically replay.
To turn off the repeat feature, push this
button again.

Repeating a disc:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
until you hear a beep. “
” will appear on the display. The player will repeat
all the tracks on the disc you are listening
to. When the disc ends, the player will
automatically go back to the top track of
the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat
feature, push this button again.
SCAN
Radio
You can either scan all the frequencies on
a band or scan only the preset stations
for that band.
To scan the preset stations:
Push and hold the “SCAN” button until
you hear a beep. The radio will tune in
the next preset station up the band, stay
there for 5 seconds, and then move to the
next preset station. To stop scanning,
push this button again.
To scan all the frequencies:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” button. The radio will find the next station up
the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,
and then scan again to the next station.
To stop scanning, push this button again.

To turn the RDS off, push the button until
you hear a beep again.

228

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Compact disc player

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can either scan the tracks on a specific disc or
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the
magazine.

Radio

Use this button to skip up or down to a
different track.

To seek the next station, quickly push and
release “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” button. Do this again to find the
station after that.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs
in the magazine:
Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a
beep. “ ·SCAN” will appear on the display and the player will scan the first
track of the next disc. To stop scanning,
push this button again. If the auto changer
has scanned all the discs, it will stop
scanning.

You can select up to nine recordings (including current one).

In the seek mode, the radio finds and
plays the next station up or down the
station band.

Cassette Player
Use this button to skip up or down to
locate a song or recording.

A blank space of at least 3 seconds is
considered to be a start of a recording.
When beginning of a tape is reached, the
player automatically resumes play.
When the end of the tape is reached, the
player automatically reverses sides and
resumes normal play.
In addition, the feature may not work well
with some spoken word, live, or classical
recordings.

229

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

TEXT
Radio
This button is operational only in RDS
mode.
When an RDS radio station transmits a
text message, “TEXT” will be displayed. At
this time, push the “TEXT” button to view
the text message. The message display
will be canceled if any button that affects
the display is pushed. To view the message again, push this button again. After
the entire message has been displayed,
the message will disappear.
The RDS audio system has memory to
store three 64−character messages. To
store a message in memory, push and
hold the “TEXT” button until you hear a
beep.
If three messages are already stored in
memory, the oldest message will be overwritten by the new message.
To recall a radio text message, push the
“TEXT” button momentarily. This will display the most recent message. Each push
of the button will display messages in the
order of most to least recent.

If no messages have been stored, or if
there are no more messages to be recalled, “NO MESSAGE” will appear on the
display, and the message display will be
canceled.
The message display will be canceled if
you activate any function that affects the
display.
Compact disc player
This button is used to change the display
for the compact disc that contains text
data.
To change the display, quickly push and
release the “TEXT” button while the compact disc is playing. The display changes
in the order from the elapsed time to disc
title to track title, then back to the
elapsed time.
If this button is pushed while a compact
disc that does not contain text data is
playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the
display.
If the entire disc or track title does not
appear on the display, push and hold the
button until you hear a beep. The rest of
the title will appear.

TRAF (Traffic)
This button turns the traffic announcement
(TA) feature on and off. This button is
operational only in FM mode.
By pushing the “TRAF” button, “TRAF
SEEK” will flash on the display and the
radio will start seeking any traffic program
station.
When a traffic program station is found,
“TRAF” will be displayed and you will hear
a beep.
After the traffic announcement program is
over, the display returns to the previous
mode.
If no traffic program station is found, “NO
TRAF INFO” appears on the display for a
few seconds and the display returns to
the previous mode.
To cancel the traffic announcement, push
this button again.
TUNE (Tuning)
Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to step
up the frequency. Turn the knob counterclockwise to step down the frequency.

230

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

TYPE (Program Types)
When you push the “TYPE” button while
receiving an RDS station, the current program type appears on the display.
Each time you push this button, the program type changes as in the following:

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

ROCK
EASY LIS (Easy listening)
CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)
R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
INFORM (Information)
RELIGION
MISC (Miscellaneous)
ALERT (Emergency message)

231

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Audio remote controls (steering switches)
Some parts of the audio system can be
adjusted using the switches on the steering wheel.
Details of the specific switches, controls,
and features are described below.
1. Volume control switch
2. “ƜƝ” switch
3. “MODE” switch

232

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

1. Volume control switch
Push “+” to increase the volume. The volume continues to increase while the
switch is being pushed.
Push “−” to decrease the volume. The
volume continues to decrease while the
switch is being pushed.
2. “ƜƝ” switch
Radio
This switch has the following features—
To select a preset station:
Quickly push and release the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”
side of the switch. Do this again to select
the next preset station.
To seek a station:
Push and hold the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the
switch until you hear a beep. Do this
again to find the next station. If you push
the switch on either side during the seek
mode, seeking will be cancelled.
Cassette player
This switch has the following features—
To skip
tion:
Quickly
side of
appear

to a different track in either direcpush and release the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”
the switch. “FF 1” or “REW 1” will
on the display.

Next, push either side of the track switch
until the track you want to listen to is set.
If you push the switch ten times, the skip
function will turn off. (You can skip up to
nine tracks at a time.)

There must be at least 3 seconds of blank
space between tracks for the track switch
to work correctly. In addition, the feature
may not work well with some spoken, live,
or classical recordings.

When counting the number of the tracks
you want to rewind, remember to count
the current track as well. For example, if
you want to rewind to a song that is two
tracks before the song you are listening
to, push the “Ɲ” side of the switch three
times.

To fast−forward or reverse:
Push and hold the “Ɯ” side of the switch
to fast−forward a cassette tape. “FF” will
appear on the display. Push and hold the
“Ɲ” side of the switch to rewind a tape.
“REW” will appear on the display.

If you push the track switch further than
you wanted to, push the other side of the
switch. The track number will be increased or reduced.

To stop the tape while it is fast−forwarding, push the “Ɯ” side of the switch. To
stop the tape while it is rewinding, push
the “Ɲ” side of the switch.

The track number you select is not valid
if it is higher than the number of the
tracks remaining on the current side of
the cassette.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette
player will stop and then play that same
side. If a tape fast−forwards completely,
the cassette will play the other side of the
tape using the auto−reverse feature.

D When the tape reaches to the begin-

Compact disc player

ning, the player will automatically start
playing that side.

D After the tape reaches to the end, the
player will automatically reverse and
start playing the other side.

Use this switch to skip up or down to a
different track in either direction.
Quickly push and release the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”
side of the switch until the track you want
to listen to is set. If you want to return
to the beginning of the current track, push
the “Ɲ” side of the switch once, quickly.

233

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Rear seat audio system—
With compact disc changer only—
Push and hold the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the
switch until the disc you want to listen to
is set.
3. “MODE” switch
Push “MODE” switch to select an audio
mode. Each push changes the mode sequentially if the desired mode is ready to
use. The DVD player will be selectable if
a rear seat entertainment system is
installed in your vehicle.
To turn the audio system on, push the
“MODE” switch.
To turn the audio system off, push and
hold the “MODE” switch until the system
turns off.

The rear seat audio system is designed
for the rear seat passengers to enjoy the
audio sound separately between the front
seats and the rear seats.

You can enjoy the rear seat entertainment
system with commercial headphone. See
“—Headphone input jacks” in this Section
for details.

The rear seat audio system can be turned
on with the rear audio system controller
even if the front audio system is off.
When the front audio is turned off, the
rear audio system will be turned off simultaneously.

You can purchase a wireless headphone
at a Toyota dealer.

The rear passengers can enjoy all the
modes (AM and FM radio, cassette tape
player and compact disc player with
changer) with the rear seat audio system
when a cassette tape and a compact disc
are loaded in the front audio system.

CAUTION
Do not operate a vehicle while using
the headphones. Doing so may cause
an accident, resulting in injury.

When the same mode is selected on the
front and rear audio systems at the same
time, the system can be operated on the
front audio system.
If the radio mode is selected on the front
and rear audio systems at the same time,
AM and FM modes cannot be changed on
the rear seat audio system.

234

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Rear seat audio system
controller
The rear seat audio system consists of
following components.
1. Front audio system
2. Rear seat audio system display
3. Rear seat audio system controller
4. Headphone volume control dials
5. Headphone input jacks
6. Controller holder

The rear seat audio system can be operated with the rear seat audio system controller.

CAUTION
Do not disassemble or modify the
controller. It may cause an accident,
fire or electric shock.

NOTICE
Keep the controller away from direct
sunlight, high heat and high humidity.
These conditions could cause the
case to deform or the battery to explode or leak.

235

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

USING THE CONTROLLER
To use the rear seat audio system controller, direct the signal output portion
of the controller to the signal reception
portion of the rear seat audio system
display.
The rear seat audio system controller can
be operated when the ignition switch is in
the “ACC” or “ON” position.
The controller does not operate properly
when the signal reception portion of the
display is exposed to direct sunlight.
Block the display from direct sunlight.
BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER
(for new vehicle owners)
A battery is already set in the controller with an insulating sheet, which prevents the battery from being discharged. Before using the controller,
remove the insulating sheet.

Details of specific buttons, controls, and
features
of
the
controller,
see
“CONTROLLER
FEATURES”
in
this
Section.

NOTICE
Observe the followings, otherwise the
controller may be damaged.
z Do not drop or strongly knock the
controller against hard objects.
z Do not sit on or place heavy objects on the controller.

236

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

NOTICE
Do not leave the controller exposed
to high temperatures (such as on the
instrument panel) for a long time,
otherwise the controller may be damaged.

CONTROLLER HOLDER
The controller can be stowed in the
holder when it is not in use. The holder
can be hooked on the back of the driver’s or front passenger’s seatback.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop
while driving, stow the controller in
the holder when it is not in use.

237

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

1. “

” and “

” (DISC/CH/PROG) buttons

1. “ ” and “
tons

2. “

” and “

” (TUNE/TRACK) buttons

Radio

CONTROLLER FEATURES

3. “ON/SOURCE” button
4. “OFF” button

” (DISC/CH/PROG) but-

Compact disc player with changer
Use these buttons to select a disc you
want to listen to.

You can scan only the preset stations for
the band of the front audio system. (For
instructions, see “—Controls and features”
in this Section.)

Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)
button until the number of the disc you
want to listen appears on the display.

To scan the preset stations:
Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)
button. The radio will tune in the next
preset station up or down the band. The
station frequency will appear on the display.

Radio

Cassette tape player
Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)
button to select the other side of a cassette tape. The display indicates which
side is currently selected. (“ ” indicates
the top side, “ ” indicates the bottom
side.)
Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette
player reaches the end of a tape side, it
automatically reverses and begins to play
the other side. This is true whether the
cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

2. “

” and “

” (TUNE/TRACK) buttons

Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button to tune or seek.
Tuning:
Quickly push and release the “ ” or “ ”
(TUNE/TRACK) button. Each time you
push the button, the radio will step up or
down to another frequency. If you push
and hold the button, and the radio will go
into the seek mode.
Seeking:
Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/
TRACK) button. The radio will seek up or
down for a station of the nearest frequency and will stop on reception. Each time
you push the button, the stations will be
searched one after another.

238

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Cassette tape player
This button has the following features—
To fast forward or reverse:
Push and hold the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK)
button until “FF” will appears on the display to forward a tape. Push and hold the
“ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button until “REW”
appears on the display to rewind a tape.

For the skip feature to work correctly a
blank space of at least 3 seconds is considered to be a start of a recording.
When a beginning of a tape is reached,
the player automatically resumes play.
When the end of the tape is reached, the
player automatically reverses sides and
resumes normal play.

To stop the tape while it is fast forwarding, push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button.
To stop the tape while it is rewinding,
push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button.

In addition, the feature may not work well
with some spoken, live, or classical recordings.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette
player will stop and then play that same
side. If a tape fast forwards completely,
the cassette will play the other side of the
tape using the auto−reverse feature.

This button has the following features—

To skip up or down to locate a song or
recording:
You can select up to nine recordings (including current one).
Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button. “FF 1” or “REW 1” will appear on the
display.
Next, push either side of
until the number on the
the number of tracks you
you push the button 10
feature will be turned off.

the track button
display reaches
want to skip. If
times, the skip

Compact disc player
To skip up or down to a different track:
Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button until the number of the track you want
to listen to appears on the display. If you
want to return to the beginning of the
current track, quickly push the “ ”
(TUNE/TRACK) button one time.
To fast forward or reverse:
Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/
TRACK) button to fast forward or reverse
within a compact disc. When you release
the button, the compact disc player will
resume playing.

3. “ON/SOURCE” button
Push “ON/SOURCE” button to turn on the
rear seat audio system.
Use “ON/SOURCE” button to select an
audio mode when the rear seat audio system is on. Each time you push this button, the system changes between the radio, cassette player and compact disc
player.
When you change the mode, the display
indicates which mode is selected.
When a cassette tape and compact discs
are not loaded in the front audio system,
only a radio mode can be selected in the
rear seat audio system.
If you push “ON/SOURCE” button to select the casette tape player mode or compact disc player mode in that case, a
beep sounds from front audio system and
“INVALID” flashes on the screen for 6
seconds, and then the rear audio system
returns to the radio mode.
If you push “ON/SOURCE” button while
receiving an emergency broadcast, a beep
sounds and “INVALID” appears on the
screen to indicate that no button can be
operated.

239

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Radio

Compact disc mode

REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY

AM mode

“CD” appears on the screen while this
mode is selected.

For replacement, use a CR2025 lithium
battery or equivalent.

The screen shows the track, or track and
disc number currently being played.

CAUTION

When you select the AM mode, “AM” will
appear on the screen.
FM mode
When you select the FM mode, “FM1” or
“FM2” will appear on the display.
If the front audio system receives a traffic
announcement (TA) while the rear seat
audio system is in the radio mode,
“TRAF” will flash on the screen and the
rear seat audio system will turn off. When
the front audio receives a traffic announcement (TA), the rear seat audio system cannot select the AM/FM mode.
Tape mode
“TAPE” appears on the screen while this
mode is selected.

Error messages
If the player malfunctions, your audio system will screen one of the four following
error messages.
“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool
down.
“ERR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damaged
or inserted incorrectly (up−side down).
Clean the disc and re−insert it.
“ERR 3”: There is a problem inside the
system. Eject the disc. Set the disc again.
“ERR 4”: Over−current. Ask your Toyota
dealer to inspect.

Special care should be taken that
small children do not swallow the removed battery or components.

NOTICE
z When replacing the battery, be careful not to lose the components.
z Replace only with the same or
equivalent type of battery recommended by a Toyota dealer.
z Dispose of used batteries according
to the local regulations.

If the malfunction still exists, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
4. “OFF” button
Push “OFF” button to turn off the rear
seat audio system.

240

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

z Be careful not to bend the electrode
of the controller battery insertion
and that dust or oil does not adhere to the transmitter case.
z Close the battery case securely.
After replacing the battery, check that the
controller operates properly. If the controller still does not operate properly, contact
your Toyota dealer.

Replace the battery by using the following
procedures:
1. Pull the case out while pushing the
lock release button to the side.

2. Remove the discharged battery.
3. Put in a new battery with the positive
(+) side up.
Put in the case securely.

NOTICE
z Make sure that the positive side of
the controller battery is facing correctly.
z Do not replace the battery with wet
hands. Water may cause rust.
z Do not touch or move any components inside of the controller, or it
may interfere with proper operation.

241

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Headphone input jacks
CAUTION
Adjust the volume when you connect
the headphones to the jack. Loud
sounds may have a significant impact
on the human body.

You can enjoy the rear seat audio system with commercial headphone.
To use the headphones, connect them to
the jack.
The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.

To adjust the volume of the headphones,
turn the knob. Turn right to increase the
volume. Turn left to decrease the volume.
The maximum volume depends on the
type of headphones.
With some headphone generally available
in the market, it may be difficult to catch
sound properly. Toyota recommends the
use of Toyota genuine headphone.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

242

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Rear seat entertainment system—
The rear seat entertainment system consists of the following components.
1. Front audio system
2. Rear seat entertainment system display
3. Rear seat entertainment system
controller
4. DVD player
5. Headphone input jacks
6. Input terminal adapter
7. Power outlet
8. Headphone volume control dials
9. Controller holder
10. Power outlet main switch

243

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

The rear seat entertainment system is designed for the rear passengers to enjoy
audio and DVD video separately from the
front audio system.

You can enjoy the rear seat entertainment
system with commercial headphone. See
“—Headphone input jacks” in this Section
for details.

The rear seat entertainment system can
be operated when the ignition key is in
the “ACC” or “ON” position.

You can also enjoy the rear seat entertainment system with a wireless headphone. The wireless headphone can be
used within rear seat. If the signal becomes weak, the headphone will mute.
For details, refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions.

The rear passengers can enjoy all modes
(AM and FM radio, cassette tape player,
compact disc player with changer and
DVD player) on the rear seat entertainment system only if a cassette tape and
a compact disc are loaded in the front
audio system.
The
play
text,
disc

rear seat entertainment system can
DVD video, audio CD, video CD, CD
dts−CD or DVD audio only when a
is loaded in the DVD player.

You can enjoy videos and sound when
your personal audio system is connected
to the input terminal adapter on the rear
console box. For details, refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions.

With some wireless headphone generally
available in the market, it may be difficult
to catch sound properly. Toyota recommends the use of Toyota genuine wireless
headphone.
You can purchase a wireless headphone
at a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

D Do not drive with using the head-

phone. Otherwise, you may be hard
to hear the sound from the outside
while using the headphone and may
cause an accident.

D Conversational

speech on some
DVDs is recorded at a low volume
to emphasize the impact of sound
effects. If you adjust the volume
assuming that the conversations
represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may
be startled by louder sound effects
or when you change to a different
audio source. Be sure to adjust the
volume with this in mind.
Make sure the volume is not increased, before you turn on the
headphone.

244

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Display

To open the display, push the lock release
button.

Push down the display to the desired
angle.

NOTICE
The screen should be cleaned with a
dry soft cloth. If the screen is pushed
by hand or wiped with a hard cloth,
the surface of the screen may be
scratched.

To close, push up the display until you
hear a click.
The illumination of the screen is automatically turned off when the display is
closed. However, the rear seat entertainment system is not turned off.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or sudden stop
while driving, close the display when
it is not in use.

245

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Rear seat entertainment
system controller
NOTICE
z The screen should be cleaned with
a dry soft cloth. If the screen is
pushed by hand or wiped with a
hard cloth, the surface of the
screen may be scratched.
z Benzene or alkaline solutions may
damage the coated surface of the
screen.
z To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not turn on the rear
seat entertainment system longer
than necessary when the engine is
not running.

The rear seat entertainment system can
be operated with the rear seat entertainment system controller. The system cannot be operated by touching the switches
on the screen directly.

CAUTION
Do not disassemble or modify the
controller. It may cause an accident,
fire or electric shock.

NOTICE
Keep the controller away from direct
sunlight, high heat and high humidity.
These conditions could cause the
case to deform or the battery to explode or leak.

BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER
(for new vehicle owners)
A battery is already set in the controller with an insulating sheet, which prevents the battery from being discharged. Before using the controller,
remove the insulating sheet.

246

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

USING THE CONTROLLER
To use the rear seat entertainment system controller, direct the signal output
portion of the controller to the signal
reception portion of the rear seat entertainment system display.
The controller does not operate properly
when the signal reception portion of the
display is exposed to direct sunlight.
Block the display from direct sunlight.

NOTICE
Observe the followings, otherwise the
controller may be damaged.
z Do not drop or strongly knock the
controller against hard objects.
z Do not sit on or place heavy objects on the controller.

CONTROLLER HOLDER
The controller can be stowed in the
holder when it is not in use. The holder
can be hooked on the back of the driver’s or front passenger’s seatback.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop
while driving, stow the controller in
the holder when it is not in use.

247

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

NOTICE
Do not leave the controller exposed
to high temperatures (such as on the
instrument panel) for a long time,
otherwise the controller may be damaged.

248

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CONTROL BUTTONS
1. “

” and “

” (TUNE/TRACK) buttons

These buttons operate the front audio
system or select the track/chapter
when the DVD player is operated.
2. “

” and “

” (DISC/CH/PROG) buttons

These buttons skip directly to a desired
preset station, disc, track or chapter.
3. “CURSOR” button
This button indicates the control
switches on the screen when the DVD
player is operated.
4. Joy stick
This joy stick selects a control switch,
mode switch on the screen or the
menu for the disc.
5. “ENT” button
This button inputs the selected switch
or the selected menu for the disc.
6. “SOURCE” button
This button turns on the rear seat entertainment system and selects the
mode.
7. “DISPLAY” button
This button adjusts the color, tone,
contrast and brightness of the screen.

249

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

8. “VIDEO” button
This button turns on the video mode
when your personal audio device is
connected.
9. “DVD” button
This button turns on the DVD mode.
10. “RETURN” button
This button skips to the predetermined
scene for the disc when the DVD player is operated.
11. “SET UP” button
This button indicates the initial set up
screen when the DVD player is operated.
12. “SEARCH” button
This button indicates the title search
screen when the DVD player is operated.
13. “ANGLE” button
This button selects the angle of the
screen when the DVD player is operated.
14. “""” button
This button fast forwards a screen
when the DVD player is operated.

15. “"” button
This button plays a screen when the
DVD player is operated.
16. “

22. “OFF” button
This button turns off the rear seat entertainment system.

” button

This button pauses a screen when the
DVD player is operated.
17. “AA” button
This button reverse a screen when the
DVD player is operated.
18. “TOP MENU” button
This button indicates the title selection
screen for DVD video when the DVD
player is operated.
19. “AUDIO” button
This button indicates the changing audio screen when the DVD player is
operated.
20. “SUB TITLE” button
This button indicates the changing subtitle screen when the DVD player is
operated.
21. “MENU” button
This button indicates the menu screen
for DVD video when the DVD player is
operated.

250

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Turning the rear seat
entertainment system on and
off

—Front audio system operation
All the modes of the front audio system
can be operated on the rear seat entertainment system.
When the same mode is selected on the
front and rear audio systems simultaneously, the system can be operated on
the front audio system.
If the radio mode is selected on the front
and rear audio systems at the same time,
AM and FM modes cannot be changed on
the rear seat audio system.

To turn on the
“SOURCE” button.

system,

push

the

To turn off the system, push the “OFF”
button.

The screen indicates which mode can be
selected. Push the “DVD” or “VIDEO” button
when the connected DVD player or your
personal audio machine is on. The rear
seat entertainment system will be turned
on.

When the front audio system is turned off,
the rear audio system and the DVD player
will be turned off simultaneously.

The rear seat entertainment system can select all the modes.
When a cassette tape, a compact disc, a
DVD video disc, an audio CD, a video
CD, a CD text, a dts−CD or a DVD audio
disc is not loaded on the front audio system or the DVD player, only the radio
mode can be selected on the rear seat
entertainment system.

251

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SELECTING THE MODE
Use the joy stick to select the mode.
Push the “ENT” button to enter the mode.

The mode display which is selected by
the joy stick is colored blue. When the
“ENT” button is pushed, the mode display
changes to green. If the mode display is
gray, it cannot be selected.

Radio

The “Speaker sound” on the mode display
is selected on the front audio system.

Cassette tape player and compact disc
player

252

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

When you select a mode, the screen indicates which is selected.

Cassette tape player
Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)
button to select the other side of a cassette tape. The screen indicates which
side is currently selected. (“ ” indicates
the top side, “ ” indicates the bottom
side.)

Radio
AM mode:
When you select the AM mode, “AM” will
appear on the screen.
FM mode:

When you select the FM mode, “FM1” or
“FM2” will appear on the screen.
Tape mode
“TAPE” appears on the screen while this
mode is selected.
Compact disc mode
“CD” appears on the screen while this
mode is selected.
The screen shows the track, or track and
disc number currently being played.

Compact disc player with changer
OPERATING FRONT AUDIO SYSTEM
To operate the front audio system, use
the following switches.
1. “ ” and “
tons

” (DISC/CH/PROG) but-

Use these buttons to select a disc you
want to listen to.
Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)
button until the number of the disc you
want to listen appears on the display.

Radio
You can scan only the preset stations for
the band of the front audio system. (For
instructions, see “—Controls and features”
in this Section.)
To scan the preset stations:
Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)
button. The radio will tune in the next
preset station up or down the band. The
station frequency will appear on the
screen.

253

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

2. “

” and “

” (TUNE/TRACK) buttons

Radio
Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button to tune or seek.
Tuning:
Quickly push and release the “ ” or “ ”
(TUNE/TRACK) button. Each time you
push the button, the radio will step up or
down to another frequency. If you push
and hold the button, and the radio will go
into the seek mode.
Seeking:
Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/
TRACK) button. The radio will seek up or
down for a station of the nearest frequency and will stop on reception. Each time
you push the button, the stations will be
searched one after another.
Cassette tape player
This button has the following features—
To fast forward or reverse:
Push and hold the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK)
button until “FF” will appears on the display to forward a tape. Push and hold the
“ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button until “REW”
appears on the display to rewind a tape.

To stop the tape while it is fast forwarding, push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button.
To stop the tape while it is rewinding,
push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button.

In addition, the feature may not work well
with some spoken, live, or classical recordings.

This button has the following features—

To skip up or down to locate a song or
recording:
You can select up to nine recordings (including current one).
Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button. “FF 1” or “REW 1” will appear on the
screen.
Next, push either side of
until the number on the
the number of tracks you
you push the button 10
feature will be turned off.

the track button
screen reaches
want to skip. If
times, the skip

254

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY
For replacement, use a CR2025 lithium
battery or equivalent.

CAUTION
Special care should be taken that
small children do not swallow the removed battery or components.

Replace the battery by using the following
procedures:
1. Pull the case out while pushing the
lock release button to the side.

2. Remove the discharged battery.
3. Put in a new battery with the positive
(+) side up.
Put it in the case securely.

NOTICE
z Be sure that the positive side of
the controller battery is facing correctly.
z Do not replace the battery with wet
hands. Water may cause rust.
z Do not touch or move any components inside of the controller, or it
may interfere with proper operation.

255

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—DVD player
z Be careful not to bend the electrode
of the controller battery insertion
and that dust or oil does not adhere to the transmitter case.
z Close the battery case securely.
After replacing the battery, check that the
controller operates properly. If the controller still does not operate properly, contact
your Toyota dealer.

The DVD player is set in the console
box.
The DVD player can play audio CDs,
DVD video discs, CD texts, dts−CDs
and video CDs.
For appropriate discs for this player, see
“Audio/video system operating hints”.
To access the DVD player, pull up the
console box lid while pushing the lock
release button.
The DVD player works when the ignition
key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
To turn on the DVD player, a disc must
be loaded in the player.
To turn off the player, eject the disc.
Error messages
If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display one of the three following
error messages.
If “DISC CHECK” appears on the
screen: It indicates that the disc is dirty,
damaged or it was inserted upside down.
Clean the disc or insert it correctly.
If “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on
the screen: It indicates that the DVD region code is not set properly.

256

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

If “DVD ERROR” appears on the
screen: There is a problem inside the
player. Eject the disc. Set the disc again.
If the malfunction still exists, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

INSERTING THE DISC
To open the DVD player, push the lid
backward.

Insert a disc and push the lid forward
to close the DVD player.
When you insert a disc, push it in gently
with the label side up.
If the label faces down, the disc cannot
be played. In this case, “DISC CHECK”
and disc number appear on the screen.
If a disc which is not playable is inserted,
“DISC CHECK” will also appear on the
screen. For appropriate discs for this player, see “Audio/video system operating
hints”.
The player is intended for the use with 12
cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

257

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Selecting the DVD mode

The indicator light turns on while the disc
is loaded.
The player will play the track or chapter,
and it will play from the beginning of the
track or chapter again after it reaches the
end.

NOTICE
Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the DVD player. Do not insert
anything other than a disc into the
slot.

EJECTING THE DISC
Push the lid backward to open the DVD
player. Push the disc eject button to
eject a disc.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the console box closed
while driving.

258

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—DVD player operation
switches
To select the DVD mode, push the
“DVD” button on the controller.
You can also select the DVD mode on the
mode selection screen mentioned above.

Vehicles with navigation system—The
“DVD Hint!” screen appears when the
DVD mode is first selected after you
turn the ignition key to the “ACC” or
“ON” position.

The DVD player can be operated with the
controller buttons directly.

Push the “OK” switch when you read the
message.

3. “TOP MENU” button

1. “DVD” button
2. “MENU” button
4. “RETURN” button
5. “SET UP” button
6. “SEARCH” button
7. “ANGLE” button
8. “AUDIO” button
9. “SUB TITLE” button
10. “

”, “"”, “AA” and “""” buttons

259

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

The player can also be operated with the
switches on the screen.

TURNING THE OPERATION SWITCHES
ON AND OFF

To operate the switches on the screen,
select the switch by the joy stick and
push the “ENT” button. You cannot select
the switches on the screen by touching
them directly.

To turn on the operation switches, push
the “CURSOR” button on the controller.

Top page (DVD video operation switch)

When the switch is selected by the joy
stick, the outline of the switch changes to
blue. Push the “ENT” button, and the
switch will be highlighted in green.

Second
switch)

page

(DVD

video

operation

260

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

There are operation switches on the “Top
Page” and “Second Page” screens.
To change the screen, push the “Top
Page” or “Second Page” switch on the
screen.

Top page (DVD audio operation switch)

Top page (video CD)

Second
switch)

Second page (video CD)

page

(DVD

audio

operation

261

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

To turn off the switches on the screen,
push the “CURSOR” button on the controller once again or push the “Hide Keys” on
the screen.

If “ ” appears on the screen when
you select a switch, it indicates that
the switch cannot work.

262

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—DVD player operation (DVD
video/DVD audio)
NOTE: The playback condition of some
DVD video discs may be determined by
a DVD video software producer. This
DVD player plays a disc as the software
producer intended. So, some functions
may not work properly. Be sure to read
the instruction manual for the DVD video disc separately provided. For detailed information about DVD video
discs, see “—DVD video disc information” in this Section.
Precautions for DVD video discs
When recording on a DVD video, DVD
audio, video CD or audio tracks may not
record in some cases while the menu is
displayed. As audio will not play in this
case, verify that the video tracks are playing and then activate playback.

CAUTION
Conversational speech on some DVDs
is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects.
If you adjust the volume assuming
that the conversations represent the
maximum volume level available for
the DVD, you may be startled by
louder sound effects or when you
change to a different audio source.
Loud sounds may have a significant
impact on the human body or pose a
driving hazard. Keep this in mind
when you adjust the volume.

DVD video

DVD audio

When playback of a disc is completed:

D If an audio CD is playing, the first
track starts.

D If a DVD video, DVD audio or video
CD is playing, playback will stop or the
menu screen will be displayed.

The title/chapter number and playback
time display may not appear while playing
back certain DVD video discs.

263

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

TURNING THE MENU SCREEN FOR THE
DISC ON OR OFF
DVD video—
To turn on the menu screen for the disc,
push the “Top Menu” or the “Menu” switch
on the screen. You can also turn on the
menu screen by pushing the “MENU” or
“TOP MENU” switch on the controller.
DVD audio—
To turn on the menu screen for the disc,
push the “Top Menu” switch on the
screen. You can also turn on the menu
screen by pushing the “TOP MENU”
switch on the controller.
For the operation of the menu screen, see
the separate manual for the DVD disc.

To turn on the selecting switch, push the
“ ” switch.

264

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

To select the menu for the disc, push the
“ ”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” switches on the
screen. Push the “Enter” switch to select
the menu for the disc.

DVD video

“ ” switch/button: Push this switch/button
to pause the disc.

You can also select the menu for the disc
by the joy stick and the “ENT” button on
the controller when the control switches
are not indicated on the screen.

“"” switch/button: Push this switch/button to
cancel the pause and return to normal playing.

Push the “Shift Keys” on the screen, and
the switches (“ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “Enter”
and “Shift Keys” switches) will move up
and down.
To turn off the switch, push the “OFF”
switch on the screen. To turn on the
switch again, push the “ON” switch on the
screen.
To return to the previous screen, push the
“Back” switch on the screen.

OPERATING THE “ ”, “"”, “AA” AND
“""” SWITCHES/BUTTONS

DVD audio

“AA” and “""” switches/buttons: Push
and hold the “AA” or “""” switch/button
to fast forward or reverse. When you release the switch/button, the DVD player
will resume playing.
DVD video only—
Push the “AA” or “""” switch/button
while pausing, the DVD video plays the
slow−motion video replay or the slow−motion video replay in reverse.

265

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

DVD video

SKIPPING
SCREEN

THE

PREDETERMINED

To skip to the predetermined screen, push
the “Return” switch. The DVD player starts
playing from the beginning of the predetermined screen. You can also display the
screen by pushing the “RETURN” button
on the controller.

DVD video

For further details of the predetermined
screen, see the separate manual for the
DVD disc.
DVD audio

DVD audio

266

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SELECTING THE TITLE/GROUP

DVD video—

To display the searching title (DVD video)
or group (DVD audio) screen, push the
“Search” switch on the screen. You can
also display the screen by pushing the
“SEARCH” button on the controller.

Select the title number by using the “−”,
“+” and “+10” switches and push the “Enter” switch to enter the number. The player starts playing disc for that title number.
The selected title number will appear on
the screen.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
menu screen.
DVD audio—

DVD video

Enter the group number by using the “−”
and “+” switches. The selected group
number will appear on the screen. Push
the “Enter” switch. The player starts playing the disc from the entered group number.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
previous screen.

DVD audio

267

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

DVD video

DVD audio

SELECTING THE BONUS GROUP

CHANGING THE STILL PICTURE

DVD audio only—

Enter the bonus group number on the
searching group screen and push the “Enter” switch. The “Enter Key Code” screen
will appear. To enter the number of the
group you want to play, push the group
number. If you enter the wrong number,
push the “Clear” switch to delete the number.

Push the “Still Prev.” or “Still Next” switch
on the screen to forward or reverse the
still pictures.

Push the “Enter” switch on the screen.
The player starts playing the disc from the
selected bonus group number.

268

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE
Push the “Sub Title” switch on the screen,
and then the changing subtitle language
screen will appear. You can also display
the screen by pushing the “SUB TITLE”
button on the controller.

Each time you push the “Sub Title” switch,
another language stored on the disc is
selected.
To turn off the subtitles, push the “Hide”
switch.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
previous screen.
The selected subtitle language will appear
on the screen.

269

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CHANGING AUDIO
video only)

LANGUAGE

(DVD

Push the “Audio” switch on the screen
and then the changing audio language
screen will appear. You can also display
the screen by pushing the “AUDIO” button
on the controller.

Each time you push the “Audio” switch,
another language stored on the disc is
selected.
The selected audio language will appear
on the screen.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
previous screen.

270

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CHANGING AUDIO FORMAT (DVD audio
only)

DVD video

Push the “Audio” switch on the screen or
the “AUDIO” button on the controller and
the changing audio format screen will appear.

DVD audio

Each time you touch the “Audio” switch,
another audio format stored on the disc is
selected.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
previous screen.

271

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CHANGING ANGLE SCREEN
Push the “Angle” switch on the screen,
and then the changing angle screen will
appear. You can also display the screen
by pushing the “ANGLE” button on the
controller.

DVD video

DVD audio

The angle can be selected for discs that
are multi−angle compatible when the
“
” mark appears on the screen. Each
time you push the “Angle” switch, the
angle changes. The angle number which
you can select will appear on the screen.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
previous screen.

272

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

There are initial setting switches on the
“Setup Menu 1” and “Setup Menu 2”
screens.

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING
Push the “Set Up” switch on the screen,
and then the initial setting screen will appear. You can also display the screen by
pushing the “SET UP” button on the controller. You can change the initial setting.

To change the screen, push the “Top
Page” or “Second Page” switch on the
screen.

After the setting is done, the player plays
from the beginning of the chapter or the
track.

After you change the initial setting, push
the “Enter” switch. The initial setting
switch will be turned off and return to the
picture previously.

Setup Menu 1 screen

When the “Initial Setting” switch on “Setup
Menu 2” is pushed, all menus are initialized.

Setup Menu 2 screen

273

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE
Push the “Audio Lang.” switch on the
“Setup Menu 1” and the “Select Audio
Language” screen appear.
Select the language you want to hear on
the screen.
To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen,
push the “Back” switch.
If you cannot find a language you want to
hear, push the “Others” switch. The “Enter
Audio Lang. Code” screen will appear.

To enter the code of the language
want to hear, push the number of
language code. For details about the
guage codes, see the language code
If you enter a wrong number, push
“Clear” switch to delete the number.
If numbers which are not on the
entered and the “Enter” switch is
the “Incorrect Code” screen will
Push the language code you want
again.

you
the
lanlist.
the

list are
pushed,
appear.
to hear

To return to the “Select Audio Language”
screen, push the “Back” switch.

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE
To display the “Select Subtitle Lang.”,
push the “Subtitle Lang.” switch on the
“Setup Menu 1” screen.
Select the language you want to read on
the screen.
To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen,
push the “Back” switch.
If you cannot find a language you want to
read, push the “Others” switch. The “Enter
Subtitle Lang. Code” screen will appear.

274

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

To enter the code of the language
want to read, push the number of
language code. For details about the
guage codes, see the language code
If you enter a wrong number, push
“Clear” switch to delete the number.

you
the
lanlist.
the

Push the “Enter” switch on the screen. If
numbers which are not on the list are
entered and the “Enter” switch is pushed,
the “Incorrect code” screen will appear.
Push the language code you want to read
again.
To return to the “Select Subtitle Lang.”
screen, push the “Back” switch on the
screen.

CHANGING THE DVD LANGUAGE
To display the “Select DVD Language”
screen, push the “DVD Language” switch on
the “Setup Menu 1” screen.
Select the language you want to read on the
screen.
To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen,
push the “Back” switch.
If you cannot find a language you want to
read, push the “Others” switch. The “Enter
DVD Language Code” screen will appear.

you
the
lanlist.
the

Push the “Enter” switch on the screen. If
numbers which are not on the list are
entered and the “Enter” switch is pushed,
the “Incorrect code” screen will appear.
Push the language code you want to read
again.
To return to the “Select DVD Language”
screen, push the “Back” switch on the
screen.

275

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

TURNING THE ANGLE MARK ON OR
OFF

SETTING
LEVEL
RESTRICTIONS

The angle mark can be turned on for
discs that are multi−angle compatible.

You can restrict the play back screen by
setting the viewer restrictions. You can
prevent the restriction with a password.
Some discs do not supply a restriction.

Each time you push the “Angle Mark”
switch on the screen, the angle mark
turns on or off alternately.

VIEWER

To set the level of viewer restriction, push
the “Parental” switch on the “Setup Menu
1” screen. The “Enter Personal Code”
screen will appear.

Push the number for the password and
the “Enter” switch. The “Select Restriction
Level” screen will appear.
If you enter a wrong number, push the
“Clear” switch to delete the number.
You cannot change the setting without inputting the password. When you forget or
change the password, push the “Clear”
switch ten times to initialize the password.
To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen,
push the “Back” switch.

276

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

LANGUAGE CODE LIST

Push a parental level (1—8). The smaller
the level number, the stricter the age limit.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
“Setup Menu 1” screen.

SETTING THE DISPLAY MODE
Each time you push the “Display Mode”
switch on the “Setup Menu 2” screen, the
display mode is changed from wide mode
to auto mode.

Code

Language

1001

Japanese

0514

English

0618

French

0405

German

0920

Italian

0519

Spanish

2608

Chinese

1412

Dutch

1620

Portuguese

1922

Swedish

1821

Russian

1115

Korean

0512

Greek

0101

Afar

0102

Abkhazian

0106

Afrikaans

0113

Amharic

0118

Arabic

0119

Assamese

277

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

0125

Aymara

0610

Fiji

1101

Georgian

0126

Azerbaijani

0615

Faroese

1111

Kazakh

0201

Bashkir

0625

Frisian

1112

Greenlandic

0205

Byelorussian

0701

Irish

1113

Cambodian

0207

Bulgarian

0704

Scots−Gaelic

1114

Kannada

0208

Bihari

0712

Galician

1119

Kashmiri

0209

Bislama

0714

Guarani

1121

Kurdish

0214

Bengali

0721

Gujarati

1125

Kirghiz

0215

Tibetan

0801

Hausa

1201

Latin

0218

Breton

0809

Hindi

1214

Lingala

0301

Catalan

0818

Croatian

1215

Laothian

0315

Corsican

0821

Hungarian

1220

Lithuanian

0319

Czech

0825

Armenian

1222

Latvian

0325

Welsh

0901

Interlingua

1307

Malagasy

0401

Danish

0905

Interlingue

1309

Maori

0426

Bhutani

0911

Inupiak

1311

Macedonian

0515

Esperanto

0914

Indonesian

1312

Malayalam

0520

Estonian

0919

Icelandic

1314

Mongolian

0521

Basque

0923

Hebrew

1315

Moldavian

0601

Persian

1009

Yiddish

1318

Marathi

0609

Finnish

1023

Javanese

1319

Malay

278

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

1320

Maltese

1911

Slovak

2019

Tsonga

1325

Burmese

1912

Slovenian

2020

Tatar

1401

Nauru

1913

Samoan

2023

Twi

1405

Nepali

1914

Shona

2111

Ukrainian

1415

Norwegian

1915

Somali

2118

Urdu

1503

Occitan

1917

Albanian

2126

Uzbek

1513

(Afan) Oromo

1918

Serbian

2209

Vietnamese

1518

Oriya

1919

Siswati

2215

Volapük

1601

Punjabi

1920

Sesotho

2315

Wolof

1612

Polish

1921

Sundanese

2408

Xhosa

1619

Pashto, Pushto

1923

Swahili

2515

Yoruba

1721

Quechua

2001

Tamil

2621

Zulu

1813

Rhaeto−Romance

2005

Telugu

1814

Kirundi

2007

Tajik

1815

Romanian

2008

Thai

1823

Kinyarwanda

2009

Tigrinya

1901

Sanskrit

2011

Turkmen

1904

Sindhi

2012

Tagalog

1907

Sangho

2014

Setswana

1908

Serbo−Croatian

2015

Tonga

1909

Sinhalese

2018

Turkish

279

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN
When playing a disc, push the “DVD” button on the controller. The control screen
will appear on the screen.
Details of the specific switches, controls
and features are described below.
1. “PICTURE” switch
Push the “PICTURE” switch to turn off
the control screen and return to the
picture previously displayed.
2. “RPT” switch (DVD audio only)
SELECTING THE CHAPTER/TRACK

DVD video

To select the chapter/track, push the “ ”
or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button on the controller until the number of the chapter/
track you want to select appears on the
screen.

Push the “RPT” switch while the track
is playing. When the track ends, it will
automatically replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this switch again.
3. “RAND” switch (DVD audio only)
Push the “RAND” switch. The player
will play the tracks on the disc in random order. To turn off the random feature, push this switch again.
4. “SCAN” switch (DVD audio only)

DVD audio

Push the “SCAN” switch. The player
will scan all the tracks on the disc you
are listening to. To stop scanning, push
this switch again. If the player scanned
all the tracks on the disc, it will stop
scanning.

280

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—DVD player operation (video
CD/audio CD/CD text)
5. “

” and “

” switches

Push and hold the “
” or “
” switch
to fast forward or reverse a disc. When
you release the switch, the DVD player
will resume playing.

SELECTING THE DISC MENU NUMBER
(video CD only)
Push the “Sel. Number” switch and then
the disc menu number search screen will
appear. You can also display the screen
by pushing the “SEARCH” switch on the
controller.

Enter the disc menu number by using the
“−”, “+” and “+10” switches and push the
“Enter” switch. The player starts playing
the disc from the entered disc menu number. The entered disc menu number will
appear on the screen.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
menu screen.
Move up and down the switches by pushing “Shift keys” on the screen.

281

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

”, “"”, “AA” AND

TURNING ON THE DISC MENU (video
CD only)

CHANGING MENU
(video CD only)

“ ” switch: Push this switch to pause the
disc.

Push the “Return” switch to turn on the
menu screen for the disc. You can also
turn on the menu screen by pushing the
“RETURN” button on the controller.

Push the “D. Menu Next” or “D. Menu
Prev.” switch while the disc menu is displayed. The next or previous page will
appear on the screen.

For the operation of the menu screen, see
the manual for the video CD.

Push the “D. Menu Next” or “D. Menu
Prev.” switch while the player is playing
video. The next or previous track will be
searched and played.

OPERATING THE “
“""” SWITCHES

“"” switch: Push this switch to cancel the
pause and return to normal playing.
“AA” and “""” switches: Push this
switch to fast forward or reverse. When
you release the switch/button, the DVD
player will resume playing.

PAGE

TRACK

Video CD only—
Push the “""” switch/button while pausing, the video CD plays the slow−motion
video replay.

282

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CHANGING
A
MULTIPLEX
TRANSMISSION (video CD only)

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING (video
CD only)

Push the “Main/Sub” switch to change a
multiplex transmission. The mode changes
from Main/Sub to Main to Sub and back
to Main/Sub by pushing the “Main/Sub”
switch.

Push the “Set Up” switch on the screen
and then the initial setting screen will appear. You can also display the screen by
pushing the “SET UP” button on the controller. You can change the initial setting.
(See “CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING”
in this Section for details.)

Video CD

After the setting is done, the player plays
from the beginning of the chapter or the
track.

Audio CD

283

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Screen adjustment
1. “PICTURE” switch (video CD only)
Push the “PICTURE” switch to turn off
the control screen and return to the
picture previously displayed.
2. “RPT” switch (audio CD and CD text)
Push the “RPT” switch while the track
is playing. When the track ends, it will
automatically replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this switch again.
3. “RAND” switch (audio CD and
CD text)
CD text

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN
When playing a disc, push the “DVD” button on the controller. The control screen
will appear on the screen.
CD text only—
The disc title and track title will appear on
the screen when pushing the “DVD” button.
Details of the specific switches, controls
and features are described below.

Push the “RAND” switch. The player
will play the tracks on the disc in random order. To turn off the random feature, push this switch again.
4. “SCAN” switch (audio CD and
CD text)
Push the “SCAN” switch. The player
will scan all the tracks on the disc. To
stop scanning, push this switch again.
When the player has scanned all the
tracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.
5. “

” and “

You can adjust the color, contrast, tone
and brightness of the screen.
Push the “DISPLAY” switch on the controller and then the “Display” screen will appear.
The screen may turn purple to deflect the
sunlight. This is not a malfunction.

” switches

Push the “
” or “
” switch to fast
forward or reverse the disc. When you
push the switch again, the DVD player
will resume playing.

284

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Selecting the video mode
After adjusting the screen, push the “OK”
switch to return to the previous screen.

Each time you push the “+” or “−” switch,
you can adjust the color, contrast, tone
and brightness of the screen.
+ or
GREEN

− or RED

COLOR

Strengthens
the green
color

Strengthens
the red
color

CONTRAST

Strengthens
the contrast

Weakens
the contrast

TONE

Strengthens
the tone

Weakens
the tone

BRIGHTNESS

Brightens

Darkens

285

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—DVD video disc information
The audio machine connected to the input
terminal adapter can be played in the
video mode.
To select the video mode, push the
“VIDEO” button on the controller. You can
also select the video mode on the mode
selection screen mentioned above.

DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO DISCS
This DVD player conforms to NTSC color TV formats. DVD video discs conforming to other formats such as PAL
or SECAM cannot be used.
Region codes: Some DVD video discs
have a region code indicating where you
can use. If the DVD video disc is not
labeled “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it in
this DVD player. If you attempt to play an
inappropriate DVD video disc in this player, “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on
the screen. Even if the DVD video disc
does not have a region code, in some
cases you cannot use it.

Marks shown on DVD video discs:
Indicates NTSC format
of color TV.

Indicates the number
of audio tracks.

Indicates the number
of language subtitles.

Indicates the number
of angles.
Indicates the screen
to be selected.
Wide screen: 16:9
Standard: 4:3
Indicates regions in
which this video disc
can be played.
ALL: all countries
Number: region code

286

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY
DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc
that holds video. DVD video discs have
adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digital compression technologies.
The picture data is compressed by 1/40
on average and stored. Variable rate encoded technology in which the volume of
data assigned to the picture is changed
depending on the picture format has also
been adopted. Audio data is stored using
PCM and Dolby digital, which enables
higher quality of sound. Furthermore, multi−angle and multi−language features will
also help you enjoy the more advanced
technology of DVD video.
Viewer restrictions: This feature limits
what can be viewed in conformity with the
level of restrictions of the country. The
level of restrictions varies depending on
the DVD video disc. Some DVD video
discs cannot be played at all, or violent
scenes are skipped or replaced with other
scenes.
Level 1: DVD video discs for children can
be played.
Level 2—7: DVD video discs for children
and G−rated movies can be played.

Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can
be played.
Multi−angle feature: You can enjoy the
same scene at different angles.
Multi−language feature: You can select
the language of the subtitles and audio.
Region codes: Region codes are provided
on DVD players and DVD discs. If the
DVD video disc does not have the same
region code as the DVD player, you cannot play the disc on the DVD player. For
region codes.
Audio: This DVD player can play liner
PCM, Dolby digital, dts and MPEG audio
format DVD. Other decoded type cannot
be played.
Title and chapter: Video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs are divided in parts by title and chapter.
Title: The largest unit of the video and
audio programs stored on DVD video
discs. Usually, one piece of a movie, one
album, or one audio program is assigned
as a title.

Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and
the double−D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
E1992−1997 Dolby Laboratories. All
rights reserved.
This product incorporates copyright
protection technology that is protected
by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of
this copyright protection technology
must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision
Corporation. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
“dts” is a trademark of Digital Theater
Systems, Inc.

Chapter: A unit smaller than a title. A title
comprises plural chapters.

287

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Input terminal adapter

—Power outlet

The rear entertainment system plays videos and sound when your audio system
is connected to the input terminal adapter
on the rear console box. For details, refer
to the manufacturer’s instructions.

To use the input terminal adapter, open
the lid.
The input terminal adapter is composed of
3 input terminal adapters.
Yellow: Image input adapter
Red: Audio input adapter
White: Audio input adapter

NOTICE
Close the input terminal adapter lid
when the input terminal adapter is not
in use. Inserting anything other than
an appropriate plug that fits the
adapter may cause electrical failure or
short circuit.

This power outlet is designed for use as
a power supply for the audio device connected to the input terminal adapter.
The key must be in the “ON” position for
the power outlet to be used.
The maximum capacity for this power outlet is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to
use an appliance that requires more than
115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit
will activate and cut the power supply.
The power supply will restart automatically
when you use an appliance that operates
within the 115 VAC/100W limits.

288

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

NOTICE

Certain electrical appliances may cause
radio noise.

The power outlet is not designed for
the following electric appliances even if
their power consumption is under 115
VAC/100W. These appliances may not
operate properly.

D Appliances with high initial peak watt-

age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,
compressor−driven refrigerators, electric
pumps, electric tools, etc.

D Measuring devices which process pre-

cise data: medical equipment, measuring instruments, etc.

D Other appliances requiring an extremely

stable power supply: microcomputer−
controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.

289

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Headphone input jacks
CAUTION
Adjust the volume when you connect
the headphones to the jack. Loud
sounds may have a significant impact
on the human body.

You can enjoy the rear seat entertainment system with commercial headphones.

To adjust the volume of the headphones,
turn the knob. Turn right to increase the
volume. Turn left to decrease the volume.

To use the headphones, connect them to
the jack.

The maximum volume depends on the
type of headphones.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.

With some headphones generally available
in the marker, it may be difficult to catch
sound properly. Toyota recommends the
use of Toyota genuine headphone.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

290

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Audio/video system operating
hints
NOTICE
To ensure correct audio/video system
operations:
z Be careful not to spill beverages
over the audio system.
z Do not put anything other than a
cassette tape or Compact Disc into
the slot.
z Do not put anything other than a
DVD video, DVD audio, video CD,
dts−CD and audio CD into the DVD
player.
z The use of a cellular phone inside
or near the vehicle may cause a
noise from the speakers of the audio system which you are listening
to. However, this does not indicate
a malfunction.
RADIO RECEPTION
Usually, a problem with radio reception
does not mean there is a problem with
your radio—it is just the normal result of
conditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terrain
can interfere with FM reception. Power
lines or telephone wires can interfere with
AM signals. And of course, radio signals
have a limited range. The farther you are
from a station, the weaker its signal will
be. In addition, reception conditions
change constantly as your vehicle moves.
Here are some common reception problems that probably do not indicate a problem with your radio:
FM
Fading and drifting stations—Generally, the
effective range of FM is about 40 km (25
miles). Once outside this range, you may
notice fading and drifting, which increase
with the distance from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by distortion.
Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,
making it possible for two signals to reach
your antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a momentary flutter or
loss of reception.

Station swapping—If the FM signal you
are listening to is interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station
nearby on the FM band, your radio may
tune in the second station until the original signal can be picked up again.
AM
Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected by
the upper atmosphere—especially at night.
These reflected signals can interfere with
those received directly from the radio station, causing the radio station to sound
alternately strong and weak.
Station interference—When a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a
radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each
other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast.
Static—AM is easily affected by external
sources of electrical noise, such as high
tension power lines, lightening, or electrical motors. This results in static.

Static and fluttering—These occur when
signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or
other large objects. Increasing the bass
level may reduce static and fluttering.

291

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER
AND TAPES
For the best performance for your cassette player and tapes:
Clean the tape head and other parts regularly.

D A dirty tape head or tape path can

decrease sound quality and tangle your
cassette tapes. The easiest way to
clean them is by using a cleaning tape.
(A wet type is recommended.)

Use high−quality cassettes.

D Low−quality cassette tapes can cause

many problems, including poor sound,
inconsistent
playing
speed,
and
constant auto−reversing. They can also
get stuck or tangled in the cassette
player.

CARING FOR YOUR
PLAYER AND DISCS

COMPACT

DISC

D Type 2 and 3—Your compact disc play-

er is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7
in.) discs only.

D Extremely high temperatures can keep

damaged or tangled or if its label is
peeling off.

your compact disc player from working.
On hot days, use the air conditioning
to cool the vehicle interior before you
listen to a disc.

D Do not leave a cassette in the player

D Bumpy roads or other vibrations may

D Store cassettes in their cases and out

D If moisture gets into your compact disc

D Do not use a cassette if it has been

if you are not listening to it, especially
if it is hot outside.
of direct sunlight.

D Avoid using cassettes with a total play-

ing time longer than 100 minutes (50
minutes per side). The tape used in
these cassettes is thin and could get
stuck or tangled in the cassette player.

cause
skip.

your

compact disc

player to

player, you may not hear any sound
even though your compact disc player
appears to be working. Remove the
disc from the player and wait until it
dries.

CAUTION
Compact disc players use an invisible
laser beam which could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed
outside the unit. Be sure to operate
the player correctly.

292

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

DVD player
Audio CDs

DVD video discs

DVD audio discs

Compact disc player

D Use only compact discs marked as

Video CDs

D Use only discs marked as shown
above. The following products may not
be playable on your DVD player.
SACD
Copy−protected CD
CD−R (CD−Recordable)
CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)
CD−ROM
DVD−R
DVD+R
DVD+RW
DVD−RW
DVD−ROM
DVD−RAM

shown above. The following products
may not be playable on your compact
disc player.
Copy−protected CD
CD−R (CD−Recordable)
CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)
CD−ROM

293

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

NOTICE
Do not use special shaped, transparent/translucent, low quality or labeled
discs such as those shown in the illustrations. The use of such discs
may damage the player or changer, or
it may be impossible to eject the
disc.

Special shaped discs

Low quality discs

Transparent/translucent discs

Labeled discs

294

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Correct

Wrong

D Handle compact discs carefully, espe-

cially when you are inserting them.
Hold them on the edge and do not
bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints
on them, particularly on the shiny side.

D Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or

other disc damage could cause the
player to skip or to repeat a section of
a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the
disc up to the light.)

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a
soft, lint−free cloth that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line
from the center to the edge of the disc
(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,
lint−free cloth. Do not use a conventional
record cleaner or anti−static device.

D Remove discs from the compact disc

player when you are not listening to
them. Store them in their plastic cases
away from moisture, heat, and direct
sunlight.

295

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

296

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SECTION

1− 9

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Air conditioning system

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air flow selector settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel and rear vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

298
301
303
305

297

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Controls
1. Fan speed selector
2. Temperature selector
3. Air flow selector
4. “A/C” button (on some models)
5. Air intake selector button

298

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

4. Floor/Windshield—Air
flows
mainly
from the floor vents and windshield
vents.

Fan speed selector
Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—to
the right to increase, to the left to decrease.

Turning the air flow selector to the
floor/windshield position turns on the
defogging function with the purpose of
clearing the front view.

Temperature selector
Turn the knob to adjust the temperature—
to the right to warm, to the left to cool.

This position allows the air intake to
select FRESH automatically. This is to
clean up the front view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to
RECIRCULATE mode, press the air intake selector button once again.
Air flow selector
Turn the knob to select the vents used for
air flow.
1. Panel—Air flows mainly
instrument panel vents.

from

the

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floor
vents and the instrument panel vents.
3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor
vents.

It is recommended that you close the
lower vent. For details about this, see
“Instrument panel and rear vents” in
this Section.
Vehicles with “A/C” button—
Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears
the front view more quickly.

It is recommended that you close the
lower vent. For details about this, see
“Instrument panel vents” in this Section.

299

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from the
windshield vents.

Air intake selector button

Turning the air flow selector to the
windshield position turns on the defogging function with the purpose of clearing the front view.

The air intake selector button is used to
switch the air intake FRESH mode that
draws outside air into the system and
RECIRCULATED mode that recirculates
the air inside vehicle.

In this position, air intake selector
mode changes to FRESH automatically
to clean up the front view quickly. It is
not possible to return to RECIRCULATE
in this position.

To turn the air source to RECIRCULATED
mode, press the button. The indicator will
come on. To turn the air source to FRESH
mode, press the button again. The indicator will go off.

It is recommended that you close the
lower vent. For details about this, see
“Instrument panel vents” in this Section.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,
the air intake mode may change automatically to FRESH depending on the condition of the air conditioning system.

Vehicles with “A/C” button—

“A/C” button (on some models)

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears
the front view more quickly.

To turn on the air conditioning, press the
“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator
will come on. To turn the air conditioning
off, press the button again.

For details about air flow selector settings,
see “Air flow selector settings” described
below.

If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, there
is a problem in the air conditioning system
and the air conditioning automatically
shuts off. If this happens, take your
vehicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

300

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Air flow selector settings
"Standard and access cab models without rear console box

: See “Instrument panel vents” in this Section.

301

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

"Standard and access cab models with rear console box

∗:

: See “Instrument panel vents” in this Section.
On some models

302

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

"Double cab models

Operating tips
D To cool off your Toyota after it has

been parked in the hot sun, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes.
This vents the hot air, allowing the air
conditioning to cool the interior more
quickly.

D Make sure the air intake grilles in front
of the windshield are not blocked (by
leaves or snow, for example).

D On humid days, do not blow cold air

on the windshield. The windshield could
fog up because of the difference in air
temperature on the inside and outside
of the windshield.

D Keep the area under the front seats

clear to allow air to circulate throughout the vehicle.

D On cold days, set the fan speed to
high for a minute to help clear the
intake ducts of snow or moisture. This
can reduce the amount of fogging on
the windows.

D When driving on dusty roads, close all

: See “Instrument panel vents” in this Section.

windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
closing the windows, it is recommended
that the air intake selector be set to
FRESH and the fan speed selector to
any setting except “OFF”.

303

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D If following another vehicle on a dusty

road, or driving in windy and dusty
conditions, it is recommended that the
air intake selector be temporarily set to
RECIRCULATE, which will close off the
outside passage and prevent outside
air and dust from entering the vehicle
interior.

Air conditioning

Defogging

For best results, set controls to:

The inside of the windshield

Heating

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
Temperature—Towards COLD
(blue zone)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—ON

For best results, set controls to:

D For quick cooling, move the air intake

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
Temperature—Towards WARM
(red zone)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—FLOOR
Lower vent—CLOSED
Air conditioning—OFF

D For quick heating, select recirculated

air for a few minutes. To keep the
windows from fogging, select fresh after the vehicle interior has been
warmed.

D Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidified heating.

D Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat

the vehicle interior while defrosting or
defogging the windshield.

selector to recirculate for a few minutes.

Ventilation
For best results, set controls to:
Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
Temperature—Towards COLD
(blue zone)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—OFF

For best results, set controls to:
Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
Temperature—Towards WARM (red
zone) to heat; COLD
(blue zone) to cool
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Lower vent—CLOSED
Turning the air flow selector to the windshield or floor/windshield position turns on
the defogging function and fun speed may
increase with the purpose of clearing the
front view.
When turning the air flow selector to
windshield position, the air intake selects
FRESH automatically. This is to clean up
the front view more quickly. It is not
possible to return to RECIRCULATE in
this position.
Vehicles with “A/C” button—
Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears the
front view more quickly.

304

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Instrument panel and rear
vents
D On humid days, do not blow cold air

on the windshield—the difference between the outside and inside temperatures could make the fogging worse.

D To heat the vehicle interior while defrosting the windshield, choose floor/
windshield air flow.

Defrosting
The outside of the windshield
For best results, set controls to:
Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
Temperature—Towards WARM
(red zone)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Lower vent—CLOSED

Side vents

Turning the air flow selector to the windshield or floor/windshield position turns on
the defrosting function and fun speed may
with the purpose of clearing the front
view.
When turning the air flow selector to
windshield position, the air intake selects
FRESH automatically. This is to clean up
the front view more quickly. It is not
possible to return to RECIRCULATE in
this position.
Vehicles with “A/C” button—
Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears the
front view more quickly.

Lower vent

305

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Rear vents (double cab models only)

If air flow control is not satisfactory, check
the instrument panel and rear vents. The
instrument panel and rear vents may be
opened or closed as shown.
For removing frost or fog, it is recommended that you close the lower vent
when using the “Floor”, “Floor/Windshield”
or “Windshield” mode.

306

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SECTION

INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR
TOYOTA
Information before driving your Toyota
Off−road vehicle precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Break−in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel pump shut off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Three−way catalytic converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine exhaust cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Facts about engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Iridium−tipped spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake pad wear limit indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear step bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
StepSide bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limited−slip differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Your Toyota’s identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft prevention labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo and luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

340
341
341
343
344
344
345
346
347
347
354
354
354
355
355
356
357
358
366
367
369

339

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Off−road vehicle precautions
This vehicle has higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to
the height of its center of gravity to
make it capable of performing in a wide
variety of off−road applications. Specific
design characteristics give it a higher
center of gravity than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature
causes this type of vehicle to be more
likely to rollover. And, it has a significantly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles. An advantage of the
higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems. It is not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars any more than
low−slung sports cars designed to perform
satisfactorily
under
off−road
conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at
excessive speeds may cause rollover.

CAUTION
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

D In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-

son is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat
belt. Therefore, the driver and all
passengers should fasten their seat
belts whenever the vehicle is moving.

D Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-

vers, if at all possible. Failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle
rollover causing death or serious
injury.

D Avoid loading any items on the roof
that will raise the vehicle’s center
of gravity.

D Always slow down in gusty cross-

winds. Because of its profile and
higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side
winds than an ordinary passenger
car. Slowing down will allow you to
have better control.

340

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D When driving off−road or in rugged

terrain, do not drive at excessive
speeds, jump, make sharp turns,
strike objects, etc. This may cause
loss of control or vehicle rollover
causing death or serious injury. You
are also risking expensive damage
to your vehicle’s suspension and
chassis.

D Do not drive horizontally across

steep slopes. Driving straight up or
straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off−road vehicle) can tip over sideways much
more easily than forward or backward.

Break−in period

Fuel

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

FUEL TYPE

Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break−in. But following a few simple tips
for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add
to the future economy and long life of
your vehicle:

Your new vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.

D Avoid full throttle acceleration when
starting and driving.

D Avoid racing the engine.
D Try to avoid hard stops during the first

To help prevent gas station mix−ups, your
Toyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.
The special nozzle on pumps with unleaded fuel will fit it, but the larger standard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will
not.

D Do not drive slowly with the manual

At a minimum, the gasoline you use
should meet specifications of ASTM
D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93
in Canada.

D Do not drive for a long time at any

NOTICE

300 km (200 miles).

transmission in a high gear.

single speed, either fast or slow.

D Do not tow a trailer during the first 800
km (500 miles).

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of
leaded gasoline will cause the three−
way catalytic converter to lose its effectiveness and the emission control
system to function improperly. Also,
this can increase maintenance costs.

341

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

OCTANE RATING
1GR−FE engine: Select Octane Rating
87 (Research Octane Number 91) or
higher.
For
improved
vehicle
performance, the use of premium
unleaded gasoline with an Octane
Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number
96) or higher is recommended.
2UZ−FE engine: Select Octane Rating 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or higher.
Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating or research octane number lower
than stated above will cause persistent
heavy knocking. If it is severe, this will
lead to engine damage.
If your engine knocks...
If you detect heavy knocking even when
using the recommended fuel, or if you
hear steady knocking while holding a
steady speed on level roads, consult your
Toyota dealer.

GASOLINE
ADDITIVES

CONTAINING

DETERGENT

Toyota recommends the use of gasoline
that contains detergent additives to
avoid build−up of engine deposits.
However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.
contains detergent additives to keep clean
and/or clean intake systems.
QUALITY GASOLINE
Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,
Europe and Japan have developed a
specification for quality fuel named
World−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that
is expected to be applied world wide.
The WWFC consists of four categories
that depend on required emission levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been
adopted. The WWFC improves air quality by providing for better emissions in
vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction
through better vehicle performance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE is
available in many areas.
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner
burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions, and improve air quality.
OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE
Toyota allows the use of oxygenate
blended gasoline where the oxygenate
content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%
MTBE. If you use gasohol in your
Toyota, be sure that it has an octane
rating no lower than 87.
Toyota does not recommend the use of
gasoline containing methanol.

However, occasionally, you may notice
light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is normal
and there is no need for concern.

342

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Fuel pump shut off system
GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT
Some gasoline contain an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use of
gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.

NOTICE
z Do not use gasohol other than
stated above. It will cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
z If driveability problems occur (poor
hot starting, vaporizing, engine
knock, etc.), discontinue the use.
z Take care not to spill gasohol during refueling. Gasohol may cause
paint damage.

GASOLINE QUALITY
In a very few cases, you may experience
driveability problems caused by the particular gasoline that you are using. If you
continue to have unacceptable driveability,
try changing gasoline brands. If this does
not rectify your problem, then consult your
Toyota dealer.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY
100 L (26.4 gal., 22.0 Imp. gal.)

The fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine to minimize the
risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls
or an airbag inflates upon collision. To
restart the engine after the fuel pump shut
off system activates, turn the ignition
switch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and start
it.

CAUTION
Inspect the ground under the vehicle
before restarting the engine. If you
find that liquid has leaked onto the
ground, it is the fuel system has
been damaged and it is in need of
repair. In this case, do not restart the
engine.

343

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Operation in foreign countries

Three−way catalytic converters

If you plan to drive your Toyota in
another country...

The three−way catalytic converter is an
emission control device installed in the
exhaust system.

First, comply with the vehicle registration
laws.

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the
exhaust gas.

Second, confirm the availability of the correct fuel (unleaded and minimum octane
number).

CAUTION

D Keep people and combustible mate-

rials away from the exhaust pipe
while the engine is running. The
exhaust gas is very hot.

1GR−FE engine

D Do not idle or park your vehicle
over anything that might burn easily such as grass, leaves, paper or
rags.

2UZ−FE engine

344

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Engine exhaust cautions
NOTICE
A large amount of unburned gases
flowing into the three−way catalytic
converter may cause it to overheat
and create a fire hazard. To prevent
this and other damage, observe the
following precautions:
z Use only unleaded gasoline.
z Do not drive with an extremely low
fuel level; running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, creating an excessive load on the three−
way catalytic converter.
z Do not allow the engine to run at
idle speed for more than 20 minutes.
z Avoid racing the engine.
z Do not push−start or pull−start your
vehicle.
z Do not turn off the ignition while
the vehicle is moving.

z Keep your engine in good running
order. Malfunctions in the engine
electrical system, electronic ignition
system/distributor ignition system
or fuel systems could cause an extremely high three−way catalytic
converter temperature.

CAUTION

D Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.

It contains carbon monoxide, which
is a colorless and odorless gas. It
can cause unconsciousness or even
death.

z If the engine becomes difficult to
start or stalls frequently, take your
vehicle in for a check−up as soon
as possible. Remember, your Toyota
dealer knows your vehicle and its
three−way catalytic converter system best.

D Make sure the exhaust system has

z To ensure that the three−way catalytic converter and the entire emission control system operate properly, your vehicle must receive the
periodic inspections required by the
Toyota Maintenance Schedule. For
scheduled maintenance information,
refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

D Do not run the engine in a garage

no holes or loose connections. The
system should be checked from
time to time. If you hit something,
or notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust, have the system
checked immediately.
or enclosed area except for the
time needed to drive the vehicle in
or out. The exhaust gases cannot
escape, making this a particularly
dangerous situation.

D Do not remain for a long time in a

parked vehicle with the engine running. If it is unavoidable, however,
do so only in an unconfined area
and adjust the heating or cooling
system to force outside air into the
vehicle.

345

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Facts about engine oil
consumption
D To allow proper operation of your

vehicle’s ventilation system, keep
the inlet grilles in front of the windshield clear of snow, leaves, or other obstructions.

D If you smell exhaust fumes in the

vehicle, drive with the windows
open. Have the cause immediately
located and corrected.

D Toyota does not recommend occu-

pying the rear cargo area when it
is fitted with a slide−in camper,
camper shell or other type cover
while the engine is running. This
caution applies to both driving and
stopped or parked situations with
the engine running. Particular care
should be taken to prevent exhaust
gases from entering camper bodies,
trailers or other enclosures on or
around your vehicle. If exhaust
fumes are detected, open all windows and thoroughly ventilate the
area.

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL
Engine oil has the primary functions of
lubricating and cooling the inside of the
engine, and plays a major role in maintaining the engine in proper working order.
ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION
It is normal that an engine should consume some engine oil during normal
engine operation. The causes of oil
consumption in a normal engine are as
follows.

D Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston

rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil
is left on the cylinder wall when a piston moves downwards in the cylinder.
High negative pressure generated when
the vehicle is decelerating sucks some
of this oil into the combustion chamber.
This oil as well as some part of the oil
film left on the cylinder wall is burned
by the high temperature combustion
gases during the combustion process.

D Oil is also used to lubricate the stems

of the intake valves. Some of this oil
is sucked into the combustion chamber
together with the intake air and is
burned along with the fuel. High temperature exhaust gases also burn the
oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve
stems.

The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the viscosity of the oil, the
quality of the oil and the conditions the
vehicle is driven under.
More oil is consumed by high−speed driving and frequent acceleration and deceleration.
A new engine consumes more oil, since
its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls
have not become conditioned.
Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000
km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp. qt./600
miles)
When judging the amount of oil consumption, note that the oil may become
diluted and make it difficult to judge
the true level accurately.
As an example, if a vehicle is used for
repeated short trips, and consumes a normal amount of oil, the dipstick may not
show any drop in the oil level at all, even
after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This
is because the oil is gradually becoming
diluted with fuel or moisture, making it
appear that the oil level has not changed.
The diluting ingredients evaporate out
when the vehicle is then driven at high
speeds, as on an expressway, making it
appear that oil is excessively consumed
after driving at high speeds.

346

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Iridium−tipped spark plugs
(2UZ−FE engine)

Brake system

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVEL
CHECK

Without the
system—

One of the most important points in proper vehicle maintenance is to keep the engine oil at the optimum level so that oil
function will not be impaired. Therefore, it
is essential that the oil level be checked
regularly. Toyota recommends that the oil
level be checked every time you refuel
the vehicle.

The tandem master cylinder brake system
is a hydraulic system with two separate
sub−systems. If either sub−system should
fail, the other will still work. However, the
pedal will be harder to press, and your
stopping distance will increase. Also, the
brake system warning light may come on.

For detailed information on oil level check,
see “Checking the engine oil level” in Section 7−2.

stability

control

CAUTION

NOTICE
Failure to check the oil level regularly
could lead to serious engine trouble
due to insufficient oil.

vehicle

Your engine is fitted with iridium−tipped
spark plugs.

NOTICE
Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs
and do not adjust gaps for your engine performance and smooth driveability.

Do not drive your vehicle with only a
single brake system. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.
With the vehicle stability control system—
This brake system has 2 independent hydraulic circuits. If either circuit should fail,
the other will still work. However, the pedal will be harder to press, and your stopping distance will increase. Also, the
brake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION
Do not drive your vehicle with only a
single brake system. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.

347

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

BRAKE BOOSTER (without the vehicle
stability control system)

BRAKE BOOSTER (with the vehicle stability control system)

The brake booster uses engine vacuum to
power−assist the brakes. If the engine
should quit while you are driving, you can
bring the vehicle to a stop with normal
pedal pressure. There is enough reserved
vacuum for one or two stops—but no
more!

D Do not pump the brake pedal if the

The brake booster uses brake fluid pressurized by the pump to power−assist the
brakes. If the brake booster fails during
driving, the brake system warning light
comes on and buzzer sounds continuously. In this case, the brakes may not work
properly. If they do not work well, depress
the brake pedal firmly. If the brake system
warning light comes on, immediately stop
your vehicle and contact your Toyota dealer.

D Even if the power assist is com-

The brake system warning light may stay
on for about 60 seconds after the ignition
key is turned to the “ON” position. It is
normal if the light turns off after a while.

CAUTION
engine stalls. Each push on the
pedal uses up your reserved vacuum.
pletely lost, the brakes will still
work. But you will have to push the
pedal hard, much harder than normal. And your braking distance will
increase.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the brake system warning
light and buzzer. It is normal if the light
turns off and the buzzer stops sounding
after a few seconds.
You may hear a small sound in the engine
compartment after the engine is started or
the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly.
This is a pump pulsating sound of the
brake system, and it is not a malfunction.

CAUTION

D Do not pump the brake pedal if the

engine stalls. Each push on the
pedal uses up your brake fluid
pressure reserve.

D Even if the power assist is com-

pletely lost, the brakes will still
work. But you will have to push the
pedal hard, much harder than normal. And your braking distance will
increase.

ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (without
the vehicle stability control system)
The anti−lock brake system is designed
to help prevent lock−up of the wheels
during a sudden braking or braking on
slippery road surfaces. This assists in
providing directional stability and steering performance of the vehicle under
these circumstances.

348

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Effective way to press the ABS brake
pedal: When the anti−lock brake system
function is in action, you may feel the
brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.
In this situation, to let the anti−lock
brake system work for you, just hold the
brake pedal down more firmly. Do not
pump the brake in a panic stop. This
will result in reduced braking performance.
The anti−lock brake system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated
to a speed in excess of approximately 10
km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
vehicle decelerates to a speed below
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
Depressing the brake pedal on slippery
road surfaces such as on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site,
joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day
tends to activate the anti−lock brake system.

When the anti−lock brake system is activated, the following conditions may
occur. They do not indicate a malfunction of the system:

D You may hear the anti−lock brake sys-

tem operating and feel the brake pedal
pulsating and the vibrations of the vehicle body and steering wheel. You
may also hear the motor sound in the
engine compartment even after the vehicle is stopped.

D At the end of the anti−lock brake system activation, the brake pedal may
move a little forward.

CAUTION
Do not overestimate the anti−lock
brake system: Although the anti−lock
brake system assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to
drive with all due care and maintain
a moderate speed and safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you, because there are limits to the vehicle
stability and effectiveness of steering
wheel operation even with the anti−
lock brake system on.
If tire grip performance exceeds its
capability, or if hydroplaning occurs
during high speed driving in the rain,
the anti−lock brake system does not
provide vehicle control.

You may hear a click or motor sound in
the engine compartment for a few seconds
when the engine is started or just after
the vehicle begins to move. This means
that the anti−lock brake system is in the
self−check mode, and does not indicate a
malfunction.

349

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

“ABS” Warning light

Anti−lock brake system is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate
speed and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you.
Compared with vehicles without an
anti−lock brake system, your vehicle
may require a longer stopping distance in the following cases:

The light comes on when the ignition key
is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−
lock brake system works properly, the
light turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter, if the system malfunctions, the light
comes on again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate,
but the brake system still operates conventionally.

D Driving on rough, gravel or snow−
covered roads.

D Driving with tire chains installed.
D Driving over the steps such as the

Type A

joints on the road.

D Driving on roads where the road
surface is pitted or has other differences in surface height.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate
so that the wheels could lock up during
a sudden braking or braking on slippery
road surfaces.
If either of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
somewhere in the components monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible to service the vehicle.

Install all 4 tires of specified size at
appropriate pressure: The anti−lock
brake system detects vehicle speeds
using the speed sensors for respective wheels’ turning speeds. The use
of tires other than specified may fail
to detect the accurate turning speed
resulting in a longer stopping distance.

D The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, or remains on.

Type B

D The light comes on while you are driving.

350

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.
ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (with the
vehicle stability control system)
The anti−lock brake system is designed
to help prevent lock−up of the wheels
during a sudden braking or braking on
slippery road surfaces. This assists in
providing directional stability and steering performance of the vehicle under
these circumstances.
Effective way to press the ABS brake
pedal: When the anti−lock brake system
function is in action, you may feel the
brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.
In this situation, to let the anti−lock
brake system work for you, just hold the
brake pedal down more firmly. Do not
pump the brake in a panic stop. This
will result in reduced braking performance.
The anti−lock brake system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated
to a speed in excess of approximately 10
km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
vehicle decelerates to a speed below
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery
road surfaces such as on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site,
joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day
tends to activate the anti−lock brake system.
You may hear a click or motor sound in
the engine compartment for a few seconds
when the engine is started or just after
the vehicle begins to move. This means
that the anti−lock brake system is in the
self− check mode, and does not indicate
a malfunction.
When the anti−lock brake system is activated, the following conditions may
occur. They do not indicate a malfunction of the system:

D You may hear the anti−lock brake sys-

CAUTION
Do not overestimate the anti−lock
brake system: Although the anti−lock
brake system assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to
drive with all due care and maintain
a moderate speed and safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you, because there are limits to the vehicle
stability and effectiveness of steering
wheel operation even with the anti−
lock brake system on.
If tires grip performance exceeds its
capability, or if hydroplaning occurs
during high speed driving in the rain,
the anti−lock brake system does not
provide vehicle control.

D At the end of the anti−lock brake system activation, the brake pedal may
move a little forward.

351

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

“ABS” warning light

The light comes on when the ignition key
is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−
lock brake system and the brake assist
system work properly, the light turns off
after a few seconds. Thereafter, if the
systems malfunctions, the light comes on
again.

D Driving on rough, gravel or snow−
covered roads.

D Driving with tire chains installed.
D Driving over the steps such as the

Type A

joints on the road.

D Driving on roads where the road

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system, the brake assist
system, the traction control system,
“AUTO LSD” system, the vehicle stability
control system do not operate, but the
brake system still operates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate
so that the wheels could lock up during
a sudden braking or braking on slippery
road surfaces.

surface is pitted or has other differences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size at
appropriate pressure: The anti−lock
brake system detects vehicle speeds
using the speed sensors for respective wheels’ turning speed. The use
of tires other than specified may fail
to detect the accurate turning speed
resulting in a longer stopping distance.

“VSC TRC” warning light may come on
with the “ABS” warning light (brake assist
system warning light) when there is a malfunction somewhere in the anti−lock brake
system (brake assist system).

Type B

352

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, or remains on.

D The light comes on while you are driving.

A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

Either of the following conditions may
occur, but do not indicate a malfunction:

D The light may stay on for about 60

seconds after the ignition key is turned
to the “ON” position. It is normal if it
turns off after a while.

D Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if it
turns off after about a few seconds.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM (with the vehicle stability control system)
When you slam the brakes on, the
brake assist system judges as an emergency stop and provides more powerful
braking for a driver who cannot hold
down the brake pedal firmly.
When you slam the brakes on, more powerful braking will be applied. At this time,
you may hear a sound in the engine
compartment and feel the vibrations of the
brake pedal. This does not indicate a malfunction.
The brake assist system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to
a speed in excess of approximately 10
km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
vehicle decelerates to a speed below
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
For an explanation of this system’s warning light, see “Service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers” in Section 1−6.

353

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Brake pad wear limit
indicators

The brake pad wear limit indicators on
your disc brakes give a warning noise
when the brake pads are worn to where
replacement is required.
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise
while driving, have the brake pads
checked and replaced by your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible. Expensive rotor damage can result if the pads are not
replaced when necessary.

Rear step bumper

StepSide bed

The rear step bumper is for rear end
protection and easier step−up loading.

The side step is for easier step−up
loading.

CAUTION

D Do not allow more than one person

For models equipped with a StepSide
bed:

to get on the rear step bumper at
a time. It is designed for only one
person.

D Never drive the vehicle with anyone
on the rear step bumper.

D Do not allow more than one person
to get on the side step. Do not
exceed the maximum weight limit of
136 kg (300 lb.) on the side step.

D Never drive the vehicle with anyone
on the side steps.

D Do not stand on the side steps
while the vehicle is moving.

354

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Limited−slip differential

Your Toyota’s identification—
—Vehicle identification number

Some Toyotas are equipped with a limited−slip differential. If one of the rear
wheels begins to spin, the limited−slip differential is designed to aid traction by
automatically transmitting driving force to
the other rear wheel. If you are not sure
whether your vehicle is equipped with one,
you can ask your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION
Do not start or run the engine while
your vehicle is supported by a jack.
The vehicle could be driven off the
jack and could pose a danger or result in serious injury.

NOTICE
Use only a spare tire of the same
size, construction and load capacity
as the original tires on your Toyota
because damage to the limited−slip
differential could possibly occur with
another tire type.

The vehicle identification number (VIN)
is the legal identifier for your vehicle.
This number is on the left top of the
instrument panel, and can be seen
through the windshield from outside.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
also on the Certification Label.

This is the primary identification number
for your Toyota. It is used in registering
the ownership of your vehicle.

355

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Theft prevention labels
(except for Canada)

—Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown.

Your new vehicle carries theft prevention labels which are approximately 47
mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).
The purpose of these labels is to reduce
the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from
stolen vehicles. The label is designed so
that once it is applied to a surface, any
attempt to remove it will result in destroying the integrity of the label. Transferring
these labels intact from one part to another, will be impossible.

1GR−FE engine

NOTICE
You should not attempt to remove the
theft prevention labels as it may violate certain state or federal laws.

2UZ−FE engine

356

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Suspension and chassis
CAUTION
Do not modify the suspension/chassis
with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It
can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting in loss of control.

357

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Tire information—
—Tire symbols
This illustration indicates typical tire
symbols.
1. Tire size—For details, see “—Tire
size” in this Section.
2. DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)—For details, see
“—DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)” in this Section.
3. Uniform tire quality grading—
For details, see “Uniform tire quality grading” that follows
4. The location of the tread wear
indicators—For details, see
“Checking and replacing tires” in
Section 7−2.
5. Tire ply composition and materials—Plies mean a layer of rubber−coated parallel cords. Cords
mean the strands forming the plies
in the tire.
6. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—A
radial tire has “RADIAL” on the
sidewall. A tire not marked with
“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

358

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)
7. “TUBELESS”
or
“TUBE
TYPE”—A tubeless tire does not
have a tube inside the tire and air
is directly filled in the tire. A tube
type tire has a tube inside the tire
and the tube maintains the air
pressure.
8. Load limit at maximum cold tire
inflation pressure—For details,
see “Checking and replacing tires”
in Section 7−2.
9. Maximum cold tire inflation
pressure—This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. For details about recommended
cold
tire
inflation
pressure, see “Tires” in Section 8.
10.Summer tire or all season
tire—An all season tire has “M+S”
on the sidewall. The tire not
marked with “M+S” is a summer
tire. For details, see “Types of
tires” in this Section.

The “DOT” symbol certifies that the
tire conforms to applicable Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

This illustration indicates typical DOT
and Tire Identification Number (TIN).
1. “DOT” symbol
2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)
3. Tire manufacturer’s identification
mark
4. Tire size code
5. Manufacturer’s optional tire type
code
6. Manufacturing week
7. Manufacturing year

359

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Tire size

This illustration indicates typical tire
size.
1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,
T=Temporary use)
2. Section width (in millimeters)
3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section
width)
4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,
D=Diagonal)
5. Wheel diameter (in inches)
6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one
letter)

—Name of each section of tire

1. Section width
2. Tire height
3. Wheel diameter

1. Bead
2. Sidewall
3. Shoulder
4. Tread
5. Belt
6. Inner liner
7. Reinforcing rubber
8. Carcass
9. Rim lines
10.Bead wires
11. Chafer

360

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Uniform tire quality grading
This information has been prepared
in accordance with regulations issued
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides
the purchasers and/or prospective
purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer
any questions you may have as you
read this information.
DOT quality grades—All passenger
vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality
grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear
200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear—The treadwear grade is
a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear
one and a half (1−1/2) times as well
on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C—The traction
grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C, and they represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and
does not include cornering (turning)
traction.

361

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Temperature A, B, C—The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature
can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No.109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for
this tire are established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.

362

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term

Meaning

Accessory weight

the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be
replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power
windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items
are available as factory−installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Cold tire inflation pressure

tire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile
under that condition

Curb weight

the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight optional engine

Intended outboard sidewall

(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular
side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Maximum inflation pressure

the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it
is shown on the sidewall of the tire

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

the
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

sum of—
curb weight;
accessory weight;
vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight

363

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Tire related term

Meaning

Normal occupant weight

68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second
column of Table 1 that follows

Occupant distribution

distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table
1 that follows

Production options weight

the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing
over 2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace,
not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including
heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special
trim

Recommended inflation pressure

cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Rim

a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads
are seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter)

nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation

rim diameter and width

Rim type designation

the industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width

nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity or payload)

the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle
its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two

364

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Tire related term

Meaning

Vehicle normal load on the tire

the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle
its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight
(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

Weather side

the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Table 1—Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating capacity,
number of occupants

Vehicle normal load, number of
occupants

Occupant distribution in a normally
loaded vehicle

2 through 4

2 in front

5 through 10

2 in front, 1 in second seat

365

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load
capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. Follow the
load limits shown below.
Total load capacity (payload)
Total load capacity means combined
weight of occupants, cargo and luggage. Tongue load is included when
trailer towing. For the total load capacity about your vehicle, see “Payload” in Section 8.
Seating capacity:
Standard cab models
Total 3
Access cab and double cab models
Models with bench type front seats:
Total 6 (Front 3, Rear 3)
Models with separate front
seats:
Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)

Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose
estimated average weight is 68 kg
(150 lb.) per person. Depending on
the weight of each person, the seating capacity given may exceed the
total load capacity.
NOTICE

CAUTION
Do not apply the load more than
each load limit. That may cause
not only damage to the tires, but
also deterioration to the steering
ability and braking ability, which
may cause an accident.

Even if the number of occupants
are within the seating capacity,
do not exceed the total load capacity.
Towing capacity
Towing capacity means the maximum
gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus
its cargo weight) that your vehicle is
able to tow. For the towing capacity
about your vehicle, see “Towing capacity” in Section 8.
Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the size (weight)
and the number of occupants. For details, see “Capacity and distribution”
that follows.

366

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Cargo and luggage—
—Stowage precautions
When stowing cargo and luggage in
the vehicle, observe the following:
D Put cargo and luggage in the rear
deck when at all possible. Be sure
all items are secured in place.
D Be careful to keep the vehicle balanced. Locating the weight as far
forward as possible helps maintain
balance.
D For better fuel economy, do not
carry unneeded weight.
CAUTION
D To prevent cargo and luggage
from sliding forward during
braking, do not stack anything
behind the front seats higher
than the seatbacks (access and
double cab models). Keep cargo and luggage low, as close
to the floor as possible.

—Capacity and distribution
D Never allow anyone to ride in
the rear deck or luggage
compartment (double cab models only). It is not designed for
passengers. They should ride
in their seats with their seat
belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely
to suffer serious bodily injury,
in the event of sudden braking
or a collision.
D Do not drive with objects left
on top of the instrument panel.
They may interfere with the
driver’s field of view. Or they
may move during sharp vehicle
acceleration or turning, and impair the driver’s control of the
vehicle. In an accident they
may injure the vehicle occupants.

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) – (Total weight of occupants)
STEPS
FOR
DETERMINING
CORRECT LOAD LIMIT
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example,
if the “XXX” amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400–750 (5x150)=650 lbs).

367

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
For details about trailer towing, see
“Trailer towing” in Section 3.

Cargo
capacity
Total load
capacity
EXAMPLE ON YOUR VEHICLE
In case that 2 people with the combined weight of A kg (lb.) are riding
in your vehicle with the total load capacity of B kg (lb.), the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C kg (lb.) as follows:
B kg (lb.) − A kg (lb.) = C kg (lb.)
From this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D
kg (lb.) get on, the available cargo
and luggage load will be reduced E
kg (lb.) as follows:
C kg (lb.) − D kg (lb.) = E kg (lb.)

As shown in the above example, if the
number of occupants increases, the
cargo and luggage load equaling the
combined weight of occupants who
got on later must be reduced. In other
words, if the increase in the number
of occupants causes the excess of
the total load capacity (combined
weight of occupants plus cargo and
luggage load), you have to reduce the
cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
For details about total load capacity,
see “Vehicle load limits” in this Section.
CAUTION
Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load
is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. That may cause not only damage to the tire but also deterioration to the steering ability due to
unbalance of the vehicle, causing
an accident.

368

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Types of tires
Determine what kind of tires your
vehicle is originally equipped with.
1. Summer tires
Summer tires are high−speed capability tires best suited to highway driving
under dry conditions.
Since summer tires do not have the
same traction performance as snow
tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow−covered or icy roads.
For driving on snow−covered or icy
roads, we recommend using snow
tires. If installing snow tires, be sure
to replace all four tires.
2. All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be
adequate for driving in most winter
conditions, as well as for use all year
round.

All season tires, however, do not have
adequate
traction
performance
compared with snow tires in heavy or
loose snow. Also, all season tires fall
short in acceleration and handling
performance compared with summer
tires in highway driving.
The details about how to distinguish
summer tires from all season tires are
described “—Tire symbols” in Section
2.
CAUTION
D Do not mix summer and all season tires on your vehicle as
this can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting
in loss of control.
D Do not use tires other than the
manufacturer’s
designated
tires, and never mix tires or
wheels of the sizes different
from the originals.

369

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

370

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SECTION
STARTING AND DRIVING

Starting and driving
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips for driving in various conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off−road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer . . . . . . . . . . . . .

372
372
373
375
376
377
378
389

371

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Before starting the engine
1. Check the area around the vehicle before entering it.
2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,
seat cushion angle, head restraint
height and steering wheel angle.
3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view
mirrors.
4. Lock all doors.
5. Fasten seat belts.

How to start the engine—
—Cranking hold function (with
automatic transmission)
Once you turn the ignition key to “START”
position and release it, the cranking hold
function continues to crank the engine in
“ON” position until it starts.
The function stops cranking the engine
after about 25 seconds maximum if the
engine has not started yet. When you
crank the engine again, wait a few seconds and restart it.
If you hold the key in “START” position,
the function will keep cranking for about
30 seconds maximum.

(a) Before cranking
1. Apply the parking brake firmly.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Manual transmission: Press the clutch
pedal to the floor and shift the transmission into neutral. Hold the clutch
pedal to the floor until the engine is
started. A starter safety device will prevent the starter from operating if the
clutch pedal is not fully depressed.
Automatic transmission: Put the selector lever in “P”. If you need to restart the engine while the vehicle is
moving, put the selector lever in “N”.
A starter safety device will prevent the
starter from operating if the selector
lever is in any drive position.
4. Automatic transmission only: Depress the brake pedal and hold it to
the floor until driving off.

372

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

(b) Starting the engine
Before starting the engine, be sure to follow the instructions in “(a) Before cranking”.
Normal starting procedure
The multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system in your
engine automatically controls the proper
air−fuel mixture for starting. You can start
a cold or hot engine as follows:
With manual transmission—With your foot
off the accelerator pedal, crank the engine
by turning the ignition key to “START”
position. Release it when the engine
starts.
With automatic transmission—With your
foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to “START” position, then release it.
Engine should be warmed up by driving,
not in idle. For warming up, drive with
smoothly turning engine until engine coolant temperature is within normal range.

NOTICE
z With manual transmission only—Do
not crank for more than 30 seconds
at a time. This may overheat the
starter and wiring systems.
z Do not race a cold engine.
z If the engine becomes difficult to
start or stalls frequently, have the
engine checked immediately.

Tips for driving in various
conditions
D Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.

This will allow you much better control.

D Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-

sible, at a right angle. Avoid driving
onto high, sharp−edged objects and
other road hazards. Failure to do so
can lead to severe tire damage such
as a tire burst.
Drive slowly when passing over bumps
or travelling on a bumpy road. Otherwise, the impact could cause severe
damage to the tires and/or wheels.

D When parking on a hill, turn the front

wheels until they touch the curb so
that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the
parking brake, and place the transmission in “P” (automatic) or in first or
reverse (manual). If necessary, block
the wheels.

If the engine stalls...
Simply restart it, using the correct procedure given in normal starting.
If the engine will not start...
See “If your vehicle will not start” in Section 4.

373

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D Washing your vehicle or driving through

deep water may get the brakes wet. To
see whether they are wet, check that
there is no traffic near you, and then
press the pedal lightly. If you do not
feel a normal braking force, the brakes
are probably wet. To dry them, drive
the vehicle cautiously while lightly
pressing the brake pedal with the parking brake applied. If they still do not
work safely, pull to the side of the road
and call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

D Four−wheel drive models only—Toyota

recommends not using four−wheel drive
on dry hard−surfaced roads, because
four−wheel driving will cause unnecessary noise and wear, and poor fuel
economy.

D Four−wheel drive models only—In cold

temperatures, noise may occur when
driving in two−wheel drive before the
transfer is warmed up. Therefore, first
drive in four−wheel drive until the
transfer is warmed up.

CAUTION

D Before driving off, make sure that

the parking brake is fully released
and the parking brake reminder
light is off.

D Do not leave your vehicle unat-

tended while the engine is running.

D Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. It can cause
dangerous overheating, needless
wear, and poor fuel economy.

D To drive down a long or steep hill,

reduce your speed and downshift.
Remember, if you ride the brakes
excessively, they may overheat and
not work properly.

D Be careful when accelerating, up-

shifting, downshifting or braking on
a slippery surface. Sudden acceleration or engine braking could cause
the vehicle to skid or spin.

D Do not drive in excess of the speed

limit. Even if the legal speed limit
permits it, do not drive over 140
km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle
has high−speed capability tires.
Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may
result in tire failure, loss of control
and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine
whether the tires on your vehicle
are high−speed capability tires or
not before driving at such speeds.

D Do not continue normal driving

when the brakes are wet. If they are
wet, your vehicle will require a
longer stopping distance, and it
may pull to one side when the
brakes are applied. Also, the parking brake will not hold the vehicle
securely.

374

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Off−road driving precautions
When driving your vehicle off−road, please
observe the following precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help
prevent the closure of areas to off−road
vehicles.

D U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of

a. Drive your vehicle only in areas where
off−road vehicles are permitted to travel.

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

b. Respect private property. Get owner’s
permission before entering private property.
c. Do not enter areas that are closed.
Honor gates, barriers and signs that restrict travel.
d. Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques should
be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to roads.
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and
Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information pertaining
to driving your vehicle off−road, consult
the following organizations.

D State and Local Parks and Recreation
Departments

Land Management

CAUTION

D Drive carefully when off the road.

Do not take unnecessary risks by
driving in dangerous places.

D Do not grip the steering wheel

spokes when driving off−road. A
bad bump could jerk the wheel and
injure your hands. Keep both hands
and especially your thumbs on the
outside of the rim.

D Always check your brakes for effec-

tiveness immediately after driving in
sand, mud, water or snow.

D After driving through tall grass,

mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check
that there is no grass, bush, paper,
rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or
trapped on the underbody. Clear off
any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with
these materials trapped or adhering
to the underbody, a breakdown or
fire could occur.

D In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-

son is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat
belt. Therefore, the driver and all
passengers should fasten their seat
belts whenever the vehicle is moving.

D When driving off−road or in rugged

D State Motor Vehicle Bureau
D Recreational Vehicle Clubs
375

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Winter driving tips
NOTICE
z If driving through water, such as
when crossing shallow streams,
first check the depth of the water
and the bottom of the river bed for
firmness. Drive slowly and avoid
deep water.
z Take all necessary safety measures
to ensure that water damage to the
engine or other components does
not occur.
Water entering the engine air intake
will cause severe engine damage.
Water can wash the grease from
wheel bearings, causing rusting and
premature failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission
and transfer case, reducing the gear
oil’s lubricating qualities.
z Sand and mud that has accumulated
in brake drums and around brake
discs may affect braking efficiency
and may damage brake system components.

z Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off−road
driving that has taken you through
rough terrain, sand, mud, or water.
For
scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Scheduled
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement”.

Make sure your coolant is properly protected against freezing.
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,
and non−borate coolant with long−life
hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant
with
long−life
hybrid
organic
acid
technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.)
See “Checking the engine coolant level” in
Section 7−2 for details of coolant type
selection.
For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and
50% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −35_C
(−31_F).
For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and
45% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −42_C
(−44_F).

NOTICE
Do not use plain water alone.

376

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Dinghy towing
Check the condition of the battery and
cables.
Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of
any battery, so it must be in top shape
to provide enough power for winter starting. Section 7−3 tells you how to visually
inspect the battery. Your Toyota dealer
and most service stations will be pleased
to check the level of charge.
Make sure the engine oil viscosity is
suitable for the cold weather.
See Section 7−2 for recommended viscosity. Leaving a heavy summer oil in your
vehicle during winter months may cause
harder starting. If you are not sure about
which oil to use, call your Toyota dealer—they will be pleased to help.
Keep the door locks from freezing.
Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into the
locks to keep them from freezing. To open
a frozen lock, try heating the key before
inserting it.

NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any
other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.
Do not use your parking brake when
there is a possibility it could freeze.
When parking, put the transmission into
“P” (automatic) or into first or reverse
(manual) and block the front wheels. Do
not use the parking brake, or snow or
water accumulated in and around the
parking brake mechanism may freeze,
making it hard to release.
Keep ice and snow from accumulating
under the fenders.
Ice and snow built up under your fenders
can make steering difficult. During bad
winter driving, stop and check under the
fenders occasionally.

Use a washer fluid containing an antifreeze solution.

Depending on where you are driving,
we recommend you carry some emergency equipment.

This product is available at your Toyota
dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow
the manufacturer’s directions for how
much to mix with water.

Some of the things you might put in the
vehicle are tire chains, window scraper,
bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,
jumper cables, etc.

Your vehicle is not designed to be
dinghy towed (with four wheels on the
ground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE
Do not tow your vehicle with four
wheels on the ground. This may
cause serious damage to your vehicle.

377

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a
passenger−and−load−carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on
handling, performance, braking, durability
and driving economy (fuel consumption,
etc.). Your safety and satisfaction depend
on the proper use of correct equipment
and cautious driving habits. For your safety and the safety of others, you must not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Ask your
local Toyota dealer for further details before towing.
We recommend you use a weight distributing hitch when towing to keep your vehicle level with the ground.

NOTICE
When towing a trailer, be sure to consult your Toyota dealer for further information on additional requirements
such as a towing kit, etc.

WEIGHT LIMITS
Before towing, make sure the total trailer weight, gross combination weight,
gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight
and trailer tongue load are all within
the limits.
The total trailer weight and tongue load
can be measured with platform scales
found at highway weighing stations, building supply companies, trucking companies,
junk yards, etc.

CAUTION

D The maximum gross trailer weight
(trailer weight plus cargo weight)
must never exceed the following.
1GR−FE engine

2UZ−FE engine
Two−wheel drive models
Standard cab models
Without towing package
2494 kg (5500 lb.)
With towing package
3311 kg (7300 lb.)
Access cab models
Without towing package
2494 kg (5500 lb.)
With towing package
3311 kg (7300 lb.)
Double cab models
Without towing package
2358 kg (5200 lb.)
With towing package
3175 kg (7000 lb.)

Standard cab models
2358 kg (5200 lb.)
Access cab models
2268 kg (5000 lb.)

378

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Four−wheel drive models
Standard cab models
Without towing package
2494 kg (5500 lb.)
With towing package
3311 kg (7300 lb.)
Access cab models
Without towing package
2358 kg (5200 lb.)
With towing package
3175 kg (7000 lb.)
Double cab models
Without towing package
2222 kg (4900 lb.)
With towing package
3039 kg (6700 lb.)

If towing a trailer and cargo weighing over 907 kg (2000 lb.), it is
necessary to use a sway control
device with sufficient capacity. The
combination of the gross trailer
weight added to the total weight of
the vehicle, occupants and vehicle
cargo must never exceed a total of
the following.
1GR−FE engine
4173 kg (9200 lb.)
2UZ−FE engine
Without towing package
4536 kg (10000 lb.)
With towing package
5352 kg (11800 lb.)
Exceeding the maximum weight of
the trailer, the vehicle, or the vehicle and trailer combination, can
cause an accident resulting in serious personal injuries.

D Trailer hitch assemblies have differ-

ent weight capacities established by
the hitch manufacturer. Even though
the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a higher weight, the
operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the particular
hitch assembly and never exceed
the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer−hitch. Exceeding
the maximum weight rating set by
the trailer hitch manufacturer can
cause an accident resulting in serious personal injuries.

379

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D The gross vehicle weight must not

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) indicated on the
Certification Label. The gross vehicle weight is the sum of weights
of the unloaded vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, hitch and trailer
tongue load. It also includes the
weight of any special equipment
installed on your vehicle.

D The load on either the front or rear

axle resulting from distribution of
the gross vehicle weight on both
axles must not exceed the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) listed
on the Certification Label.

Total trailer weight

Tongue load

Weight carrying hitch or distributing
hitch
1GR−FE engine
Standard cab models
236 kg (520 lb.)
Access cab models
227 kg (500 lb.)

Tongue load
Total trailer weight

2UZ−FE engine
100 = 9 to 11%

D The trailer cargo load should be
distributed so that the tongue load
is 9 to 11% of the total trailer
weight, not exceeding the maximum
load of the following.

Two−wheel drive models
Standard cab models
Without towing package
249 kg (550 lb.)
With towing package
331 kg (730 lb.)
Access cab models
Without towing package
249 kg (550 lb.)
With towing package
331 kg (730 lb.)

380

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Double cab models
Without towing package
236 kg (520 lb.)
With towing package
318 kg (700 lb.)
Four−wheel drive models
Standard cab models
Without towing package
249 kg (550 lb.)
With towing package
331 kg (730 lb.)
Access cab models
Without towing package
236 kg (520 lb.)
With towing package
318 kg (700 lb.)
Double cab models
Without towing package
222 kg (490 lb.)
With towing package
304 kg (670 lb.)

However, if towing with a fifth
wheel trailer, the cargo load must
be distributed so that the tongue
load is 19 to 21% of the total trailer
weight. Never load the trailer with
more weight in the back than in the
front. About 60% of the trailer load
should be in the front half of the
trailer and the remaining 40% in the
rear.

HITCHES

D If you wish to install a trailer hitch, you
should consult with your Toyota dealer.

D Use only a hitch recommended by the
hitch manufacturer and the one which
conforms to the total trailer weight
requirement.

D The hitch must be bolted securely to
the vehicle frame and installed according to the hitch manufacturer’s instructions.

D The hitch ball and king pin should have
a light coat of grease.

D Toyota recommends removing the trail-

er hitch whenever you are not towing
a trailer to reduce the possibility of
additional damage caused by the hitch
if your vehicle is struck from behind.
After removing the hitch, seal any
mounting holes in the vehicle body to
prevent entry of pollutants such as exhaust fumes, dirt, water, etc.

381

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

TRAILER BALL

NOTICE

Follow these easy steps to properly determine the correct trailer ball for your application:

Do not use axle−mounted hitches as
they can cause damage to the axle
housing, wheel bearings, wheels or
tires. Also, never install a hitch which
may interfere with the normal function
of an Energy Absorbing Bumper, if so
equipped.

1. Determine the correct trailer ball size
for the trailer coupler. Most couplers
are stamped with the required trailer
ball size. The sizes you will most likely
find stamped on the coupler are:

1
2
3
4

Trailer ball load rating
Ball diameter
Shank length
Shank diameter

Trailer class

Typical trailer ball size

2 5/16 in.

II and III
I

2 in.
1 7/8 in.

2. Select the appropriate trailer ball to
match or exceed the gross trailer
weight rating of the trailer. The trailer
ball load rating should be printed on
the top of the ball.
3. When mounted in the ball mount, the
threaded ball shank must protrude beyond the bottom of the lock washer
and nut at least 2 threads. The trailer
ball shank must be matched to the ball
mount hole diameter size.

382

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

NOTICE
Vehicles with 2UZ−FE engine (with
towing package)—Only use a ball
mount attachment specified for the
Toyota Tundra.

BUMPER TOWING
The rear bumper of your vehicle is
equipped with a hole to install a trailer
ball. The maximum gross trailer weight is
2268 kg (5000 lb.).

CAUTION

FIFTH WHEEL TRAILER

NOTICE
When towing a fifth wheel trailer, be
careful not to hit the cabin or deck
by the trailer while making a sharp
turn.

The maximum gross trailer weight
(trailer weight plus cargo weight)
when towing with the bumper must
never exceed 2268 kg (5000 lb.).

383

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

MATCHING TRAILER BALL HEIGHT TO
TRAILER COUPLER HEIGHT
No matter which class of tow hitch applies, for a safe trailer hookup, the trailer
ball setup on must be the proper height
for the coupler on the trailer.
BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

D Toyota

recommends trailers with
brakes that conform to any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.

D A safety chain must always be used

between the towing vehicle and the
trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the
chain for turns. The chain should
cross under the trailer tongue to
prevent the tongue from dropping to
the ground in case it becomes damaged or separated. For correct safety
chain procedures, follow the hitch or
trailer manufacturer’s recommendations.

CAUTION

D If the total trailer weight exceeds

453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes are
required.

D Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-

draulic system as it would lower its
braking effectiveness.

D Never tow a trailer without using a

safety chain securely attached to
both the trailer and the vehicle. If
damage occurs to the coupling unit
or hitch ball, there is danger of the
trailer wandering over into another
lane.

1 Coupler
2 Trailer ball

384

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SERVICE CONNECTOR
BRAKE CONTROLLER
package)

FOR TOWING
(with towing

Your vehicle is equipped with a service
connector for the trailer brake controller
as shown. Link the connector to the trailer
brake controller via the sub wire harness
stored in the glove box. The detailed explanation of the sub wire harness circuit
is packed together with the sub wire harness.

Standard and access cab models

Be sure to position the trailer brake controller where it does not prevent the driver
from operating the pedal.

4−pin connector

Toyota recommends that the sub wire harness be stored in the glove box when it
is not in use.
TIRES

D Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are

properly inflated. See Section 7−2 and
Section 8 for instructions.

D The trailer tires should be inflated to
the pressure recommended by the trailer manufacturer in respect to the total
trailer weight.

Double cab models

7−pin connector

385

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

TOWING
LIGHTS

CONNECTOR

FOR

TRAILER

D Your vehicle is equipped with a wire

harness stored in the rear end under
body. Some models are fitted with a
socket for trailer lights under the rear
bumper. Use either of them to connect
and operate the trailer lights. However,
the trailer lights must comply with federal, state/provincial and local regulations. See your local recreational vehicle dealer or rental agency for the
correct type of wiring and relays for
your trailer. Check for correct operation
of the turn signals and stop lights each
time you hitch up. Direct splicing may
damage your vehicle’s electrical system
and cause a malfunction of your lights.
7−pin connector (with towing package)—This can be also connected to
the trailer brake and trailer sub battery.

BREAK−IN SCHEDULE

D Toyota recommends that you do not

tow a trailer with a new vehicle or a
vehicle with any new power train component (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearings, etc.) for the first
800 km (500 miles) of driving.

MAINTENANCE

D If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will

require more frequent maintenance due
to the additional load. For this information, please refer to the scheduled
maintenance information in the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement”.

D Retighten all fixing bolts of the towing
ball and bracket after approximately
1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

PRE−TOWING SAFETY CHECK

D Check that your vehicle remains level

D Check that your rear view mirrors con-

form to any applicable federal, state/
provincial or local regulations. If not,
install the rear view mirrors required
for towing purposes.

TRAILER TOWING TIPS
When towing a trailer, your vehicle will
handle differently than when not towing. The three main causes of vehicle−
trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed and improper trailer loading.
Keep these in mind when towing:

D Before starting out, check operation of

the lights and all vehicle−trailer connections. After driving a short distance,
stop and recheck the lights and connections. Before actually towing a trailer, practice turning, stopping and backing with a trailer in an area away from
traffic until you learn the feel.

when a loaded or unloaded trailer is
hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has
an abnormal nose−up or nose−down
condition, and check for improper
tongue load, overload, worn suspension
or other possible causes.

D Make sure the trailer cargo is securely
loaded so that it cannot shift.

386

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D Backing with a trailer is difficult and

requires practice. Grip the bottom of
the steering wheel and move your hand
to the left to move the trailer to the
left. Move your hand to the right to
move the trailer to the right. (This procedure is generally opposite to that
when backing without a trailer). Also,
just turn the steering wheel a little at
a time, avoiding sharp or prolonged
turning. Have someone guide you when
backing to reduce the risk of an accident.

D Because stopping distance may be in-

creased, vehicle−to−vehicle distance
should be increased when towing a
trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of
speed, allow at least one vehicle and
trailer length between you and the vehicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as
you may skid, resulting in jackknifing
and loss of control. This is especially
true on wet or slippery surfaces.

D Avoid jerky starts or sudden accelera-

tion. If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, prevent excessive clutch
slippage by keeping engine rpm low
and not racing the engine. Always start
out in first gear.

D Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.

The trailer could hit your vehicle in a
tight turn. Slow down before making a
turn to avoid the necessity of sudden
braking.

D Remember that when making a turn,

D Be careful when passing other ve-

hicles. Passing requires considerable
distance. After passing a vehicle, do
not forget the length of your trailer and
be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.

the trailer wheels will be closer than
the vehicle wheels to the inside of the
turn. Therefore, compensate for this by
making a larger than normal turning
radius with your vehicle.

D In order to maintain engine braking effi-

D Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-

er, your vehicle’s engine may overheat
on hot days (at temperatures over
30_C [85_F]) when going up a long or
steep grade with a trailer. If the engine
coolant temperature gauge indicates
overheating, immediately turn off the air
conditioning (if in use), pull off the road
and stop in a safe spot. Refer to “If
your vehicle overheats” in Section 4.

versely affect handling of your vehicle
and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention
to the rear from time to time to prepare yourself for being passed by large
trucks or buses, which may cause your
vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying
happens, firmly grip the steering wheel
and reduce speed immediately but
gradually. Never increase speed. Steer
straight ahead. If you make no extreme
correction with the steering or brakes,
the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

ciency, do not use sixth gear (manual
transmission) or overdrive (automatic
transmission).

D Because of the added load of the trail-

387

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

D Always place wheel blocks under both

the vehicle and trailer wheels when
parking. Apply the parking brake firmly.
Put the transmission in “P” (automatic)
or in first or reverse (manual). Avoid
parking on a slope with a trailer, but
if it cannot be avoided, do so only
after performing the following:

1. Apply the brakes and hold.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

When restarting out after parking on a
slope:
1. With the transmission in “P” position
(automatic) or the clutch pedal depressed (manual), start the engine.
(With an automatic transmission, be
sure to keep the brake pedal depressed.)
2. Shift into gear.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release your brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.

3. Release the parking brake (also foot
brake on automatic transmission vehicles) and slowly pull or back away
from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply
your brakes.

4. Apply the parking brake firmly.

4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

5. Shift into first or reverse (manual) or
“P” (automatic) and turn off the engine.

CAUTION

D Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or

the posted towing speed limit,
whichever is lower. Because instability (swaying) of a towing vehicle−
trailer
combination
usually
increases as the speed increases, exceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) may
cause loss of control.

D Slow down and downshift before
descending steep or long downhill
grades. Do not make sudden downshifts.

D Avoid holding the brake pedal down
too long or too frequently. This
could cause the brakes to overheat
and result in reduced braking efficiency.

388

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

How to save fuel and make
your vehicle last longer
Improving fuel economy is easy—just take
it easy. It will help make your vehicle last
longer, too. Here are some specific tips
on how to save money on both fuel and
repairs:

D Avoid long engine idling. If you have

D Keep your tires inflated at the cor-

ving. Use a gear position suitable for
the road on which you are travelling.

rect pressure. Underinflation causes
tire wear and wastes fuel. See Section
7−2 for instructions.

D Do not carry unneeded weight in
your vehicle. Excess weight puts a
heavier load on the engine, causing
greater fuel consumption.

D Avoid lengthy warm−up idling. Once
the engine is running smoothly, begin
driving—but gently. Remember, however, that on cold winter days this may
take a little longer.

D Always keep the automatic transmis-

sion overdrive switch turned on.
Driving with the overdrive switch off
will reduce the fuel economy. (For details, see “Automatic transmission” in
Section 1−7.)

D Accelerate

slowly and smoothly.
Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into high
gear as quickly as possible.

a long wait and you are not in traffic,
it is better to turn off the engine and
start again later.

D Avoid engine lugging or over−rev-

D Avoid continuous speeding up and
slowing down.
wastes fuel.

Stop−and−go

driving

D Avoid

unnecessary stopping and
braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try
to time the traffic signals so you only
need to stop as little as possible or
take advantage of through streets to
avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper distance from other vehicles to avoid sudden braking. This will also reduce wear
on your brakes.

D Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams
whenever possible.

D Do not rest your foot on the clutch

or brake pedal. This causes premature
wear, overheating and poor fuel economy.

D Keep the front wheels in proper

alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and
slow down on rough roads. Improper
alignment not only causes faster tire
wear but also puts an extra load on
the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

D Keep the bottom of your vehicle free
from mud, etc. This not only lessens
weight but also helps prevent corrosion.

D Keep your vehicle tuned−up and in

top shape. A dirty air cleaner,
improper valve clearance, dirty plugs,
dirty oil and grease, brakes not
adjusted,
etc.
all
lower
engine
performance and contribute to poor fuel
economy. For longer life of all parts
and lower operating costs, keep all
maintenance work on schedule, and if
you
often
drive
under
severe
conditions, see that your vehicle
receives more frequent maintenance.
(For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled
Maintenance
Guide”
or
“Owner’s
Manual Supplement”.)

D Maintain a moderate speed on highways. The faster you drive, the greater
the fuel consumption. By reducing your
speed, you will cut down on fuel consumption.

389

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION
Never turn off the engine to coast
down hills. Your power steering and
brake booster will not function without the engine running. Also, the
emission control system operates
properly only when the engine is running.

390

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SECTION
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

In case of an emergency
If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot increase engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle becomes stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you lose your keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . .

392
396
396
396
397
409
410
415
416

391

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

If your vehicle will not start—
(a) Simple checks
Before making these
you have followed the
cedure given in “How
in Section 3 and that
fuel.

(b) Starting a flooded engine

checks, make sure
correct starting proto start the engine”
you have sufficient

If the engine turns over at its normal
speed but will not start—

If the engine is not turning over or is
turning over too slowly—

2. If the engine will not start, the engine
may be flooded because of repeated
cranking. See “(b) Starting a flooded
engine” for further instructions.

1. Check that the battery terminals are
tight and clean.
2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch
on the interior light.
3. If the light is out, dim or goes out
when the starter is cranked, the battery
is discharged. You may try jump starting. See “(c) Jump starting” for further
instructions.
If the light is O.K., but the engine still will
not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair
shop.

NOTICE

1. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or
“LOCK” and try starting the engine
again.

3. If the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota
dealer or qualified repair shop.

If the engine will not start, your engine
may be flooded because of repeated
cranking.
With manual transmission—
If this happens, turn the ignition key to
“START” with the accelerator pedal fully
depressed. Keep the key and accelerator
pedal in these positions for 15 seconds
and release them. Then try starting the
engine with your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
If the engine does not start after 15 seconds of cranking, release the key, wait
a few minutes and try again.
If the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer
or qualified repair shop for assistance.

NOTICE
Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat
the starter and wiring systems.

Do not pull− or push−start the vehicle. Your vehicle may suddenly
move when the engine starts, and
may damage itself or cause a collision. Also the three−way catalytic
converter may overheat and become a
fire hazard.

392

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

(c) Jump starting
With automatic transmission—
If this happens, turn the ignition key to
“START” with the accelerator pedal fully
depressed, and hold the key at this position for about 30 seconds. Then the
cranking hold function stops cranking automatically, and you can try starting the
engine with your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
If the engine does not start, wait a few
minutes and try again.
If the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer
or qualified repair shop for assistance.

To avoid serious personal injury and
damage to your vehicle which might result from battery explosion, acid burns,
electrical burns, or damaged electronic
components, these instructions must be
followed precisely.
If you are unsure about how to follow this
procedure, we strongly recommend that
you seek the help of a competent mechanic or towing service.

CAUTION

D Batteries

contain
sulfuric
acid
which is poisonous and corrosive.
Wear protective safety glasses when
jump starting, and avoid spilling
acid on your skin, clothing, or vehicle.

D The gas normally produced by a

battery will explode if a flame or
spark is brought near. Use only
standardized jumper cables and do
not smoke or light a match while
jump starting.

NOTICE
The battery used for boosting must
be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you
are sure that the booster battery is
correct.

D If you should accidentally get acid

on yourself or in your eyes, remove
any contaminated clothing and flush
the affected area with water immediately. Then get immediate medical
attention. If possible, continue to
apply water with a sponge or cloth
while en route to the medical office.

393

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
1. If the booster battery is installed in
another vehicle, make sure the vehicles
are not touching. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories.
When boosting, use the battery of
matching or higher quality. Any other
battery may be difficult to jump start
with.
If jump starting is difficult, charge the
battery for several minutes.

Discharged battery

Jumper cable

Booster
battery
Positive
terminal
(“+” mark)

Discharged battery
Jumper
cable

Positive terminal
(“+” mark)

2. If required, remove all the vent plugs
from the booster and discharged batteries. Lay a cloth over the open vents
on the batteries. (This helps reduce the
explosion hazard, personal injuries and
burns.)

4. Make the cable connections in the order a, b, c, d.

3. If the engine in the vehicle with the
booster battery is not running, start it
and let it run for a few minutes. During
jump starting, run the engine at about
2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal
lightly depressed.

b. Connect the clamp at the other end
of the positive (red) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal on the booster
battery.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive
(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal on the discharged battery.

Negative terminal
(“−” mark)

Booster
battery

c. Connect the clamp of the negative
(black) jumper cable to the negative (–)
terminal on the booster battery.
d. Connect the clamp at the other end
of the negative (black) jumper cable to
a solid, stationary, unpainted, metallic
point of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
The recommended connecting points
are shown in the following illustrations:

394

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Do not connect the cable to or near
any part that moves when the engine
is cranked.

CAUTION
When making the connections, to
avoid serious injury, do not lean over
the battery or accidentally let the
jumper cables or clamps touch anything except the correct battery terminals or the ground.
Connecting point for 1GR−FE engine

5. With automatic transmission—Charge
the discharged battery with the jumper
cables connected for approximately 5
minutes. At this time, run the engine in
the vehicle with the booster battery at
about 2000 rpm with the accelerator
pedal lightly depressed.

9. If removed, replace all the battery vent
plugs.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent (for example, lights left on),
you should have it checked at your Toyota
dealer.
If the first start attempt is not successful...
Check that the clamp on the jumper
cables are tight. Recharge the discharged
battery with the jumper cables connected
for several minutes and restart your engine in the normal way.
If the another attempt is not successful,
the battery may be depleted. Have it checked at your Toyota dealer.

6. Start your engine in the normal way.
After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm
for several minutes with the accelerator
pedal lightly depressed.
7. Carefully disconnect the cables in the
exact reverse order: the negative cable
and then the positive cable.
Connecting point for 2UZ−FE engine

8. Carefully dispose of the battery cover
cloths—they may now contain sulfuric
acid.

395

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

If your engine stalls while
driving

If you cannot increase engine
speed

If your engine stalls while driving...

If engine speed does not increase when
the accelerator pedal is depressed, there
may be a problem somewhere in the electronic throttle control system.

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or
“LOCK”, and try starting the engine
again.
If the engine will not start, see “If your
vehicle will not start”.

CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering
will not work, so steering and braking
will be much harder than usual.

At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the accelerator pedal
more firmly and slowly, you can drive your
vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle
checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
Even if the abnormality of the electronic
throttle control system is corrected during
low speed driving, the system may not be
recovered until the engine is stopped and
the ignition key is turned to “ACC” or
“LOCK” position.

CAUTION
Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal operation.

If your vehicle overheats
If your engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates overheating, if you experience a loss of power, or if you hear
a loud knocking or pinging noise, the
engine has probably overheated. You
should follow this procedure...
1. Pull safely off the road, stop the vehicle and turn on your emergency
flashers. Put the transmission in “P”
(automatic) or neutral (manual) and apply the parking brake. Turn off the air
conditioning if it is being used.
2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the
radiator or reservoir, stop the engine.
Wait until the steam subsides before
opening the hood. If there is no coolant
boiling over or steam, leave the engine
running.

CAUTION
To help avoid personal injury, keep
the hood closed until there is no
steam. Escaping steam or coolant is
a sign of very high pressure.

396

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

If you have a flat tire—
3. Visually check to see if the engine
drive belt (fan belt) is broken or loose.
Look for obvious coolant leaks from the
radiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.
However, note that water draining from
the air conditioning is normal if it has
been used.

CAUTION
When the engine is running, keep
hands and clothing away from the
moving fan and engine drive belts.
4. If the engine drive belt is broken or the
coolant is leaking, stop the engine immediately. Call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to remove the radiator
cap when the engine and radiator are
hot. Serious injury could result from
scalding hot fluid and steam blown
out under pressure.
7. After the engine coolant temperature
has cooled to normal, again check the
coolant level in the reservoir. If necessary, bring it up to half full again. Serious coolant loss indicates a leak in the
system. You should have it checked as
soon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

1. Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place
well away from the traffic. Avoid
stopping on the center divider of
a highway. Park on a level spot
with firm ground.
2. Stop the engine and turn on your
emergency flashers.
3. Firmly set the parking brake and
put the transmission in “P” (automatic) or reverse (manual).
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle on the side away from traffic.
5. Read the following instructions
thoroughly.

5. If the engine drive belt is O.K. and
there are no obvious leaks, you may
help the engine cool down more quickly
by running it at about 1500 rpm for a
few minutes with the accelerator pedal
lightly depressed.
6. Check the coolant reservoir. If it is dry,
add coolant to the reservoir while the
engine is running. Fill it about half full.
For the coolant type, see “Coolant type
selection” in Section 7−2.

397

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION
When jacking, be sure to observe
the following to reduce the possibility of personal injury:
D Follow jacking instructions.
D Do not put any part of your
body under the vehicle supported by the jack. Otherwise,
personal injury may occur.
D Do not start or run the engine
while your vehicle is supported
by the jack.
D Stop the vehicle on a level firm
ground, firmly set the parking
brake and put the transmission
in “P” (automatic) or reverse
(manual). Block the wheel diagonally opposite to the one being changed if necessary.

D Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point. Raising
the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will damage the
vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and
cause personal injury.
D Never get under the vehicle
when the vehicle is supported
by the jack alone.
D Use the jack only for lifting
your vehicle during wheel
changing.
D Do not raise the vehicle with
someone in the vehicle.
D When raising the vehicle, do
not place any objects on top
of or underneath the jack.
D Raise the vehicle only high
enough to remove and change
the tire.

NOTICE
Do not continue driving with a
deflated tire. Driving even a
short distance can damage a
tire and wheel beyond repair.

398

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Required tools and spare tire
(standard cab models)

1. Get the required tools and
spare tire.
1 Jack handle
2 Wheel nut wrench
3 Jack
To prepare yourself for an emergency,
you should familiarize yourself with
the use of the jack, each of the tools
and their storage locations.

Turn the jack joint by hand.
To remove: Turn the joint in direction
1 until the jack is free.
To store: Turn the joint in direction 2
until the jack is firmly secured to prevent it flying forward during a collision
or sudden braking.

To remove the spare tire:
1. Insert the end of the jack handle
into the lowering screw and turn
it counterclockwise.
2. After the tire is lowered completely
to the ground, remove the holding
bracket.
When storing the spare tire, put it in
place with the outer side of the wheel
facing up. Then secure the tire, taking
care that the tire goes straight up
without catching on any other part, to
prevent it from flying forward during
a collision or sudden braking.
399

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Required tools and spare tire
(access and double cab
models)
1. Get the required tools and
spare tire.
1 Tool bag
2 Jack
To prepare yourself for an emergency,
you should familiarize yourself with
the use of the jack, each of the tools
and their storage locations.

Front
Access cab models

Front

Double cab models
400

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Blocking the wheel

To remove the spare tire:
1. Put a jack handle, jack handle extension and jack handle end together as shown in the illustration.
1 Jack handle end
2 Jack handle extension
3 Jack handle
CAUTION
Make sure they are securely fixed
with the screw.

2. Insert the end of the jack handle
extension into the lowering screw
and turn it counterclockwise with
the handle.
3. After the tire is lowered completely
to the ground, remove the holding
bracket.
When storing the spare tire, put it in
place with the outer side of the wheel
facing up. Then secure the tire, taking
care that the tire goes straight up
without catching on any other part, to
prevent it from flying forward during
a collision or sudden braking.

2. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to keep the
vehicle from rolling when it is
jacked up.
When blocking the wheel, place a
wheel block in front of one of the front
wheels or behind one of the rear
wheels.

401

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Removing wheel ornament

Type A

Type C

Type E
3. Remove the wheel ornament.
Pry off the wheel ornament, using the
beveled end of the wheel nut wrench
as shown.
Type B only—To protect the wheel
surface, place sufficient paper or cloth
between the wheel and wrench.

Type B

Type D

402

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Loosening wheel nuts
CAUTION

CAUTION

Do not try to pull off the ornament by hand. Take due care in
handling the ornament to avoid
unexpected personal injury.

Never use oil or grease on the
bolts or nuts. The nuts may loose
and the wheels may fall off,
which could cause a serious accident.

4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.
Always loosen the wheel nuts before
raising the vehicle.
Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise
to loosen. To get maximum leverage,
fit the wrench to the nut so that the
handle is on the right side, as shown
above. Grab the wrench near the end
of the handle and pull up on the handle. Be careful that the wrench does
not slip off the nut.
Do not remove the nuts yet—just unscrew them about one−half turn.

403

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Positioning the jack

Front

—Raising your vehicle

Rear

5. Position the jack at the correct
jack point as shown.
Make sure the jack is positioned on
a level and solid place.
JACK POINTS:
Front—Under the frame side rail
Rear—Under the rear axle housing

Access and double cab models—Put
a jack handle, jack handle extension
and jack handle end together as
shown in the illustration.
1 Jack handle end
2 Jack handle extension
3 Jack handle

Standard cab models

CAUTION
Make sure they are each securely
fixed with screws.
Access and double cab models
404

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Changing wheels
6. After making sure that no one
is in the vehicle, raise it high
enough so that the spare tire
can be installed.
Remember you will need more ground
clearance when putting on the spare
tire than when removing the flat tire.
Standard cab models—To raise the
vehicle, insert the jack handle into the
jack (it is a loose fit) and turn it clockwise. As the jack touches the vehicle
and begins to lift, double−check that
it is properly positioned.
Access cab and double cab models—
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack
handle extension into the jack (it is
a loose fit) and turn it clockwise with
the handle, making sure the handle
remains firmly fitted onto the jack
handle extension. As the jack touches
the vehicle and begins to lift, double−
check that it is properly positioned.

CAUTION
Never get under the vehicle when
the vehicle is supported by the
jack alone.

7. Remove the wheel nuts and
change tires.
Lift the flat tire straight off and put it
aside.
Roll the spare wheel into position and
align the holes in the wheel with the
bolts. Then lift up the wheel and get
at least the top bolt started through
its hole. Wiggle the tire and press it
back over the other bolts.

405

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Reinstalling wheel nuts
CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the
bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead
to overtightening the nuts and
damaging the bolts. The nuts
may loose and the wheels may
fall off, which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil or
grease on any bolt or nut, clean
it.
Before putting on wheels, remove any
corrosion on the mounting surfaces
with a wire brush or such. Installation
of wheels without good metal−to−metal contact at the mounting surface can
cause wheel nuts to loosen and
eventually cause a wheel to come off
while driving.

8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger tight.
Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end
inward) and tighten them as much as
you can by hand. Press back on the
tire back and see if you can tighten
them more.

406

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Lowering your vehicle

—Reinstalling wheel ornament
Use only the wheel nut wrench and
turn it clockwise to tighten the nuts.
Do not use other tools or any additional leverage other than your hands,
such as a hammer, pipe or your foot.
Make sure the wrench is securely engaged over the nut.
Tighten each nut a little at a time in
the order shown. Repeat the process
until all the nuts are tight.
CAUTION

9. Lower the vehicle completely
and tighten the wheel nuts.
Standard cab models—Turn the jack
handle counterclockwise to lower the
vehicle.
Access cab and double cab models—
Turn the jack handle extension counterclockwise with handle to lower the
vehicle, making sure the handle remains firmly fitted onto the jack handle extension.

D When lowering the vehicle,
make sure all portions of your
body and all other persons
around will not be injured as
the vehicle is lowered to the
ground.
D Have the wheel nuts tightened
with torque wrench to 110 N·m
(11.5 kgf·m, 83 ft·lbf), as soon
as possible after changing
wheels. Otherwise, the nuts
may loosen and the wheels
may fall off, which could cause
a serious accident.

Type A

Type B
407

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION
Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.

Type C

Type E
10.Reinstall the wheel ornament.
1. Put the wheel ornament in position.
Type A—Align the cutout of the wheel
ornament with the valve stem as
shown.
2. Then firmly tap the outer edge of
the wheel cap with the side or heel
of your hand to snap it into place.

Type D
408

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—After changing wheels
11. Check the air pressure of the replaced tire.
Adjust the air pressure to the specification designated in Section 8. If the
pressure is lower, drive slowly to the
nearest service station and fill to the
correct pressure.
Do not forget to reinstall the tire inflation valve cap as dirt and moisture
could get into the valve core and
possibly cause air leakage. If the cap
is missing, have a new one put on as
soon as possible.
12.Restow all the tools, jack and
flat tire securely.
With a spare tire of the same wheel
type as the installed tires—
As soon after changing wheels as
possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the
torque specified in Section 8 with a
torque wrench. Have a technician repair the flat tire.
With a spare tire of different wheel
type from the installed tires—

If your vehicle becomes stuck
As soon after changing wheels as
possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the
torque specified in Section 8 with a
torque wrench. Have a technician repair the flat tire and replace the spare
tire with it.
CAUTION
Before driving, make sure all the
tools, jack and flat tire are securely in place in their storage
location to reduce the possibility
of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking.
Initial adjustment of the tire pressure warning system is necessary
after you have rotated your tires.
See “Tire pressure warning system” in Section 1−7.

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,
mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt
to rock the vehicle free by moving it
forward and backward.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
“AUTO LSD” system, you can use it in
this situation. (For details, see “AUTO
LSD system” in Section 1−7.)

CAUTION
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle
free by moving it forward and backward if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle. During the
rocking operation the vehicle may
suddenly move forward or backward
as it becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or objects.

409

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

If your vehicle needs to be
towed—
NOTICE
If you rock your vehicle, observe the
following precautions to prevent damage to the transmission and other
parts.
z Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting the selector lever
or before the transmission is completely shifted to forward or reverse
gear.
z Do not race the engine and avoid
spinning the wheels.

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear

z If your vehicle remains stuck after
rocking the vehicle several times,
consider other ways such as towing.
(b) Using flat bed truck

(b) Using flat bed truck

Two−wheel drive models

Four−wheel drive models

410

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

If towing is necessary, we recommend
you have it done by your Toyota dealer
or a commercial tow truck service. In
consultation with them, have your vehicle towed using either (a) or (b).

Two−wheel drive models—

Only when you cannot receive a towing
service from a Toyota dealer or commercial tow truck service, tow your vehicle carefully in accordance with the
instructions given in “—Emergency towing” in this Section.

We
the
ing
put

Proper equipment will help ensure that
your vehicle is not damaged while being
towed. Commercial operators are generally
aware of the state/provincial and local
laws pertaining to towing.
Your vehicle can be damaged if it is
towed incorrectly. Although most operators
know the correct procedure, it is possible
to make a mistake. To avoid damage to
your vehicle, make sure the following precautions are observed. If necessary, show
this page to the tow truck driver.

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck
From front—

D Manual transmission:
recommend using a towing dolly under
rear wheels. If you do not use a towdolly, release the parking brake and
the transmission in neutral.

D Automatic transmission:
Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle with an automatic
transmission from the front with the
rear wheels on the ground, as this
may cause serious damage to the
transmission.

From rear—Place the ignition key in the
“ACC” position.

NOTICE
z When lifting wheels, take care to
ensure adequate ground clearance
for towing at the opposite end of
the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the
bumper and/or underbody of the
towed vehicle will be damaged during towing.
z Do not tow with the key removed or
in the “LOCK” position, as the
steering lock mechanism is not
strong enough to hold the front
wheels straight while towing.
(b) Using flat bed truck

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:
Use a safety chain system for all towing,
and abide by the state/provincial and local
laws. The wheels and axle on the ground
must be in good condition. If they are
damaged, use a towing dolly.

411

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Emergency towing
(two−wheel drive models
without off−road package)
Four−wheel drive models—
(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front—Use a towing dolly under the
rear wheels.

NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle from the front
with the rear wheels on the ground,
as this may cause serious damage to
the transmission.
From rear—We recommend using a towing dolly under the front wheels. If you do
not use a towing dolly, place the ignition
key in the “ACC” position, put the transmission in neutral and set the transfer in
“2WD” mode.

NOTICE
Do not tow with the key removed or
in the “LOCK” position when towing
from the rear without a towing dolly.
The steering lock mechanism is not
strong enough to hold the front
wheels straight.
(b) Using flat bed truck

All models—
(c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE
Do not tow with sling type truck, either from the front or rear. This may
cause body damage.

If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by your Toyota
dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable or chain secured to one of the emergency towing
eyelets under the front of the vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing the
vehicle.

NOTICE
Only use specified towing eyelet;
otherwise your vehicle may be damaged.

412

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Emergency towing (four−wheel
drive models and two−wheel drive
models with off−road package)
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer
it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard−surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the
wheels, axles, drive train, steering and
brakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION
Use extreme caution when towing the
vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet and towing cable
or chain. The eyelet and towing cable
or chain may break and cause serious
injury or damage.

NOTICE
Use only a cable or chain specifically
intended for use in towing vehicles.
Securely fasten the cable or chain to
the towing eyelet provided.

Before towing, release the parking brake
and put the transmission in neutral (manual) or “N” (automatic). The key must be
in “ACC” (engine off) or “ON” (engine running).

CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering
will not work so steering and braking
will be much harder than usual.
If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by your Toyota
dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing hook
under the front of the vehicle. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.

NOTICE
Only use specified towing hook;
otherwise your vehicle may be damaged.

413

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer
it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard−surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the
wheels, axles, drive train, steering and
brakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION
Use extreme caution when towing the
vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the emergency towing hook and towing cable
or chain. The hook and towing cable
or chain may break and cause serious
injury or damage.

Before towing, release the parking brake,
put the transmission in neutral (manual) or
“N” (automatic) and set the transfer in
“2WD” mode. The key must be in “ACC”
(engine off) or “ON” (engine running).

CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering
will not work so steering and braking
will be much harder than usual.

—Emergency towing hook
precautions
D Before emergency towing, check that

the hook is not broken or damaged and
that the installation bolts are not loose.

D Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the hook.

D Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and
even force.

D To avoid damaging the hook, do not

pull from the side or at a vertical
angle. Always pull straight ahead.

NOTICE
Use only a cable or chain specifically
intended for use in towing vehicles.
Securely fasten the cable or chain to
the towing hook provided.

414

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Tips for towing a stuck
vehicle
CAUTION
If the emergency towing hook is used
to get out when your vehicle becomes
stuck in the mud, sand or other
condition from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power, make sure to observe the precautions mentioned below. Otherwise, excessive stress will be put on the
hook and the towing cable or chain
may break, causing serious injury or
damage.

D If the towing vehicle can hardly

The following methods are effective to
use when your vehicle is stuck in the
mud, sand or other condition from
which the vehicle cannot be driven out
under its own power. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. In addition, keep away from the vehicles and
towing cable or chain when towing.

D Remove the sand and soil in the front
and the back of the tires.

D Place stones or wood under the tires.

If you lose your keys
You can purchase a new key at your
Toyota dealer if you can give them the
key number.
See the suggestion given in “Keys” in
Section 1−2.
If your keys are locked in the vehicle and
you cannot get a duplicate, many Toyota
dealers can still open the door for you,
using their special tools. If you must
break a window to get in, we suggest
breaking the smallest side window because it is the least expensive to replace.
Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from
the glass.

move, do not forcibly continue the
towing. Contact your Toyota dealer
or a commercial tow truck service
for assistance.

D Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.

D Keep away from the vehicle during
towing.

415

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

If you lose your wireless
remote control transmitter
You can purchase a new wireless remote control transmitter at your Toyota
dealer.
Have the registered identification numbers
of your transmitters deleted from your vehicle by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible to avoid the possibility of theft or
an accident. Then, have the identification
number of your new transmitter registered.
At the same time, you must bring all of
the remaining transmitters to have them
registered again as well.
You can use the wireless remote control
system with the new transmitter. Contact
your Toyota dealer for detailed information.

416

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SECTION
CORROSION PREVENTION AND
APPEARANCE CARE

Corrosion prevention and appearance care
Protecting your Toyota from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Washing and waxing your Toyota . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

417

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Protecting your Toyota from
corrosion
Toyota, through the diligent research, design and use of the most advanced
technology available, helps prevent corrosion and provides you with the finest quality vehicle construction. Now, it is up to
you. Proper care of your Toyota can help
ensure long−term corrosion prevention.
The most common causes of corrosion
to your vehicle are:

D The accumulation of road salt, dirt and
moisture in hard−to−reach areas under
the vehicle.

D Chipping

of paint, or undercoating
caused by minor accidents or by
stones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you live
in particular areas or operate your vehicle under certain environmental conditions:

D Road salt or dust control chemicals will

accelerate corrosion, as will the presence of salt in the air near the sea−
coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

D High humidity accelerates corrosion especially when temperatures range just
above the freezing point.

D Wetness or dampness to certain parts

of your vehicle for an extended period
of time, may cause corrosion even
though other parts of the vehicle may
be dry.

D High ambient temperatures can cause

corrosion to those components of the
vehicle which do not dry quickly due to
lack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keep
your vehicle, particularly the underside, as
clean as possible and to repair any damage to paint or protective coatings as
soon as possible.

D High pressure water or steam is effec-

tive for cleaning the vehicle’s underside
and wheel housings. Pay particular
attention to these areas as it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to simply wet the
mud and debris without removing. The
lower edge of doors, rocker panels and
frame members have drain holes which
should not be allowed to clog with dirt
as trapped water in these areas can
cause corrosion.

D Wash the underside of the vehicle thoroughly when winter is over.

your

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” for
more tips.

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, of
course, necessary to keep your vehicle
clean by regular washing, but to prevent
corrosion, the following points should be
observed:

Check the condition of your vehicle’s
paint and trim. If you find any chips or
scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately to prevent corrosion from starting. If the chips or scratches have gone
through the bare metal, have a qualified
body shop make the repair.

To help prevent corrosion on
Toyota, follow these guidelines:

D If you drive on salted roads in the
winter or if you live near the ocean,
you should hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month to minimize corrosion.

418

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Washing and waxing your
Toyota
Check the interior of your vehicle. Water and dirt can accumulate under the
floor mats and could cause corrosion. Occasionally check under the mats to make
sure the area is dry. Be particularly careful when transporting chemicals, cleansers, fertilizers, salt, etc.; these should be
transported in proper containers. If a spill
or leak should occur, immediately clean
and dry the area.
Use mud shields on your wheels. If you
drive on salted or gravel roads, mud
shields help protect your vehicle. Full−size
shields, which come as near to the ground
as possible, are the best. We recommend
that the fittings and the area where the
shields are installed be treated to resist
corrosion. Your Toyota dealer will be
happy to assist in supplying and installing
the shields if they are recommended for
your area.
Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated
garage or a roofed place. Do not park
your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. If you wash your vehicle in
the garage, or if you drive it covered with
water or snow, your garage may be so
damp as to cause corrosion. Even if your
garage is heated, a wet vehicle can corrode if the ventilation is poor.

Washing your Toyota
Keep your
washing.

vehicle

clean

regular

The following cases may cause weakness
to the paint or corrosion to the body and
parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as possible.

D When driving in a coastal area
D When driving on a road sprinkled with
antifreeze

D When exposed to coal tar, tree sap,
bird droppings and carcass of an insect

D When driving in areas where there is

a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust or
chemical substances

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Remove any mud or road salt from the
underside of the vehicle or in the
wheel wells.
2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,
mixed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and
keep it wet by dipping it frequently into
the wash water. Do not rub hard—let
the soap and water remove the dirt.
Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high−
pressure car wash, for example) at or
near the fuel tank inlet with the fuel filler
door opened. If the water enters the air
vent, you may experience trouble with refueling or rough engine idling.

Work in the shade and wait until the
vehicle body is not hot to the touch.

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic
wheel ornaments are damaged easily by
organic substances. If any organic substances splashes an ornament, be sure to
wash it off with water and check if the
ornament is damaged.

CAUTION

When cleaning under floor or chassis,
be careful not to injure your hands.

Do not attach the heavily damaged
plastic wheel ornament. It may fly off
the wheel and cause accidents while
the vehicle is moving.

D When the vehicle becomes remarkably
dirty with dust and mud

Hand−washing your Toyota

419

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Cleaning the interior
Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap
or neutral detergent.
Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do not
scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper
faces are soft.
Road tar: Remove with turpentine or
cleaners that are marked safe for painted
surfaces.

NOTICE
Do not use organic substances (gasoline, kerosene, benzine or strong solvents), which may be toxic or cause
damage.
3. Rinse
thoroughly—dried
soap
can
cause streaking. In hot weather you
may need to rinse each section right
after you wash it.
4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle
using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not
rub or press hard—you might scratch
the paint.

Waxing your Toyota
Polishing and waxing is recommended
to maintain the original beauty of your
Toyota’s finish.
Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle
surface does not repel water well.
1. Always wash and dry the vehicle before you begin waxing, even if you are
using a combined cleaner and wax.
2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If
the finish has become extremely weathered, use a car−cleaning polish, followed by a separate wax. Carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions and
precautions. Be sure to polish and wax
the chrome trim as well as the paint.
3. Wax the vehicle again when water
does not bead but remains on the surface in large patches.

CAUTION

D Vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield airbags:

Be careful not to splash water or
spill liquid on the floor. This may
prevent the side airbags and curtain
shield airbags from activating correctly, resulting in serious injury.

D Do not wash the vehicle floor with

water, or allow water to get onto
the floor when cleaning the vehicle
interior or exterior. Water may get
into audio components or other
electrical components above or under the floor carpet (or mat) and
cause a malfunction; and it may
cause body corrosion.

NOTICE
Always remove the plastic bumpers if
your vehicle is re−painted and placed
in a high heat paint waxing booth.
High temperatures could damage the
bumpers.

420

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Vinyl interior

Carpets

The vinyl upholstery may be easily
cleaned with a mild soap or detergent
and water.

Use a good foam−type
clean the carpets.

First vacuum over the upholstery to remove loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or
soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the
vinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a few
minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt
and wipe off the soap with a clean damp
cloth. If all the dirt do not come off, repeat the procedure. Commercial foaming−
type vinyl cleaners are also available
which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.

NOTICE
Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline
or window cleaner on the interior.

Windows
shampoo

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove
as much dirt as possible. Several types of
foam cleaners are available; some are in
aerosol cans and others are powders or
liquids which you mix with water to produce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,
use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.
Rub in overlapping circles.
Do not apply water—the best results are
obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as
possible. Read the shampoo instructions
and follow them closely.
Seat belts
The seat belts may be cleaned with
mild soap and water or with lukewarm
water.
Use a cloth or sponge. As you are cleaning, check the belts for excessive wear,
fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE
z Do not use dye or bleach on the
belts—it may weaken them.
z Do not use the belts until they become dry.

The windows may be cleaned with any
household window cleaner.

NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the back
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the heater wires or connectors.
Air conditioning control panel, audio
panel, instrument panel, console panel,
and switches
Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.
Soak a clean soft cloth in water or lukewarm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE
z Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,
etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.
These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or peeling of the
surface.
z If you use cleaners or polishing
agents, make sure their ingredients
do not include the substances mentioned above.

421

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

z If you use a liquid car freshener, do
not spill the liquid onto the vehicle’s interior surfaces. It may contain
the
ingredients mentioned
above. Immediately clean any spill
using the method mentioned above.
Leather Interior
The leather upholstery may be cleaned
with neutral detergent for wool.
Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened
with 5% solution of neutral detergent for
wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces
of detergent with a clean damp cloth.
After cleaning or whenever any part of the
leather gets wet, dry with a soft clean
cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a ventilated shaded area.

NOTICE
z If a stain should fail to come out
with a neutral detergent, apply a
cleaner that does not contain an
organic solvent.
z Never use organic substances such
as benzine, alcohol or gasoline or
alkaline or acid solutions for cleaning the leather as these could
cause discoloring.
z Use of a nylon brush or synthetic
fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the
fine grained surface of the leather.
z Mildew may develop on soiled leather upholstery. Be especially careful
to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your
upholstery always clean.

z The interior of your vehicle is apt
to heat up on hot summer days, so
avoid placing on the upholstery
items made of vinyl or plastic or
containing wax as these tend to
stick to leather when warm.
z Improper cleaning of the leather upholstery could result in discoloration or staining.
If you have any questions about the
cleaning of your Toyota, your local
Toyota dealer will be pleased to answer
them.

z Long exposure to direct sunlight
may cause the leather surface to
harden and shrink. Keep your vehicle in a shaded area, especially in
the summer.

422

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SECTION

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE
Vehicle maintenance and care
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Does your vehicle need repairing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . . . . . .

424
425
427
428

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

423

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Maintenance requirements
Your Toyota vehicle has been designed for
fewer maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save both your time
and money. However, each regular maintenance, as well as day−to−day care, is
more important than ever before to ensure
smooth, trouble−free, safe, and economical
drivings.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make
sure the specified maintenance, including
general maintenance service, is performed.
Note that both the new vehicle and emission control system warranties specify that
proper maintenance and care must be performed. See “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for complete warranty information.
General maintenance
General maintenance items are those day−
to−day care practices that are important to
your vehicle for proper operation. It is the
owner’s responsibility to ensure that the
general maintenance items are performed
regularly.
These checks or inspections can be done
either by yourself or a qualified technician,
or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will be
pleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance
The scheduled maintenance items listed in
the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are those
required to be serviced at regular intervals.
For details of your maintenance schedule,
read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”
or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
It is recommended that any replacement
parts used for maintenance or for the
repair of the emission control system
be Toyota supplied.
The owner may elect to use non−Toyota
supplied parts for replacement purposes without invalidating the emission
control system warranty. However, use
of replacement parts which are not of
equivalent quality may impair the effectiveness of the emission control systems.

You may also elect to have maintenance, replacement, or repair of the
emission control devices and system
performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual without invalidating this warranty. See “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement” for complete warranty information.
Where to go for service?
Toyota technicians are well−trained specialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information through technical
bulletins, service tips, and in−dealership
training programs. They learn to work on
Toyotas before they work on your vehicle,
rather than while they are working on it.
You can be confident that your Toyota
dealer’s service department performs the
best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle—reliably and economically.
Your copy of the repair order is proof that
all required maintenance has been performed for warranty coverage. If any problems should arise with your vehicle while
under warranty, your Toyota dealer will
promptly take care of it. Again, be sure
to keep a copy of the repair order for any
service performed on your Toyota.

424

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

General maintenance
What about do−it−yourself maintenance?
Many of the maintenance items are easy
to do yourself if you have a little mechanical ability and a few basic automotive
tools. Simple instructions for how to perform them are presented in Section 7.
If you are a skilled do−it−yourself mechanic, the Toyota service manuals are recommended. Please be aware that do−it−yourself maintenance can affect your warranty
coverage. See “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenance
items that should be performed as frequently as specified. In addition to checking the items listed, if you notice any
unusual noise, smell or vibration, you
should investigate the cause or take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer or a qualified service shop immediately. It is recommended that any problem you notice be
brought to the attention of your dealer or
the qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION
Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you run the engine.
IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Items listed below should be checked
from time to time, e.g. each time when
refueling.
Washer fluid
Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the
tank. See Section 7−3 for additional information.

Engine coolant level
Make sure the
the “F” and “L”
reservoir when
Section 7−2 for

coolant level is between
lines on the see−through
the engine is cold. See
additional information.

Radiator, condenser and hoses
Check that the front of the radiator and
condenser are clean and not blocked with
leaves, dirt, or insects. See Section 7−2
for additional information.
Battery condition
Check the battery condition by the indicator color. See Section 7−3 for additional
information.
Brake fluid level
Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.
See Section 7−2 for additional information.
Engine oil level
Check the level on the dipstick with the
engine turned off and the vehicle parked
on a level spot. See Section 7−2 for additional information.

425

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Power steering fluid level

Seats

Parking brake (pedal type)

Check the level through the reservoir. The
level should be in the “HOT” or “COLD”
range depending on the fluid temperature.
See Section 7−2 for additional information.

Check that all seat controls such as seat
adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operate
smoothly and that all latches lock securely
in any position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and
that the locks hold securely in any latched
position. For folding−down seatback, check
that the latches lock securely.

Check that the pedal has the proper travel
and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle
is held securely with only the parking
brake applied.

Exhaust system
If you notice any change in the sound of
the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have
the cause located and corrected immediately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” in
Section 2.)
INSIDE THE VEHICLE
Items listed below should be checked
regularly, e.g. while performing periodic
services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Lights
Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights
are all working. Check headlight aim.

Seat belts
Check that the seat belt system such as
buckles, retractors and anchors operate
properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt
webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
Accelerator pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and
uneven pedal effort or catching.
Clutch pedal

Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers

Check the pedal for smooth operation.

Check that all service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers function properly.

Check the pedal for smooth operation and
that the pedal has the proper clearance.
Check the brake booster function.

Steering wheel
Be alert for changes in steering condition,
such as hard steering or strange noise.

Brake pedal

Brakes

Parking brake (lever type)
Check that the lever has the proper travel
and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle
is held securely with only the parking
brake applied.
Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism
On a safe incline, check that your vehicle
is held securely with the selector lever in
“P” position and all brakes released.
OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Items listed below should be performed
from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Fluid leaks
Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. If you smell fuel
fumes or notice any leak, have the cause
found and corrected immediately.

In a safe place, check that the brakes do
not pull to one side when applied.

426

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Does your vehicle need
repairing?
Doors and engine hood
Check that all doors including tailgate operate smoothly and all latches lock securely. Make sure the engine hood secondary latch secures the hood from
opening when the primary latch is released.

Tire inflation pressure
Check the pressure with a gauge every two weeks, or at least once a
month. See Section 7−2 for additional
information.
Tire surface and wheel nuts
Check the tires carefully for cuts,
damage or excessive wear. See Section 7−2 for additional information.
When checking the tires, make sure
no nuts are missing, and check the
nuts for looseness. Tighten them if
necessary.
Tire rotation
Rotate the tires according to the
maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information, please
refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.) See Section 7−2 for additional
information.

Be on the alert for changes in performance, sounds, and visual tip−offs that
indicate service is needed. Some important clues are as follows:

D
D
D
D

Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging
Appreciable loss of power
Strange engine noises
A leak under the vehicle (however, water dripping from the air conditioning
after use is normal.)

D Change in exhaust sound (This may

indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide
leak. Drive with the windows open and
have the exhaust system checked immediately.)

D Engine continually runs hot; oil pressure gauge stays low

If you notice any of these clues, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible. It probably needs adjustment or
repair.

CAUTION
Do not continue driving with the vehicle unchecked. It could result in serious vehicle damage and possibly
personal injury.

D Flat−looking tire; excessive tire squeal
when cornering; uneven tire wear

D Vehicle pulls to one side when driving
straight on a level road

D Strange noises related to suspension
movement

D Loss of brake effectiveness; spongy

feeling brake or clutch pedal; pedal almost touches floor; vehicle pulls to one
side when braking

D Engine coolant temperature continually
higher than normal

427

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD
(On−Board Diagnostics) checks.
The OBD system monitors the operation
of the emission control system. When the
OBD system determines that a problem
exists somewhere in the emission control
system, the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on. In this case, your vehicle may
not pass the I/M test and need to be
repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to
service the vehicle.
Even
does
pass
have

if the malfunction indicator lamp
not come on, your vehicle may not
the I/M test as readiness codes
not been set in the OBD system.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had
come on recently due to temporary malfunction such as a loose fuel tank cap,
your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off
after taking several driving trips, but the
error code in the OBD system will not be
cleared unless about 40 trips or more are
taken.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
even the malfunction indicator lamp does
not come on, contact your Toyota dealer
to prepare the vehicle for re−testing.

Readiness codes are automatically set
during ordinary driving. However, when the
battery is disconnected or run down, the
codes are erased. Also, depending on
your driving habits, the codes may not be
completely set.

428

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SECTION

7− 1

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Introduction
Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do−it−yourself service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

430
432
433
435

429

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Engine compartment overview
"1GR−FE engine
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil level dipstick
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Fuse block
6. Battery
7. Engine coolant reservoir
8. Radiator
9. Condenser
10. Windshield washer fluid tank

430

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

"2UZ−FE engine
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil level dipstick
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Fuse blocks
6. Battery
7. Engine coolant reservoir
8. Radiator
9. Condenser
10. Windshield washer fluid tank

431

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Fuse locations

Spare fuses

Standard and access cab models

Double cab models

432

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Do−it−yourself service
precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself,
be sure to follow the correct procedure
given in this Section.
You should be aware that improper or incomplete servicing may result in operating
problems.
Performing
do−it−yourself
maintenance
during the warranty period may affect your
warranty coverage. Read the separate
Toyota Warranty statement for details and
suggestions.
This Section gives instructions only for
those items that are relatively easy for an
owner to perform. As explained in Section
6, there are still a number of items that
must be done by a qualified technician
with special tools.
For information on tools and parts for do−
it−yourself maintenance, see “Parts and
tools”.
Utmost care
ing on your
injury. Here
you should
serve:

should be taken when workvehicle to prevent accidental
are a few precautions that
be especially careful to ob-

Spare fuses

433

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION

D When the engine is running, keep

hands, clothing, and tools away
from the moving fan and engine
drive
belts.
(Removing
rings,
watches, and ties is advisable.)

D Right

after driving, the engine
compartment—the engine, radiator,
exhaust manifold, power steering
fluid reservoir and spark plug
boots, etc.—will be hot. So be careful not to touch them. Oil, fluids
and spark plugs may also be hot.

D If the engine is hot, do not remove

the radiator cap or loosen the drain
plugs to prevent burning yourself.

D Do not leave anything that may
burn easily, such as paper or rags,
in the engine compartment.

D Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-

low open flames around fuel or the
battery. Their fumes are flammable.

D Do not get under your vehicle with
just the body jack supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands or
other solid supports.

D Use eye protection whenever you

NOTICE

D Used engine oil contains potentially

z Remember that battery and ignition
cables carry high currents or voltages. Be careful of accidentally
causing a short circuit.

work on or under your vehicle
where you may be exposed to flying
or falling material, fluid spray, etc.

harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care
should be taken to avoid prolonged
and repeated contact with it. To remove used engine oil from your
skin, wash thoroughly with soap
and water.

D Do not leave used oil within the
reach of children.

D Dispose of used oil and filter only
in a safe and acceptable manner.
Do not dispose of used oil and filter in household trash, in sewers or
onto the ground. Call your dealer or
a service station for information
concerning recycling or disposal.

D Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

z Add only “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate,
non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid
organic acid technology to fill the
radiator. “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water (for
the U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water (for Canada).
z If you spill some of the coolant, be
sure to wash it off with water to
prevent it from damaging the parts
or paint.
z Do not allow dirt or anything else
to fall through the spark plug holes.
z Do not pry the outer electrode of a
spark plug against the center electrode.

434

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Parts and tools
z Use only spark plugs of the specified type. Using other types will
cause engine damage, loss of performance or radio noise.
z Do not reuse iridium−tipped spark
plugs by cleaning or regapping.
z Do not overfill automatic transmission fluid, or the transmission
could be damaged.
z Do not drive with the air cleaner
filter removed, or excessive engine
wear could result. Also backfiring
could cause a fire in the engine
compartment.
z Be careful not to scratch the glass
surface with the wiper frame.
z When closing the engine hood,
check to see that you have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc.

Here is a list of parts and tools you will
need to perform do−it−yourself maintenance. Remember all Toyota parts are designed in metric sizes, so your tools must
be metric.
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

D “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

See Section 7−2 for details about engine oil selection.
Tools:

ENGINE

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID
Parts (if level is low):

D SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
Tools:

D Rag or paper towel
D Funnel (only for adding fluid)
CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID
Parts (if level is low):

D Rag or paper towel
D Funnel (only for adding oil)
THE

D Funnel (only for adding coolant)

brake fluid

Parts (if level is low):

CHECKING
LEVEL

Tools:

D Automatic

transmission
DEXRONrII or III

COOLANT

Parts (if level is low):

D “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or

similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−
life hybrid organic acid technology.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a
mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55%
coolant and 45% deionized water (for
Canada).

fluid

Tools:

D Rag or paper towel
D Funnel (only for adding fluid)
CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION
Tools:

D
D
D
D

Warm water
Baking soda
Grease
Conventional
clamp bolts)

wrench

(for

terminal

435

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES
Parts (if replacement is necessary):

D Fuse with same amperage rating as
original

ADDING WASHER FLUID
Parts:

D Water
D Washer fluid containing antifreeze
(for winter use)

Tools:

D Funnel
REPLACING LIGHT BULBS
Parts:

D Bulb with same number and wattage
rating as original (See charts in “Replacing light bulbs” in Section 7−3.)

Tools:

D Screwdriver
D Wrench

436

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SECTION
DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

7− 2

Engine and Chassis
Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the radiator and condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum wheel precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

438
440
441
442
444
444
447
449
450
452
452

437

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Checking the engine oil level
Low level

Add oil

Full level

O.K.

Too full

1GR−FE engine

Low level

Full level

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level
on the dipstick.

If the oil level is below or only slightly
above the low level, add engine oil of
the same type as already in the engine.

1. To get a correct reading, the vehicle
should be on level ground. After turning
off the engine, wait a few minutes for
the oil to drain back into the bottom of
the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engine
oil in small quantities at a time, checking
the dipstick. We recommend that you use
a funnel when adding oil.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under
the end and wipe it clean.
3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as far
as it will go, or the reading will not be
correct.
4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil
level while holding a rag under the
end.

CAUTION
Be careful not to touch the hot exhaust manifold.

NOTICE
Add oil

O.K.

Too full

The approximate quantity of oil needed to
raise the level between low and full on the
dipstick is indicated below for reference.
When the level reaches within the correct
range, install the filler cap hand−tight.
Oil quantity, L (qt., lmp. qt.):
1.5 (1.6, 1.3)

NOTICE
z Be careful not to spill engine oil on
the vehicle components.
z Avoid overfilling, or
could be damaged.

the

engine

z Check the oil level on the dipstick
once again after adding the oil.

Be careful not to drop engine oil on
the vehicle components.

2UZ−FE engine

438

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in
your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
to satisfy the following grade and
viscosity.
Oil grade:
API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” or
ILSAC multigrade engine oil

SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for good
fuel economy and good starting in cold
weather.
If SAE 5W−30 is not available, SAE
10W−30 may be used. However, it
should be replaced with SAE 5W−30 at
the next oil change.

Recommended viscosity:
SAE 5W−30
API service symbol

Outside temperature

ILSAC certification mark

439

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Checking the engine coolant
level
Oil identification marks

Look at the see−through coolant reservoir when the engine is cold. The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between
the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir.
If the level is low, add the coolant. (For
the coolant type, see “Coolant type
selection” described below.)

Either or both API registered marks are
added to some oil containers to help
you select the oil you should use.
The API Service Symbol is located anywhere on the outside of the container.
The top portion of the label shows the oil
quality by API (American Petroleum Institute) designations such as SL. The center
portion of the label shows the SAE viscosity grade such as SAE 5W−30. “Energy−
Conserving” shown in the lower portion,
indicates that the oil has fuel−saving capabilities.
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee) Certification Mark is displayed on the front of
the container.

The coolant level in the reservoir will vary
with engine temperature. However, if the
level is on or below the “L” line, add
coolant. Bring the level up to the “F” line.

To ensure excellent lubrication performance for your engine, “Toyota Genuine
Motor Oil” is available, which has been
specifically tested and approved for all
Toyota engines.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details about “Toyota Genuine Motor
Oil”.

If the coolant level drops within a short
time after replenishing, there may be a
leak in the system. Visually check the
radiator, hoses, radiator cap and drain
cock and water pump.
If you can find no leak, have your Toyota
dealer test the cap pressure and check
for leaks in the cooling system.

CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, do not
remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.

440

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Checking the radiator and
condenser
If any of the above parts are extremely
dirty or you are not sure of their condition, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

Coolant type selection
Use of improper coolants may damage
your engine cooling system.
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,
and non−borate coolant with long−life
hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant
with
long−life
hybrid
organic
acid
technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.)

To prevent burning yourself, be careful not to touch the radiator or condenser when the engine is hot.

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and
50% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −35_C
(−31_F).

To prevent damage to the radiator
and condenser, do not perform the
work by yourself.

For the Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and
45% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −42_C
(−44_F).

NOTICE
Do not use plain water alone.

CAUTION

NOTICE
Toyota recommends “Toyota Super Long
Life Coolant”, which has been tested to
ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor
result in malfunction of your engine
coolant system with proper usage. “Toyota
Super Long Life Coolant” is formulated
with
long−life
hybrid
organic
acid
technology and has been specifically
designed to avoid engine cooling system
malfunction on Toyota vehicles.
Please contact
further details.

your

Toyota dealer

for

441

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Checking brake fluid
(without vehicles stability
control system)
If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to the
brake reservoir.
Remove and replace the reservoir cap by
hand. Fill the brake fluid to the dotted
line. This brings the fluid to the correct
level when you put the cap back on.

NOTICE
If you spill the fluid, be sure to wash
it off with water to prevent it from
damaging the parts or paint.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once
opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from
the air, and excess moisture can cause a
dangerous loss of braking.
When the brake fluid must be replaced,
contact your Toyota dealer.
To check the fluid level, simply look at
the see−through reservoir. The level
should be between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines on the reservoir.
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go
down slightly as the brake pads wear. So
be sure to keep the reservoir filled.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it
may indicate a serious mechanical problem.

CAUTION
Take care when filling the reservoir
because brake fluid can harm your
hands or eyes. If fluid gets on your
hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still feel uncomfortable
with your hands or eyes, go to the
doctor.

442

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Checking brake fluid
(with vehicle stability control
system)
Refilling brake fluid:
1. Turn the ignition switch off.
2. Depress the brake pedal more than 20
times (until the brake pedal resistance
decreases and pedal travel increases).

NOTICE
If you spill the fluid, be sure to wash
it off with water to prevent it from
damaging the parts or paint.

3. Remove the reservoir cover by hand.
Add brake fluid up to the “MAX” line.
If you do not follow the procedure above,
the reservoir may overflow.

To check the fluid level, simply look at
the see−through reservoir. The level
should be between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines on the reservoir.
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go
down slightly as the brake pads wear or
when the fluid level in the accumulator is
high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it
may indicate a serious mechanical problem.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once
opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from
the air, and excess moisture can cause a
dangerous loss of braking.

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to the
brake reservoir.

443

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Checking tire inflation
pressure

Checking power steering fluid

Close
If hot O.K.

If hot add

Open
If cold O.K.

If cold add

Check the fluid level through the reservoir. If necessary, add automatic transmission fluid DEXRONrII or III.
If the vehicle has been driven around 80
km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little
more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is
hot (60_C—80_C or 140_F—175_F). You
may also check the level when the fluid
is
cold
(about
room
temperature,
10_C—30_C or 50_F—85_F) if the engine
has not been run for about five hours.

Clean all dirt from the outside of the reservoir tank and look at the fluid level. If
the fluid is cold, the level should be in the
“COLD” range. Similarly, if it is hot, the
fluid level should be in the “HOT” range.
If the level is at the low side of either
range, add automatic transmission fluid
DEXRONrII or III to bring the level within
the range.
To remove the reservoir cap, turn it counterclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,
turn it clockwise. After replacing the reservoir cap, visually check the steering box
case, vane pump and hose connections
for leaks or damage.

CAUTION
The reservoir tank may be hot so be
careful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering could be damaged.

Standard and double cab models
444

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Keep your tire inflation pressures
at the proper level.
The recommended cold tire inflation
pressures, tire sizes and the combined weight of occupants and cargo
(payload) are described in Section 8.
The recommended tire inflation pressures and tire sizes are also on the
tire and loading information label.
You should check the tire inflation
pressure every two weeks, or at least
once a month. And do not forget the
spare!
The following instructions for
checking tire inflation pressure
should be observed:
D The
pressure
should
be
checked only when the tires are
cold. If your vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours and has
not been driven for more than 1.5
km or 1 mile since, you will get
an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.

D If you cannot adjust the tire
pressure when the tires are
cold, add 20 to 30 kPa more to
the front tires and rear tires than
the cold tire pressure, but never
exceed the maximum cold tire
pressure molded on the tire sidewall.
D Always use a tire pressure
gauge. The appearance of a tire
can be misleading. Besides, tire
inflation pressures that are even
just a few pounds off can degrade
ride and handling.
D Do not bleed or reduce tire
inflation pressure after driving.
It is normal for the tire inflation
pressure to be higher after driving.
D Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Passenger and luggage weight should be located so
that the vehicle is balanced.

Access cab models
445

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Tire pressure gauge

5. After completing the tire inflation
pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the
valve and check for leakage.
6. Install the tire valve cap.
If a gauge and air pump are not available, have your vehicle checked by
your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the tire valve cap.
2. Press the tip of the tire pressure
gauge to the tire valve.
3. Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
4. In case the tire inflation pressure
is not within the prescribed range,
insert the compressed air from the
valve. In case of applying too
much air, press the center of the
valve and release the air to adjust.

Be sure to reinstall the tire valve
caps. Without the valve caps, dirt
or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage.
If the caps have been lost, have
new ones put on as soon as possible.
Incorrect tire inflation pressure may
waste fuel, reduce the comfort of driving, reduce tire life and make your vehicle less safe to drive.
If a tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION
Keep your tires properly inflated.
Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and cause an accident resulting in death or serious injuries.
Low tire pressure (underinflation)—
D Excessive wear
D Uneven wear
D Poor handling
D Possibility of blowouts from an
overheated tire
D Poor sealing of the tire bead
D Wheel deformation and/or tire
separation
D A greater possibility of tire
damage from road hazards

446

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Checking and replacing tires
High tire pressure (overinflation)—
D Poor handling
D Excessive wear
D Uneven wear
D A greater possibility of tire
damage from road hazards

Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRES
Check the tire’s tread for tread
wear indicators. If the indicators
show, replace the tires. The location of tread wear indicators is
shown by the “TWI” or “Δ ” marks,
etc., molded on the sidewall of
each tire.

The tires on your Toyota have built−in
tread wear indicators to help you
know when the tires need replacement. When the tread depth wears to
1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indicators will appear. If you can see the
indicators in two or more adjacent
grooves, the tire should be replaced.
The lower the tread, the higher the
risk of skidding.
The effectiveness of snow tires is
lost if the tread wears down below
4 mm (0.16 in.).
If you have tire damage such as
cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
expose the fabric, or bulges indicating internal damage, the tire
should be replaced.
If a tire often goes flat or cannot be
properly repaired due to the size or
location of a cut or other damage, it
should be replaced. If you are not
sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

447

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

If air loss occurs while driving, do not
continue driving. Driving even a short
distance can damage a tire beyond
repair.
Any tires which are over 6 years
old must be checked by a qualified
technician even if damage is not
obvious.
Tires deteriorate with age even if they
have never or seldom been used.
This applies also to the spare tire and
tires stored for future use.

REPLACING YOUR TIRES
When replacing a tire, use a tire of
the same size and construction,
and the same or greater maximum
load as the originally installed
tires. Also, on four−wheel drive
models, all the tires must be the
same brand and have the same
tread patterns.
Using any other size or type of tire
may seriously affect handling, ride,
speedometer/odometer calibration,
ground clearance, and clearance between the body and tires or snow
chains.
Check that the maximum load of the
replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR)
of either the front axle or the rear
axle, whichever is greater. As for the
maximum load of the tire, see the load
limit at maximum cold tire inflation
pressure mentioned on the sidewall
of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle
Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the Certification Label.
For details about the side wall of the
tire and the Certification Label.

CAUTION
Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an accident
may occur resulting in death or
serious injuries.
D Do not mix radial, bias belted,
or bias−ply tires on your vehicle, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
D Do not use tires other than the
manufacturer’s recommended
size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics
resulting in loss of control.
D Four−wheel drive models:
Do not use tires of different
brands, sizes, construction or
tread patterns, as this may
cause dangerous handling
characteristics resulting in
loss of control.

448

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Rotating tires
For vehicles with vehicle stability
control system—
D Do not use tires of different
brands, sizes and constructions. This may damage the
drive system and prevent the
vehicle stability control system
from functioning correctly.
Toyota recommends all four tires,
or at least both of the front or rear
tires be replaced at a time as a set.
See “If you have a flat tire” in Section
4 for tire change procedure.
When a tire is replaced, the wheel
should always be balanced.
An unbalanced wheel may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Wheels
can get out of balance with regular
use and should therefore be balanced
occasionally.
When replacing a tubeless tire, the
air valve should also be replaced
with a new one.

Initial adjustment of the tire pressure warning system is necessary
after you have rotated your tires.
See “Tire pressure warning system” in Section 1−7.

With a spare tire of the same
wheel type as the installed tires

449

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Installing snow tires and
chains

With a spare tire of different
wheel type from the installed
tires

To equalize the wear and help extend tire life, Toyota recommends
that you rotate your tires according to the maintenance schedule.
(For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual
Supplement”.)
However, the most appropriate timing for tire rotation may vary according to your driving habits and
road surface conditions.
See “If you have a flat tire” in Section
4 for tire change procedure.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, out−
of−balance wheels, or severe braking.
Initial adjustment of the tire pressure warning system is necessary
after you have rotated your tires.
See “Tire pressure warning system” in Section 1−7.

WHEN TO
CHAINS

USE

SNOW

TIRES

Snow tires or chains are recommended
when driving on snow or ice.
On wet or dry roads, conventional tires
provide better traction than snow tires.
SNOW TIRE SELECTION
If you need snow tires, select tires of
the same size, construction and load
capacity as the originally installed tires.
Also, on four−wheel drive models, all
the tires must be the same brand and
have the same tread patterns.
Do not use tires other than those mentioned above. Do not install studded tires
without first checking local regulations for
possible restrictions.

450

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CAUTION
Observe the following instructions.
Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

D Do not use snow tires other than

the manufacturer’s recommended size, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in
loss of control.

D Four−wheel drive models:

Do not use snow tires of different
brands, sizes, construction or tread
patterns, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

Mark the direction of rotation and be sure
to install them in the same direction when
replacing.

CAUTION

D Do not drive with the snow tires
incorrectly inflated.

D Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)
with any type of snow tires.

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION
Use the tire chains of correct size.
Regulations regarding the use of tire
chains vary according to location or
type of road, so always check local regulations before installing chains.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on all
wheels.

Install the chains on the rear tires as
tightly as possible. Do not use tire
chains on the front tires. Retighten
chains
after
driving
0.5—1.0
km
(1/4—1/2 mile).

Installing snow tires on the rear wheels
only can lead to an excessive difference
in road grip capability between the front
and rear tires which could cause loss of
vehicle control.
When storing removed tires, you should
store them in a cool dry place.

CAUTION

D Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or

the chain manufacturer’s recommended speed limit, whichever is
lower.

D Drive

carefully avoiding bumps,
holes, and sharp turns, which may
cause the vehicle to bounce.

D Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheel

braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.

D When driving with chains installed,

be sure to drive carefully. Slow
down before entering curves to
avoid losing control of the vehicle.
Otherwise an accident may occur.

When installing chains on your tires, carefully follow the instructions of the chain
manufacturer.
If wheel covers are used, they will be
scratched by the chain band, so remove
the covers before putting on the chains.

451

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Replacing wheels
WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS
If you have wheel damage such as
bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the
wheel should be replaced.
If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,
the tire may slip off the wheel or cause
loss of handling control.
WHEEL SELECTION
When replacing wheels, care should be
taken to ensure that the wheels are replaced by ones with the same load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.
Correct replacement wheels are available
at your Toyota dealer.
A wheel of a different size or type may
adversely affect handling, wheel and bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odometer calibration, stopping ability, headlight
aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or snow chain clearance to
the body and chassis.

Replacement with used wheels is not recommended as they may have been subjected to rough treatment or high mileage
and could fail without warning. Also, bent
wheels which have been straightened may
have structural damage and therefore
should not be used. Never use an inner
tube in a leaking wheel which is designed
for a tubeless tire.

CAUTION
Observe the following instructions.
Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

D Do not use wheels other than the
manufacturer’s recommended size,
as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in
loss of control.

D Four−wheel drive models:
Do not use
brands, sizes
may cause
characteristics
control.

Aluminum wheel precautions
D When installing aluminum wheels,

check that the wheel nuts are tight
after driving your vehicle the first 1600
km (1000 miles).

D If

you have
changed your
wheel nuts are
1600 km (1000

rotated, repaired, or
tires, check that the
still tight after driving
miles).

D When using tire chains, be careful not
to damage the aluminum wheels.

D Use

only Toyota wheel nuts and
wrench designed for your aluminum
wheels.

D When balancing your wheels, use only

Toyota balance weights or equivalent
and a plastic or rubber hammer.

D As with any wheel, periodically check

your aluminum wheels for damage. If
damaged, replace immediately.

wheels of different
and types, as this
dangerous handling
resulting in loss of

452

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SECTION
DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

7− 3

Electrical components
Checking battery condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery recharging precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

454
455
456
457
458

453

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Checking battery condition—
—Precautions
CAUTION
BATTERY PRECAUTIONS
The battery produces flammable and
explosive hydrogen gas.

D Do not cause a spark from the battery with tools.

D Do not smoke or light a match near
the battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.

D Avoid contact with eyes, skin or
clothes.

D Never ingest electrolyte.
D Wear protective safety glasses when
working near the battery.

D Keep children away from the battery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

D If electrolyte gets in your eyes,

flush your eyes with clean water
immediately and get immediate
medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge
or cloth while en route to the medical office.

—Checking battery exterior
D If electrolyte gets on your skin,
thoroughly wash the contact area. If
you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.

Terminals

Ground cable

D If electrolyte gets on your clothes,

there is a possibility of its soaking
through to your skin, so immediately take off the exposed clothing and
follow the procedure above, if necessary.

Hold−down clamp

D If you accidentally swallow electro-

lyte, drink a large quantity of water
or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable
oil. Then go immediately for emergency help.

Check the battery for corroded or loose
terminal connections, cracks, or loose
hold−down clamp.
a. If the battery is corroded, wash it off
with a solution of warm water and baking soda. Coat the outside of the terminals with grease to prevent further corrosion.
b. If the terminal connections are loose,
tighten their clamp nuts—but do not
overtighten.
c. Tighten the hold−down clamp only
enough to keep the battery firmly in
place. Overtightening may damage the
battery case.

454

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Checking battery condition
NOTICE
z Be sure the engine and all accessories are off before performing maintenance.
z When checking the battery, remove
the ground cable from the negative
terminal (“−” mark) first and reinstall it last.

Type A
Green

Dark

Clear or
light yellow

White

Red

z Be careful not to cause a short circuit with tools.
z Take care no solution gets into the
battery when washing it.

During recharging, the battery is producing hydrogen gas.
Therefore, before recharging:
1. If recharging with the battery installed
on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect
the ground cable.

Type B
Blue

Battery recharging precautions

2. Be sure the power switch on the recharger is off when connecting the
charger cables to the battery and when
disconnecting them.

CAUTION

D Always charge the battery in an un-

CHECKING BY INDICATOR
Check the battery condition by the indicator color.
Indicator color

Condition

Type A

Type B

Green

Blue

Good

White

Charging necessary.
Have battery checked
by your Toyota dealer.

Dark
Clear or
Light
Yellow

Red

Have battery
checked by your
Toyota dealer.

confined area. Do not charge the
battery in a garage or closed room
where there is not sufficient ventilation.

D Only do a slow charge (5 A or

less). Charging at a quicker rate is
dangerous. The battery may explode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE
Never recharge the battery while the
engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.

455

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Checking and replacing fuses

Good

Blown

Type A

Good

Type C

Standard and access cab models

Good

Type B

Blown

Type D

Double cab models

456

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Adding washer fluid
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work, check the
fuses. If any of the fuses are blown,
they must be replaced.
See “Fuse locations” in Section 7−1 for
locations of the fuses.
Turn the ignition switch and inoperative
component off. Pull the suspected fuse
straight out and check it.
Determine which fuse may be causing the
problem. The lid of the fuse box shows
the name of the circuit for each fuse. See
Section 8 for the functions controlled by
each circuit.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in an
emergency you can pull out the “DOME”
or “A/C” fuse, which may be dispensable
for normal driving, and use it if its amperage rating is the same.
If you cannot use one of the same amperage, use one that is lower, but as close
to the rating as possible. If the amperage
is lower than that specified, the fuse
might blow out again but this does not
indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get
the correct fuse as soon as possible and
return the substitute to its original clip.

are

It is a good idea to purchase a set of
spare fuses and keep them in your vehicle for emergencies.

Type A fuses can be pulled out by the
pull−out tool. The location of the pull−out
tool is shown in the illustration.

If the new fuse immediately blows out,
there is a problem with the electrical system. Have your Toyota dealer correct it as
soon as possible.

Type D—When any of the fuses
blown, contact your Toyota dealer.

If you are not sure whether the fuse has
blown, try replacing the suspected fuse
with one that you know is good.
If the fuse has blown, push a new fuse
into the clip.
Only install a fuse with the amperage rating designated on the fuse box lid.

If any washer does
windshield washer
light comes on, the
empty. Add washer

not work or the low
fluid level warning
washer tank may be
fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.
However, in cold areas where temperatures range below the freezing point, use
washer fluid containing antifreeze. This
product is available at your Toyota dealer
and most auto parts stores. Follow the
manufacturer’s directions for how much to
mix with water.

NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any
other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.

CAUTION
Never use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, or any other object, in
place of a fuse. This may cause extensive damage and possibly a fire.

457

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Replacing light bulbs—
The following illustrations show how to
gain access to the bulbs. When replacing
a bulb, make sure the ignition switch and
light switch are off. Use bulbs with the
wattage ratings given in the table.

CAUTION

D To prevent burning yourself, do not

replace the light bulbs while they
are hot.

D Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas

inside and require special handling.
They can burst or shatter if
scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb
only by its plastic or metal case.
Do not touch the glass part of a
bulb with bare hands.

NOTICE
Only use a bulb of the listed type.

The inside of the lens of exterior lights
such as headlights may temporarily fog up
when the lens becomes wet in the rain or
in a car wash. This is not a problem
because the fogging is caused by the
temperature difference between the outside
and inside of the lens, just like the
windshield fogs up in the rain. However, if
there is a large drop of water on the
inside of the lens, or if there is water
pooled inside the light, contact your
Toyota dealer.

Bulb
No.

Type

—

60/55

Front fog lights

9006

Parking lights

168

Front turn
signal/front side
marker lights

3157A

27/8

Rear turn signal
lights

—

Stop/tail/rear
side marker
lights

—

21/5

Back−up lights

921

License plate
lights

168

High mounted
stoplight and
cargo lamps

921

Interior light

—

Front personal
lights
Type A and C
Type B

—
—

10
3.8

E
D

—

3.8

Light bulbs
Headlights

Center personal
lights

458

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Headlights
Bulb
No.

Type

—

1.5

194

3.4

Glove box light

—

1.2

Step light

—

1.4

Light bulbs
Vanity light
Door courtesy
lights

A:
B:
C:
D:
E:

HB2 halogen bulbs
HB4 halogen bulbs
Wedge base bulbs (amber)
Wedge base bulbs (clear)
Double end bulbs

1. Open the hood. Unplug the connector. Remove the rubber cover.
If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

2. Release the bulb retaining spring
and remove the bulb. Install a new
bulb and the bulb retaining spring.
To install a bulb, align the tabs of the
bulb with the cutouts of the mounting
hole.

459

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Front fog lights

—Parking lights

If either the left or right front fog lights
burns out, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE
Do not try to replace the front fog
light bulbs by yourself. You may damage the vehicle.

3. Install the rubber cover as shown,
and fit it securely on the boss. Then
plug in the connector.

LEFT SIDE PARKING LIGHT—Loosen the
bolt and remove the engine coolant reservoir.

Make sure the rubber cover fits securely
on the bulb base and the mounting body.
Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

460

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Front turn signal/front side
marker lights (standard and
access cab models)

Use a Phillips−head screwdriver. Remove
and install the clip as shown in the following illustrations.

Removing clip

Installing clip

461

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Front side marker/front turn
signal lights
(double cab models)

Use a Phillips−head screwdriver. Remove
and install the clip as shown in the following illustrations.

Removing clip

Installing clip

462

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Rear turn signal,
stop/tail/rear side marker and
back−up lights (type A)

Remove the bolts.

a: Back−up light
b: Rear turn signal light
c: Stop/tail/rear side marker light

463

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Rear turn signal,
stop/tail/rear side marker and
back−up lights (type B)

Remove the bolts.

464

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Rear turn signal,
stop/tail/rear side marker and
back−up lights (type C)

a: Rear turn signal light
b: Stop/tail/rear side marker light
c: Back−up light

Remove the bolts.

a: Back−up light
b: Rear turn signal light
c: Stop/tail/rear side marker light

Remove the bulb of the back−up light at
first when removing that of the rear turn
signal light.

465

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—License plate lights

Use a Phillips−head screwdriver.

—High mounted stoplight and
cargo lamps

Use a Phillips−head screwdriver.

a: High mounted stoplight
b: Cargo lamps

466

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SECTION
SPECIFICATIONS

Specifications
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

468
470
473
474
474
474
478
479

467

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Dimensions
Two−wheel drive models

mm (in.)
Standard cab models

Access cab models
Standard bed

StepSide bed

Double cab models

Overall length

5525 (217.5)∗1
5545 (218.3)∗2

5845 (230.1)

Overall width

1910

(75.2)

1910
1945
2015

(75.2)
(76.6)∗3
(79.3)∗4

2015

(79.3)

2015
2025

(79.3)∗3
(79.7)∗4

(70.7)

1790
1800

(70.5)∗6
(70.9)∗7 or 8

(70.5)

1880
1890
1895

(74.0)∗6
(74.4)∗7
(74.6)∗8

Overall

height∗5

1795

1790

Wheelbase

3260 (128.3)

3570 (140.5)

Front tread

1680

(66.1)

1680

(66.1)

1680

(66.1)

1680

(66.1)

Rear tread

1648

(64.9)

1648

(64.9)

1648

(64.9)

1710

(67.3)

∗1 :
∗2 :
∗3 :
∗4 :
∗5 :
∗6 :
∗7 :
∗8 :

With steel bumper
With plastic bumper
With wheel arch moulding
With over fender
Unladen vehicle
With P245/70R16 tires
With P265/70R16 tires
With P265/65R17 tires

468

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Four−wheel drive models

mm (in.)
Standard cab models

Access cab models
Standard bed

StepSide bed

Double cab models

Overall length

5525 (217.5)∗1
5545 (218.3)∗2

5845 (230.1)

Overall width

1910
1945

(75.2)
(76.6)∗3

1910
1945
2015

(75.2)
(76.6)∗3
(79.3)∗4

2015

(79.3)

2015
2025

(79.3)∗3
(79.7)∗4

1805
1815

(71.1)∗6
(71.5)∗7 or 8

1810
1820

(71.3)∗6
(71.7)∗7 or 8

(71.3)

1890
1900
1905

(74.4)∗6
(74.8)∗7
(75.0)∗8

Overall

height∗5

1810

Wheelbase

3260 (128.3)

3570 (140.5)

Front tread

1675

(65.9)

1675

(65.9)

1675

(65.9)

1675

(65.9)

Rear tread

1648

(64.9)

1648

(64.9)

1648

(64.9)

1710

(67.3)

∗1 :
∗2 :
∗3 :
∗4 :
∗5 :
∗6 :
∗7 :
∗8 :

With steel bumper
With plastic bumper
With wheel arch moulding
With over fender
Unladen vehicle
With P245/70R16 tires
With P265/70R16 tires
With P265/65R17 tires

469

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Payload
kg (lb.)
Cab type

Engine

Driving system

Grade∗4

Standard 650 (1435)

Automatic transmission

Standard bed

Standard 637 (1405)

Two−wheel drive

Automatic transmission

Standard bed

853 (1882)
Standard 832 (1836)∗1
900 (1985)∗3

Four−wheel drive

Automatic transmission

Standard bed

Standard

728 (1607)
708 (1561)∗1

Manual transmission

Standard bed

SR5

630 (1391)

Automatic transmission

Standard bed

SR5

608 (1342)

SR5

734 (1620)
713 (1574)∗1

Limited

781 (1722)
760 (1676)∗1

SR5

597 (1318)
576 (1272)∗1

Limited

645 (1422)
624 (1376)∗1

2UZ−FE

Standard bed
2UZ−FE

Payload∗5, 6

Standard bed

1GR−FE Two−wheel drive

Access cab
models

Deck type

Manual transmission

1GR−FE Two−wheel drive
Standard cab
models

Transmission type

Two−wheel drive

Automatic transmission
StepSide bed

470

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

kg (lb.)
Cab type

Engine

Driving system

Transmission type

Deck type

Grade∗4
SR5

614 (1355)
593 (1309)∗1

Limited

669 (1477)
649 (1431)∗1

SR5

486 (1073)
465 (1027)∗1

Limited

533 (1177)
513 (1131)∗1

Automatic transmission Standard bed

SR5

772 (1702)
753 (1661)∗1 or 2
734 (1620)∗1, 2

Automatic transmission Standard bed

Limited

761 (1678)
742 (1637)∗1 or 2
723 (1596)∗1, 2

Automatic transmission Standard bed

SR5

663 (1462)
644 (1421)∗1 or 2
625 (1380)∗1, 2

Automatic transmission Standard bed

Limited

652 (1438)
633 (1397)∗1 or 2
615 (1356)∗1, 2

Automatic transmission Standard bed
Access cab
models

2UZ−FE

Four−wheel
drive
Automatic transmission StepSide bed

Two−wheel drive
Double cab
models

Payload∗5, 6

2UZ−FE
Four−wheel
drive

471

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

∗1 :
∗2 :
∗3 :
∗4 :

With towing package
With electric moon roof
Without optional equipment
See “Model code” on page xi in the beginning of this manual if you are not sure of which model your vehicle is.
∗5 :
Maximum payload including weight of driver, passengers, optional equipment and cargo
∗6 : Installing accessories in addition to those installed at the factory increases the weight of the vehicle, thereby reducing
payload. Contact your Toyota dealer about the weight of accessory parts.

472

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Towing capacity∗
kg (lb.)
1GR−FE engine Two−wheel drive models
Standard cab
models

Two−wheel drive models
2UZ−FE engine
Four−wheel drive models
1GR−FE engine Two−wheel drive models

Access cab models

Two−wheel drive models
2UZ−FE engine
Four−wheel drive models
Two−wheel drive models

Double cab models

2UZ−FE engine
Four−wheel drive models

∗:

Without towing package

2358 (5200)

Without towing package

2494 (5500)

With towing package

3311 (7300)

Without towing package

2494 (5500)

With towing package

3311 (7300)

Without towing package

2268 (5000)

Without towing package

2494 (5500)

With towing package

3311 (7300)

Without towing package

2358 (5200)

With towing package

3175 (7000)

Without towing package

2358 (5200)

With towing package

3175 (7000)

Without towing package

2222 (4900)

With towing package

3039 (6700)

Trailer weight + cargo weight

473

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Engine

Fuel

Service specifications

Model:
1GR−FE and 2UZ−FE

Fuel type:

ENGINE

Type:
1GR−FE engine
6 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline
2UZ−FE engine
8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke, mm (in.):
1GR−FE engine
94.0
95.0 (3.70
3.74)
2UZ−FE engine
94.0
84.0 (3.70
3.31)
cm3

Displacement,
(cu. in.):
1GR−FE engine
2UZ−FE engine

3956 (241.4)
4664 (284.6)

1GR−FE engine
Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or
higher. For improved vehicle performance, the use of premium unleaded
gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91
(Research Octane Number 96) or
higher is recommended.

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):

2UZ−FE engine
Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or
higher

Spark plug type:

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):
100 (26.4, 22.0)

1GR−FE engine
Intake
0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)
Exhaust
0.29—0.39 (0.011—0.015)
2UZ−FE engine
Intake
0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)
Exhaust
0.25—0.35 (0.010—0.014)
1GR−FE engine
DENSO
NGK

K20HR−U11
LFR6C11

2UZ−FE engine
DENSO
NGK

KS20R11
IFR6A11

Spark plug gap, mm (in.):
1.1 (0.043)

474

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

ENGINE LUBRICATION
Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp.
qt.):
1GR−FE engine
With filter
Without filter

4.5 (4.8, 4.0)
4.2 (4.4, 3.7)

2UZ−FE engine
With filter
Without filter

6.2 (6.5, 5.5)
5.7 (6.0, 5.0)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in
your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
to satisfy the following grade and
viscosity.
Oil grade:
API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” or
ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended oil viscosity:
SAE 5W−30

Coolant type:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is
used in your Toyota vehicle at factory
fill. In order to avoid technical problems,
only use “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non−silicate, non−amine,
non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with
long−life hybrid organic acid technology.
(Coolant with long−life hybrid organic
acid technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.)

Outside temperature

Do not use plain water alone.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for
further details.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
COOLING SYSTEM
Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):
With manual transmission
10.4 (11.0,

9.2)

With automatic transmission
1GR−FE engine
10.3 (10.9, 9.1)
2UZ−FE engine
Standard and access cab models
12.6 (13.0, 11.1)
Double cab models
12.8 (13.5, 11.3)

BATTERY
Open voltage∗ at 20_C (68_F):
12.6—12.8 V
Fully charged
12.2—12.4 V
Half charged
11.8—12.0 V
Discharged
∗:

Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after the key is removed with all the
lights turned off

Charging rates:
5 A max.

475

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

CLUTCH
Pedal free play, mm (in.):
5—15 (0.2—0.6)
Fluid type:
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):
1.8 (1.9, 1.6)
Oil type:
Gear oil API GL−4 or GL−5
Recommended oil viscosity:
SAE 75W−90
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Fluid capacity (drain and refill),
L (qt., Imp. qt.):
Up to 3.0 (3.2, 2.6)
Fluid type:
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
Change automatic transmission fluid only
as necessary.

Generally, it is necessary to change
automatic transmission fluid only if your
vehicle is driven under one of the Special
Operating Conditions
listed
in your
“Scheduled
Maintenance
Guide”
or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. When
changing the automatic transmission fluid,
use only “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” (ATF
JWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in assuring
optimum transmission performance.
Notice: Using automatic transmission
fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF
WS” may cause deterioration in shift
quality, locking up of your transmission
accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission
of your vehicle.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
TRANSFER
Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):
1.0 (1.1, 0.9)
Oil type:
Gear oil API GL−4 or GL−5
Recommended oil viscosity:
SAE 75W−90

DIFFERENTIAL
Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):
Front
1.15 (1.2, 1.0)
Rear
Standard and access cab models
Two−wheel drive models
Standard differential
3.80 (4.0, 3.3)
Limited−slip differential
3.15 (3.3, 2.8)
Four−wheel drive models
Standard differential
3.50 (3.7, 3.1)
Limited−slip differential
2.85 (3.0, 2.5)
Double cab models
Standard differential
4.00 (4.2, 3.5)
Limited−slip differential
3.35 (3.5, 2.9)
Oil type:
Standard differential
Hypoid gear oil API GL−5
Limited−slip differential
Hypoid gear oil for limited−slip differential API GL−5

476

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Recommended oil viscosity:
Front
SAE 75W−90
Rear
Standard differential
Synthetic oil SAE 75W−140
Limited−slip differential
Above −18_C (0_F)
SAE 90
Below −18_C (0_F)
SAE 80W or 80W−90

BRAKES

STEERING

Minimum pedal clearance when depressed
with the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)
with the engine running, mm (in.):

Wheel free play:
Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Without vehicle stability control system
95 (3.7)
With vehicle stability control system
80 (3.1)
Pedal free play, mm (in.):
1—6 (0.04—0.24)

CHASSIS LUBRICATION
(Four−wheel drive models)

Pad wear limit, mm (in.):
1.0 (0.04)

Propeller shafts:

Lining wear limit, mm (in.):
1.0 (0.04)

Spiders
Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI
No.2
Double cardan joint
Molybdenum−disulfide
lithium
chassis grease, NLGI No.2

Power steering fluid type:
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONrII
or III

base

Slide yokes
Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI
No.2 or Molybdenum−disulfide lithium
base chassis grease, NLGI No.2

Parking brake adjustment:
Pedal type—when depressed with the
force of 300 N (30.6 kgf, 67.1 lbf)
8—10 clicks
Lever type—when pulled with the force
of 200 N (20.4 kgf, 45 lbf)
8—12 clicks
Fluid type:
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

477

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Tires
Tire size, cold tire inflation pressure and wheel size:
Standard and access cab models
Tire size
P245/70R16 106S

Tire inflation pressure kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)
Front

Rear

200 (2.0, 29)
26)∗ 1

Spare tire

240 (2.4, 35)
29)∗ 1

P265/70R16 111S

180 (1.8,
200 (2.0, 29)∗ 2

200 (2.0,
210 (2.1, 30)∗ 2

P265/65R17 110S

200 (2.0, 29)

220 (2.2, 32)

Wheel size
7J or 7JJ

7J or 7JJ

7 1/2JJ

∗1 :

Vehicles without off−road package
Vehicles with off−road package
Double cab models

∗2 :

Tire size

Tire inflation pressure kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)

Wheel size

Front

Rear

Spare tire

P245/70R16 106S

220 (2.2, 32)

240 (2.4, 35)

7J or 7JJ

P265/70R16 111S

200 (2.0, 29)∗ 1
220 (2.2, 32)∗ 2

220 (2.2, 32)∗ 1
230 (2.3, 33)∗ 2

7J or 7JJ

P265/65R17 110S

200 (2.0, 29)

220 (2.2, 32)

7 1/2JJ

∗1 :

Vehicles without off−road package
Vehicles with off−road package
NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure” through “Aluminum wheel precautions” in Section 7−2.
Wheel nut torque, N⋅m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):
110 (11.5, 83)
478
∗2 :

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Fuses (standard and access
cab models)
9. SPARE 10 A: Spare fuse
10. PWR OUTLET 1 15 A: Power outlets
11. ECU−B 5 A: Vehicle stability control
system, front passenger occupant classification system
12. H−LP RH 10 A: Right−hand headlight
(high beam)
13. PWR OUTLET 2 15 A: Power outlet

Instrument panel

Fuses (type A)
1. MIR HTR 15 A: Outside rear view mirror heaters
2. FOG 15 A: Front fog lights
3. TOW BRK 30 A (with towing package): Trailer brake controller
4. SUB BATT 30 A (with towing package): Trailer sub battery

Engine compartment

14. DOME 10 A: Interior light, personal
lights, vanity light, ignition switch light,
step light, door courtesy lights, open
door warning light
15. H−LP LH 10 A : Left−hand headlight
(high beam)
16. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, leak detection pump, emission control system
17. RADIO 25 A: Audio system
18. HEAD RL 10 A (with daytime running
light system): Right−hand headlight
(low beam)

5. TOW TAIL 30 A: Trailer lights (tail
lights)

19. A/C 10 A: Air conditioning system

6. SPARE 30 A: Spare fuse

21. HEAD LL 10 A (with daytime running
light system): Left−hand headlight (low
beam)

7. SPARE 15 A: Spare fuse
8. SPARE 20 A: Spare fuse

20. A/F 20 A: A/F sensor

479

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

22. ALT−S 7.5 A: Charging system
23. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, electronic throttle control
system
24. HAZ 15 A: Emergency flashers, turn
signal lights, towing converter
25. EFI NO.1 20 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, fuel pump, “EFI NO.2”
fuse
26. AM2 30 A: Ignition system, starting
system, “IGN” and “STA” fuses
27. TOWING 30 A: Towing converter
28. WIP 20
washer

Windshield

wipers

and

29. TURN 5 A: Turn signal lights

41. AM1 40 A: Starting system, “ACC”,
“WIP”, “4WD”, “ECU−IG”, “GAUGE” and
“TURN” fuses

34. IGN 5 A: SRS airbag system, multiport
fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, discharge
warning light, ignition system, vehicle
stability control system, front passenger
occupant classification system

43. J/B 50 A: “POWER”, “CARGO LP”,
“TAIL”, “OBD”, “HORN” and “STOP”
fuses

35. CARGO LP 5 A: Cargo lamp
36. TAIL 15 A: Tail lights, turn signal
lights, license plate lights, instrument
panel lights, parking lights, glove box
light
37. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis system

30. ECU IG 5 A: Anti−lock brake system,
vehicle stability control system, multiplex communication system, tire pressure warning system

38. HORN 10 A: Horns

31. 4WD 20 A: Four−wheel drive control
system, A.D.D. control system

40. STOP 15 A: Stoplights, high mounted
stoplight, anti−lock brake system, vehicle stability control system, towing
converter

32. ACC 15 A: Cigarette lighter, audio system, power rear view mirrors, “PWR
OUTLET 1” and “PWR OUTLET 2”
fuses

Fuses (type B)

33. GAUGE 10 A: Gauges and meters,
back−up lights, starting system, air
conditioning system, auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror, outside rear view
mirror heaters

39. STA 5 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection
system, gauges and meters

42. HTR 50 A: Air conditioning system,
“A/C” fuse

44. ABS 2 50 A: Anti−lock brake system,
vehicle stability control system
45. ABS 3 30 A: Anti−lock brake system,
vehicle stability control system
46. ST3 30 A: Starting system, “STA” fuse
47. POWER 30 A: Power door lock system, power windows, power back window, power seat
Fuse (type C)
48. FL ALT 100 A (without towing package) or 140 A (with towing package):
“AM1”, “HTR”, “J/B”, “MIR HTR”,
“FOG”, “TOW BRK”, “SUB BATT”,
“TOW TAIL”, “PWR OUTLET 1” and
“PWR OUTLET 2” fuses
49. A/PUMP 60 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

480

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Fuses (double cab models)

Engine compartment

Fuses (type A)

6. H−LP RL 10 A (with daytime running
light system): Right−hand headlight
(low beam)

1. RSE 7.5 A: Rear seat audio system,
rear seat entertainment system
2. A/F 20 A: A/F sensor
3. DEF/I UP 7.5 A: Outside rear view
mirror heaters, multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
4. A/C 7.5 A: Air conditioning system
5. H−LP LL 10 A (with daytime running
light system): Left−hand headlight (low
beam)

7. STA 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection
system
8. H−LP LH 10 A (with daytime running
light system): Left−hand headlight
(high beam)
9. H−LP RH 10 A (with daytime running
light system): Right−hand headlight
(high beam)
10. TOWING TAIL 30 A: Trailer lights (tail
lights)

Engine compartment

11. BATT CHARGE 30 A: Trailer sub battery
12. TOWING BRK 30 A: Trailer brake controller
13. CARGO LP 7.5 A: Cargo lamp
14. SPARE 15 A: Spare fuse
15. SPARE 20 A: Spare fuse
16. SPARE 30 A: Spare fuse
17. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, electronic throttle control
system

481

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

24. TURN−HAZ 20 A: Turn signal lights,
emergency flashers, towing converter
25. RAD NO.3 30 A: Audio system/video
system
26. ST 30 A: Starting system, “STA” fuse
27. HORN 10 A: Horns
28. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, leak detection pump

Instrument panel

18. EFI NO.1 20 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
19. H−LP RH 15 A (without daytime running light system): Right−hand headlight
20. TOWING 30 A: Towing converter
21. ALT−S 7.5 A: Charging system
22. DRL 15 A (with daytime running light
system): Daytime running light system
H−LP LH 15 A (without daytime running light system): Left−hand headlight

34. ECU−IG 10 A: Charging system, stop
lights, anti−lock brake system, vehicle
stability control system, traction control
system, electric moon roof, driver and
front passenger door lock system,
gauges and meters, multi−information
display, power outlets, multiplex communication system, tire pressure warning system, auto anti−glare inside rear
view mirror

29. DOME 10 A: Center interior and personal lights, personal lights, gauges
and meters, clock, ignition switch light,
door courtesy lights, step light, vanity
lights

35. WSH 25 A: Wipers and washer

30. ECU−B 7.5 A: Multiplex communication
system, front passenger occupant classification system, driver and front passenger door lock system, gauges and
meters, wireless door lock system

38. PWR NO.3 20 A: Rear passenger’s
power window (right side)

31. MIR HTR 15 A: Outside rear view mirror heaters
32. RAD NO.1 20 A: Audio system, rear
seat entertainment system
33. TAIL 15 A: Tail lights, trailer lights (tail
lights), parking lights, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system, license plate lights

36. AC INV 15 A: Power outlets
37. IGN 2 20 A: Starting system, multiport
fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

39. PWR NO.4 20 A: Rear passenger’s
power window (left side)
40. CIG 15 A: Cigarette lighter
41. RAD NO.2 7.5 A: Audio system/video
system, rear seat audio system, rear
seat entertainment system, multiplex
communication system, clock, shift
position indicator lights
42. 4WD 20 A: A.D.D. control
four−wheel drive system

system,

23. AM2 25 A: Starting system

482

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

43. STOP 15 A: Stop lights, high−mounted
stop lights, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection
system, anti−lock brake system, vehicle
stability control system, traction control
system, trailer light (stop lights), trailer
brake controller, towing converter, multiplex communication system
44. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis system
45. PANEL 7.5 A: Instrument panel lights,
glove box light, lights of seat heaters,
cigarette lighter, ashtrays, multi−information display, audio system/video system, gauges and meters, air conditioning systems, power outlets
46. PWR NO.1 25 A: Driver’s door lock
system, driver’s power window
47. WIP 25 A: Wiper and washers
48. IGN 1 10 A: Charging system, SRS
airbag system, multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, vehicle stability control
system, gauges and meters, air conditioning system, front passenger occupant classification system
49. SUN ROOF 25 A: Electric moon roof

50. PWR NO.2 25 A: Front passengers’
door lock system, front passenger’s
power window

59. AM1 40 A: “HTR”, “CIG”, “GAUGE”,
“RAD NO.2”, “ECU−IG”, “WIP”, “WSH”,
“IGN 1”, “IGN 2” and “4WD” fuses

51. HTR 10 A: Air conditioning systems,
electric cooling fan, back window defogger, seat heaters

60. PWR NO.5 30 A: Power back window

52. FOG 15 A: Front fog lights
53. GAUGE 15 A: Back−up lights, gauge
and meters, emergency flashers, slip
indicator light, vehicle stability control
system, four−wheel drive system, trailer
lights (back−up lights), multiport fuel
injection system/sequential multiport
fuel injection system, shift position indicator lights
54. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets
55. SEAT HTR 15 A: Seat heaters
Fuses (type B)
56. MAIN 40 A: “H−LP RH”, “H−LP LH”
“H−LP LL” and “H−LP RL” fuses
57. DOOR NO.2 30 A: Multiplex communication system (power door lock system, security system)
58. PWR SEAT 30 A: Power front seats

Fuses (type D)
61. ABS NO.2 30 A: Anti−lock brake system, vehicle stability control system
62. DEFOG 40 A: Back window defogger
63. HEATER 50 A: Air conditioning system
64. TOWING R/B 60 A: “TOWING TAIL”,
“BATT CHARGE” and “TOWING BRK”
fuses
65. ALT 140 A: “DEFOG”, “ABS NO.2”,
“CARGO LP”, “HEATER”, “AM1”, “PWR
SEAT”, “TAIL”, “STOP”, “SUN ROOF”,
“PANEL”, “OBD”, “FOG”, “PWR NO.1”,
“PWR NO.2”, “PWR NO.5”, “AC INV”,
“PWR NO.3”, “PWR NO.4”, “PWR
OUTLET” and “SEAT HTR” fuses
66. ABS NO.1 40 A: Anti−lock brake system, vehicle stability control system
67. A/PUMP 50 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
68. R/B 30 A: “A/F” fuse

483

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

484

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

SECTION

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.
OWNERS AND CAMPER INFORMATION

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners and camper
information
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Camper information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

485

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Toyota Motor
Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll−free:
1−800−331−4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy
campaign.
However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor
Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

Camper information—
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline
toll−free at 1−800−424−9393 (or
366−0123 in Washington, D.C.
area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S.
Department of Transportation,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulation issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
of
the
U.S.
Department
of
Transportation. It provides the purchasers
and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota
vehicles with information on truck−camper
loading. Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you
read this information.

486

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Center of gravity location
Rear end of truck bed
Recommended location
for cargo center of
gravity for cargo weight
rating

Rear end of truck bed
Recommended location
for cargo center of
gravity for cargo weight
rating

The figures given in the illustration indicate the recommended center of gravity
zone.
Standard cab models
A: 1186 mm (46.7 in.)
B: 1058 mm (41.7 in.)
Access cab models
Standard bed
A: 1186 mm (46.7 in.)
B: 1058 mm (41.7 in.)

Standard cab models

Access cab models (StepSide bed)

Rear end of truck bed
Recommended location
for cargo center of
gravity for cargo weight
rating

Access cab models (standard bed)

Recommended location for
cargo center of gravity for
cargo weight rating

Rear end of
truck bed

StepSide bed
A: 1158 mm (45.6 in.)
B: 1030 mm (40.6 in.)
Double cab models
A: 1189 mm (46.8 in.)
B: 1062 mm (41.8 in.)

CAUTION
If a load is too far back, it can cause
dangerous handling. If it is too far
forward, the front axle may be overloaded.

Double cab models

487

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Cargo weight rating and
proper matching
Camper center of gravity

Access cab models
5 people, V6,
6 people, V6,

295 kg (650 lb.)
204 kg (450 lb.)

6 people, V8, 2WD, Standard bed
295 kg (650 lb.)
6 people, V8, 2WD, StepSide bed
204 kg (450 lb.)
Recommended center of
gravity location zone

CARGO WEIGHT RATING

3 people, V8,

6 people, V8, 4WD, StepSide bed
91 kg (200 lb.)
Double cab models

Standard cab models
3 people, V6,

6 people, V8, 4WD, Standard bed
159 kg (350 lb.)

6 people, V8, 2WD,
453 kg (1000 lb.)
6 people, V8, 4WD,
476 kg (1050 lb.)

295 kg (650 lb.)
181 kg (400 lb.)

When the truck is used to carry a slide−in
camper, the total cargo load of the truck
consists of the manufacturer’s camper
weight figure, the weight of installed additional camper equipment not included in
the manufacturer’s camper weight figure,
the weight of camper cargo, and the
weight of passengers in the camper.
The total cargo load should not exceed
the truck’s cargo weight rating and the
camper’s center of gravity should fall within the truck’s recommended center of
gravity zone when installed.

CAUTION
Be careful—overloading can cause
dangerous braking and handling problems, and can damage your vehicle
and its tires.

488

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

—Gross axle and vehicle
weight ratings
GVWR

Gross vehicle weight rating

Gross axle weight rating

Two−wheel drive models
Standard cab models
V6
2494 kg (5500 lb.)
V8
2858 kg (6300 lb.)

Front GAWR

Access cab models
V6
2585 kg (5700 lb.)
V8
Standard bed
2858 kg (6300 lb.)
StepSide bed
2726 kg (6010 lb.)

Rear GAWR
Not exceed GVWR

Secure loose items to prevent weight
shifts that could affect the balance of your
vehicle. When the truck camper is loaded,
drive to a scale and weigh on the front
and on the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads
should not exceed either of the Gross
Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of
the axle loads should not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
These ratings are given on the vehicle
Certification Label which is located on the
door latch post on the left side of the
vehicle. See “Your Toyota’s identification”
in Section 2 for the Certification Label
location. If weight ratings are exceeded,
move or remove items to bring all weights
below the ratings.

Double cab models
2993 kg (6600 lb.)

GAWR
Front

1588 kg (3500 lb.)

Rear
Standard and access cab
V6
1615 kg
V8
Standard bed
1656 kg
StepSide bed
1615 kg

models
(3560 lb.)
(3650 lb.)
(3560 lb.)

Double cab models
1706 kg (3760 lb.)

Four−wheel drive models
Standard cab models
2858 kg (6300 lb.)
Access cab models
Standard bed
2858 kg (6300 lb.)
StepSide bed
2726 kg (6010 lb.)
Double cab models
2993 kg (6600 lb.)
If weight ratings are exceeded, move or
remove items to bring all weights below
the ratings.

489

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0408)

490

2005 TUNDRA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM34427U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0504)

TU−4

Quick index
D If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on . . . . . . . . . . . 170
D If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
D If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
D If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
D If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
D If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
D Tips for driving during break−in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
D How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
D General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
D Complete index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO TAG

Gas station information
Fuel type:
1GR−FE engine: UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane
Number 91) or higher
For improved vehicle performance, the use of premium unleaded gasoline
with an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher is
recommended.
2UZ−FE engine: UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane
Number 91) or higher
See page 341 for detailed information.
Fuel tank capacity:
100 L (26.4 gal., 22.0 lmp. gal.)
Engine oil:
API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil is
recommended.
See page 439 for detailed information.
Tire information: See pages 444 through 452.
Tire inflation pressure: See page 478.

Publication No. OM34440U
Part No. 01999-34440
Printed in Japan 01-0504-00 B

(

2005 TUNDRA from Apr. ’05 Prod. (OM34440U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0504)

You should know as much about the quality and
importance of proper maintenance of your new
vehicle as the people who built it.
The Toyota authorized Repair Manual
tells you how to maintain your vehicle and
enables you to correctly perform your own
maintenance.
The best way to keep your new vehicle in top
running order is to maintain it properly from
the moment you drive it off the showroom
floor.
The Toyota authorized Repair Manual is
packed with literally everything you need to
know to perform your own maintenance in
virtually every area of your new vehicle.

2005 TUNDRA from Apr. ’05 Prod. (OM34440U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0504)

Maintenance procedures for the engine,
chassis, body, electrical system, and more,
are clearly explained and illustrated.
Periodic maintenance and tune−up
Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to prevent small problems from growing into larger ones later on. The repair manual outlines exactly what maintenance is required and clearly explains how to do the
work yourself step−by−step.
Areas covered include such things as spark plug replacement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oil
and filter replacement.

Where to obtain the
Repair Manual
The repair manual for TOYOTA TUNDRA may
be purchased from any Toyota dealer or the
Material Distribution Center. To purchase the
repair manual, please contact your Toyota dealer or call the Material Distribution Center toll−
free at 1−800−622−2033.

2005 TUNDRA from Apr. ’05 Prod. (OM34440U)

’05 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0504)

WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU PLEASE BUCKLE UP
Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.
Toyota belts are:

D Comfortable
D Easy to use
D Convenient
We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.

2005 TUNDRA from Apr. ’05 Prod. (OM34440U)

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2013:05:08 21:42:52-04:00
Modify Date                     : 2013:05:08 21:42:52-04:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26
Metadata Date                   : 2013:05:08 21:42:52-04:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:1d3771bb-c4e7-447f-b82f-1a603247686b
Instance ID                     : uuid:a12c0c22-823c-4052-bbf2-9f5eefcff4f3
Page Count                      : 498

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Toyota 2005 Tundra Owners Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation